WO2012111256A1 - 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 - Google Patents
信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2012111256A1 WO2012111256A1 PCT/JP2012/000352 JP2012000352W WO2012111256A1 WO 2012111256 A1 WO2012111256 A1 WO 2012111256A1 JP 2012000352 W JP2012000352 W JP 2012000352W WO 2012111256 A1 WO2012111256 A1 WO 2012111256A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- phase
- signal
- phase change
- data
- symbol
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 1012
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 title claims description 15
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 128
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 1262
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 claims description 63
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 63
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 claims description 9
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 634
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 170
- 238000013507 mapping Methods 0.000 description 153
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 138
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 117
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 97
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 95
- 235000007682 pyridoxal 5'-phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 70
- NGVDGCNFYWLIFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridoxal 5'-phosphate Chemical compound CC1=NC=C(COP(O)(O)=O)C(C=O)=C1O NGVDGCNFYWLIFO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 69
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 67
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 65
- 230000008707 rearrangement Effects 0.000 description 59
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 39
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 30
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 description 29
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 27
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 27
- SQQWBSBBCSFQGC-JLHYYAGUSA-N ubiquinone-2 Chemical compound COC1=C(OC)C(=O)C(C\C=C(/C)CCC=C(C)C)=C(C)C1=O SQQWBSBBCSFQGC-JLHYYAGUSA-N 0.000 description 22
- 239000013598 vector Substances 0.000 description 17
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 16
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 15
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 13
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 13
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 12
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000004615 ingredient Substances 0.000 description 10
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000004422 calculation algorithm Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000005236 sound signal Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 7
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012966 insertion method Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 6
- 239000013589 supplement Substances 0.000 description 6
- 241000209094 Oryza Species 0.000 description 5
- 235000007164 Oryza sativa Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000005562 fading Methods 0.000 description 5
- 235000009566 rice Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000010354 integration Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 4
- IHCCLXNEEPMSIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]piperidin-1-yl]-1-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)ethanone Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)C1CCN(CC1)CC(=O)N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2 IHCCLXNEEPMSIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NIPNSKYNPDTRPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-[2-oxo-2-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)ethyl]-2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidine-5-carboxamide Chemical compound O=C(CNC(=O)C=1C=NC(=NC=1)NCC1=CC(=CC=C1)OC(F)(F)F)N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2 NIPNSKYNPDTRPC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000007906 compression Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000006835 compression Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009432 framing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000003252 repetitive effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000002194 synthesizing effect Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000000354 decomposition reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000002955 isolation Methods 0.000 description 2
- URWAJWIAIPFPJE-YFMIWBNJSA-N sisomycin Chemical compound O1C[C@@](O)(C)[C@H](NC)[C@@H](O)[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](O[C@@H]2[C@@H](CC=C(CN)O2)N)[C@@H](N)C[C@H]1N URWAJWIAIPFPJE-YFMIWBNJSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000001308 synthesis method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009827 uniform distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010977 unit operation Methods 0.000 description 2
- OHVLMTFVQDZYHP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)-2-[4-[2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]ethanone Chemical compound N1N=NC=2CN(CCC=21)C(CN1CCN(CC1)C=1C=NC(=NC=1)NCC1=CC(=CC=C1)OC(F)(F)F)=O OHVLMTFVQDZYHP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KZEVSDGEBAJOTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)-2-[5-[2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidin-5-yl]-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]ethanone Chemical compound N1N=NC=2CN(CCC=21)C(CC=1OC(=NN=1)C=1C=NC(=NC=1)NCC1=CC(=CC=C1)OC(F)(F)F)=O KZEVSDGEBAJOTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HMUNWXXNJPVALC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[4-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]-2-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)ethanone Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)N1CCN(CC1)C(CN1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2)=O HMUNWXXNJPVALC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VZSRBBMJRBPUNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)-N-[3-oxo-3-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)propyl]pyrimidine-5-carboxamide Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)C(=O)NCCC(N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2)=O VZSRBBMJRBPUNF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LDXJRKWFNNFDSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)-1-[4-[2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]ethanone Chemical compound C1CN(CC2=NNN=C21)CC(=O)N3CCN(CC3)C4=CN=C(N=C4)NCC5=CC(=CC=C5)OC(F)(F)F LDXJRKWFNNFDSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WZFUQSJFWNHZHM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]-1-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)ethanone Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)N1CCN(CC1)CC(=O)N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2 WZFUQSJFWNHZHM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JQMFQLVAJGZSQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[4-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]-N-(2-oxo-3H-1,3-benzoxazol-6-yl)acetamide Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)N1CCN(CC1)CC(=O)NC1=CC2=C(NC(O2)=O)C=C1 JQMFQLVAJGZSQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YJLUBHOZZTYQIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-[5-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]-1,3,4-oxadiazol-2-yl]-1-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)ethanone Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)C1=NN=C(O1)CC(=O)N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2 YJLUBHOZZTYQIP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YLZOPXRUQYQQID-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)-1-[4-[2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]propan-1-one Chemical compound N1N=NC=2CN(CCC=21)CCC(=O)N1CCN(CC1)C=1C=NC(=NC=1)NCC1=CC(=CC=C1)OC(F)(F)F YLZOPXRUQYQQID-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CONKBQPVFMXDOV-QHCPKHFHSA-N 6-[(5S)-5-[[4-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]methyl]-2-oxo-1,3-oxazolidin-3-yl]-3H-1,3-benzoxazol-2-one Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)N1CCN(CC1)C[C@H]1CN(C(O1)=O)C1=CC2=C(NC(O2)=O)C=C1 CONKBQPVFMXDOV-QHCPKHFHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DFGKGUXTPFWHIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-[2-[4-[2-(2,3-dihydro-1H-inden-2-ylamino)pyrimidin-5-yl]piperazin-1-yl]acetyl]-3H-1,3-benzoxazol-2-one Chemical compound C1C(CC2=CC=CC=C12)NC1=NC=C(C=N1)N1CCN(CC1)CC(=O)C1=CC2=C(NC(O2)=O)C=C1 DFGKGUXTPFWHIX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AFCARXCZXQIEQB-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-[3-oxo-3-(2,4,6,7-tetrahydrotriazolo[4,5-c]pyridin-5-yl)propyl]-2-[[3-(trifluoromethoxy)phenyl]methylamino]pyrimidine-5-carboxamide Chemical compound O=C(CCNC(=O)C=1C=NC(=NC=1)NCC1=CC(=CC=C1)OC(F)(F)F)N1CC2=C(CC1)NN=N2 AFCARXCZXQIEQB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003796 beauty Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000013144 data compression Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006866 deterioration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004907 flux Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011423 initialization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000696 magnetic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000007781 pre-processing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005070 sampling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000844 transformation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000007 visual effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
- H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
- H04B7/0667—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of delayed versions of same signal
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/0404—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas the mobile station comprising multiple antennas, e.g. to provide uplink diversity
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
- H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
- H04B7/0682—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission using phase diversity (e.g. phase sweeping)
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
- H04B7/0697—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using spatial multiplexing
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
- H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
- H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
- H04B7/0837—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station using pre-detection combining
- H04B7/0842—Weighted combining
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0045—Arrangements at the receiver end
- H04L1/0047—Decoding adapted to other signal detection operation
- H04L1/0048—Decoding adapted to other signal detection operation in conjunction with detection of multiuser or interfering signals, e.g. iteration between CDMA or MIMO detector and FEC decoder
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
- H04L1/004—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received by using forward error control
- H04L1/0056—Systems characterized by the type of code used
- H04L1/0071—Use of interleaving
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/18—Phase-modulated carrier systems, i.e. using phase-shift keying
- H04L27/20—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/18—Phase-modulated carrier systems, i.e. using phase-shift keying
- H04L27/20—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
- H04L27/2032—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits for discrete phase modulation, e.g. in which the phase of the carrier is modulated in a nominally instantaneous manner
- H04L27/2053—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits for discrete phase modulation, e.g. in which the phase of the carrier is modulated in a nominally instantaneous manner using more than one carrier, e.g. carriers with different phases
- H04L27/206—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits for discrete phase modulation, e.g. in which the phase of the carrier is modulated in a nominally instantaneous manner using more than one carrier, e.g. carriers with different phases using a pair of orthogonal carriers, e.g. quadrature carriers
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
- H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
- H04L27/2626—Arrangements specific to the transmitter only
- H04L27/2627—Modulators
- H04L27/2634—Inverse fast Fourier transform [IFFT] or inverse discrete Fourier transform [IDFT] modulators in combination with other circuits for modulation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/26—Systems using multi-frequency codes
- H04L27/2601—Multicarrier modulation systems
- H04L27/2647—Arrangements specific to the receiver only
- H04L27/2649—Demodulators
- H04L27/26524—Fast Fourier transform [FFT] or discrete Fourier transform [DFT] demodulators in combination with other circuits for demodulation
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
- H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
- H04L27/36—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L27/00—Modulated-carrier systems
- H04L27/32—Carrier systems characterised by combinations of two or more of the types covered by groups H04L27/02, H04L27/10, H04L27/18 or H04L27/26
- H04L27/34—Amplitude- and phase-modulated carrier systems, e.g. quadrature-amplitude modulated carrier systems
- H04L27/36—Modulator circuits; Transmitter circuits
- H04L27/366—Arrangements for compensating undesirable properties of the transmission path between the modulator and the demodulator
- H04L27/367—Arrangements for compensating undesirable properties of the transmission path between the modulator and the demodulator using predistortion
- H04L27/368—Arrangements for compensating undesirable properties of the transmission path between the modulator and the demodulator using predistortion adaptive predistortion
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
- H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
- H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
- H04L5/0078—Timing of allocation
- H04L5/0082—Timing of allocation at predetermined intervals
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
- H04L5/02—Channels characterised by the type of signal
- H04L5/12—Channels characterised by the type of signal the signals being represented by different phase modulations of a single carrier
Definitions
- the present invention particularly relates to a transmission apparatus and a reception apparatus that perform communication using a multi-antenna.
- MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output
- data transmission speed is increased by modulating transmission data of a plurality of sequences and transmitting each modulated signal simultaneously from different antennas.
- FIG. 23 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission / reception apparatus when the number of transmission antennas is 2, the number of reception antennas is 2, and the number of transmission modulation signals (transmission streams) is 2.
- the encoded data is interleaved, the interleaved data is modulated, frequency conversion or the like is performed to generate a transmission signal, and the transmission signal is transmitted from the antenna.
- a scheme in which different modulation signals are transmitted from the transmission antenna to the same frequency at the same time is the spatial multiplexing MIMO scheme.
- Patent Document 1 proposes a transmission apparatus having a different interleave pattern for each transmission antenna. That is, in the transmission device of FIG. 23, two interleaves ( ⁇ a, ⁇ b) have different interleave patterns. Then, as shown in Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2, the reception apparatus improves the reception quality by repeatedly performing a detection method using a soft value (MIMO detector in FIG. 23). Will do.
- a soft value MIMO detector in FIG. 23
- NLOS non-line of sight
- LOS line of sight
- a LOS environment In the case of transmitting a single modulated signal in a transmitting device, performing maximum ratio combining on signals received by a plurality of antennas in a receiving device, and performing demodulation and decoding on the signal after maximum ratio combining, a LOS environment, In particular, good reception quality can be obtained in an environment where the rice factor indicating the magnitude of the reception power of the direct wave with respect to the reception power of the scattered wave is large.
- BER Bit Error Rate
- SNR signal-to-noise power ratio
- FIGS. 24A and 24B show the BER characteristics of Max-log-APP (Non-patent Document 1 and Non-patent Document 2) (APP: a posteriprobability) in which iterative detection is not performed, and FIG.
- the BER characteristics of Max-log-APP see Non-Patent Document 1 and Non-Patent Document 2) (5 iterations) subjected to detection are shown.
- FIGS. 24A and 24B regardless of whether or not iterative detection is performed, in the spatial multiplexing MIMO system, it can be confirmed that reception quality deteriorates as the rice factor increases.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO system has a problem inherent to the spatial multiplexing MIMO system, which is not found in a conventional system that transmits a single modulation signal, such as “the reception quality deteriorates when the propagation environment becomes stable”. Recognize.
- Broadcasting and multicast communication are services that have to deal with various propagation environments, and it is natural that the radio wave propagation environment between the receiver and broadcast station owned by the user is a LOS environment.
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO system with the above-mentioned problems is used for broadcasting or multicast communication, a phenomenon occurs in which the receiver receives a service due to a deterioration in reception quality although the received electric field strength of radio waves is high. there is a possibility.
- Non-Patent Document 8 describes a method of selecting a codebook (precoding matrix (also referred to as precoding weight matrix)) used for precoding from feedback information from a communication partner. In a situation where feedback information from a communication partner cannot be obtained as in multicast communication, there is no description of a method for performing precoding.
- precoding matrix also referred to as precoding weight matrix
- Non-Patent Document 4 describes a method of switching a precoding matrix with time, which can be applied even when there is no feedback information.
- a unitary matrix is used as a matrix used for precoding and that the unitary matrix is switched at random.
- the application method for the degradation of reception quality in the LOS environment described above It is not described at all, and only switching at random is described.
- DVB Document A122 Framing structure, channel coding and modulation for a second generation digital terrestrial broadcasting system
- T2 (DVB-D8)-DVB Document A122 Framing structure, channel coding and modulation L. Vangelista, N.A. Benvenuto, and S.M. Tomasin, “Key technologies for next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2,” IEEE Commun. Magazine, vo. 47, no. 10, pp. 146-153, Oct. 2009. T. T. et al. Ohgane, T. Nishimura, and Y.
- ETSI EN 302 307 “Second generation framing structure, channel coding and modulation systems for broadcasting services, new berthetics, and other severating lithivalents. 1.1.2, June 2006. Y. -L. Ueng, and C.I. -C. Cheng, “a fast-convergence decoding method and memory-efficient VLSI decoder architecture for irregular LDPC codes in the IEEE 802.16E standard E. 1255-1259.
- S. M.M. Alamouti “A simple transmission diversity technology for wireless communications,” IEEE J. Select. Areas Commun. , Vol. 16, no. 8, pp. 1451-1458, Oct 1998.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a MIMO system capable of improving reception quality in a LOS environment.
- a plurality of signals transmitted at the same frequency band and at the same time from a plurality of baseband signals transmitted from the plurality of baseband signals at the same frequency band and at the same time A signal generation method for generating a phase change for both a first baseband signal s1 generated from a first plurality of bits and a second baseband signal s2 generated from a second plurality of bits To generate the first baseband signal s1 ′ after the phase change and the second baseband signal s2 ′ after the phase change, and multiply the first baseband signal s1 ′ after the phase change by u.
- the second baseband signal s2 ′ after the phase change is multiplied by v, u and v are real numbers different from each other, and the signal obtained by multiplying the first baseband signal s1 ′ after the phase change by u;
- the phase change amount that is applied to the u-multiplied first baseband signal s1 and the v-multiplied second baseband signal s2 that satisfies T is N phase change amount candidates. Each of the N phase change amounts is selected at least once within a predetermined period.
- the signal generation device is a signal generation device that generates a plurality of signals transmitted from a plurality of baseband signals at the same frequency band and at the same time, and is generated from a first plurality of bits.
- the phase change is performed on both the first baseband signal s1 and the second baseband signal s2 generated from the second plurality of bits, and the phase and the first baseband signal s1 ′ after the phase change are changed.
- a phase changing unit that generates the second baseband signal s2 ′ after the change, and the first baseband signal s1 ′ after the phase change is multiplied by u, and the second baseband signal s2 after the phase change.
- 'Is multiplied by v, u and v are real numbers different from each other, a signal obtained by multiplying the first baseband signal s1' after the phase change by u, and the second base after the phase change.
- weighted synthesis is performed in accordance with a predetermined matrix F, and the first weighted synthesized signal z1 and the second weighted synthesized signal z2 are generated as a plurality of signals transmitted at the same frequency band and at the same time.
- the phase change amount to be applied to the u-folded first baseband signal s1 and the v-folded second baseband signal s2 is selected while switching each of the N phase change amount candidates.
- Each of the N phase change amount candidates is selected at least once within a predetermined period.
- Example of configuration of transmission / reception device in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system Example of frame configuration
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Frame configuration example
- Example of phase change method Example of receiver configuration
- Configuration example of signal processing unit of receiving apparatus Configuration example of signal processing unit of receiving apparatus
- Decryption processing method Example of reception status
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method
- Example of transmitter configuration when applying phase change method Frame configuration Example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example Frame configuration example
- Example of mapping method Example of mapping method
- Example of weighted composition unit configuration Example of how symbols are rearranged
- Example of configuration of transmission / reception device in spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system Example of BER characteristics
- Example of phase change method Example of phase change method
- Example of phase change method Example of phase change method
- Example of phase change method Example of
- the configuration of the N t ⁇ N r spatial multiplexing MIMO system is shown in FIG.
- the information vector z is encoded and interleaved.
- u i (u i1 ,..., U iM ) (M: number of transmission bits per symbol).
- the transmission vector s (s 1 ,..., S Nt ) T
- 2 ⁇ Es / Nt (E s : total energy per channel).
- equation (6) can be expressed as equation (7).
- the posterior L-value is expressed as follows in MAP or APP (a posteriori probability).
- FIG. 23 shows a basic configuration of a system that leads to the following description.
- a 2 ⁇ 2 spatial multiplexing MIMO system is used, and streams A and B each have an outer encoder, and the two outer encoders are encoders of the same LDPC code (in this case, an LDPC code encoder is used as the outer encoder).
- the error correction code used by the outer encoder is not limited to the LDPC code, and other error correction codes such as a turbo code, a convolutional code, and an LDPC convolutional code are used in the same manner.
- the outer encoder is configured to be provided for each transmission antenna, but the configuration is not limited thereto, and there may be a plurality of transmission antennas or a single outer encoder. Has more outer encoders than antennas Even if it is.).
- the modulation scheme is 2 h -QAM (h bits are transmitted in one symbol).
- the receiver performs the above-described MIMO signal iterative detection (iterative APP (or Max-log APP) decoding).
- iterative APP or Max-log APP
- sum-product decoding is performed.
- FIG. 2 shows a frame structure and describes the order of symbols after interleaving. At this time, it is assumed that (i a , j a ) and (i b , j b ) are expressed as in the following equations.
- i a , i b order of symbols after interleaving
- ⁇ a , ⁇ b stream A and B interleavers
- ⁇ a ia, ja , ⁇ b ib, jb The order of data before interleaving of streams A and B is shown.
- ⁇ Iterative decoding> Here, the sum-product decoding and the iterative detection algorithm of the MIMO signal used for decoding the LDPC code in the receiver will be described in detail.
- a (m) means a set of column indexes that are 1 in the m-th row of the check matrix H
- B (n) is a set of row indexes that are 1 in the n-th row of the check matrix H.
- the sum-product decoding algorithm is as follows.
- Step A ⁇ 4 (calculation of log-likelihood ratio):
- the log-likelihood ratio L n is obtained as follows for n ⁇ [1, N].
- Step A ⁇ 5 (counting the number of iterations): If l sum ⁇ l sum, max , increment l sum and return to step A ⁇ 2.
- l sum l sum, max , this round of sum-product decoding ends.
- the above is one sum-product decoding operation. Thereafter, iterative detection of the MIMO signal is performed.
- the variables in the stream A are denoted by m a , n a , ⁇ a mana , ⁇ a mana , ⁇ na, L na
- Step B (iterative detection; number of iterations k): ⁇ k, na , ⁇ k, nb when the number of iterations is k is calculated from equations (11) (13)-(15) (16) (17) 31)-(34).
- (X, Y) (a, b) (b, a).
- FIG. 3 is an example of a configuration of transmitting apparatus 300 in the present embodiment.
- the encoding unit 302A receives the information (data) 301A and the frame configuration signal 313 as input, and the frame configuration signal 313 (the error correction method used by the encoding unit 302A for error correction encoding of data, the encoding rate, the block length, etc.)
- the frame configuration signal 313 the error correction method used by the encoding unit 302A for error correction encoding of data, the encoding rate, the block length, etc.
- a convolutional code, an LDPC code, a turbo code, or the like may be used in accordance with a method specified by the frame configuration signal 313. Error correction encoding is performed, and encoded data 303A is output.
- the interleaver 304A receives the encoded data 303A and the frame configuration signal 313, performs interleaving, that is, rearranges the order, and outputs the interleaved data 305A. (The interleaving method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
- the mapping unit 306A receives the interleaved data 305A and the frame configuration signal 313 as input and performs QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), etc.
- the signal 307A is output.
- the modulation method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.
- FIG. 19 shows an example of a mapping method on the IQ plane of the in-phase component I and the quadrature component Q constituting the baseband signal in QPSK modulation.
- FIG. 19B is an example of a mapping method on the IQ plane of QPSK modulation different from FIG. 19A, and FIG. 19B is different from FIG. 19A in that FIG. The signal point in FIG. 19B can be obtained by rotating the signal point around the origin.
- FIG. 20 shows a signal point arrangement on the IQ plane in the case of 16QAM, and an example corresponding to FIG. 19A is FIG. 20A, and FIG. An example corresponding to is shown in FIG.
- Encoding section 302B receives information (data) 301B and frame configuration signal 313 as input, and includes frame configuration signal 313 (including information such as an error correction method to be used, a coding rate, and a block length).
- the error correction method may be switched, for example, error correction coding such as convolutional code, LDPC code, turbo code, etc., and the encoded data.
- 303B is output.
- the interleaver 304B receives the encoded data 303B and the frame configuration signal 313, performs interleaving, that is, rearranges the order, and outputs the interleaved data 305B. (The interleaving method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.)
- the mapping unit 306B receives the interleaved data 305B and the frame configuration signal 313, and performs QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying), 16QAM (16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), 64QAM (64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), and so on.
- the signal 307B is output.
- the modulation method may be switched based on the frame configuration signal 313.
- the signal processing method information generation unit 314 receives the frame configuration signal 313 and outputs information 315 related to the signal processing method based on the frame configuration signal 313.
- the information 315 relating to the signal processing method includes information specifying which precoding matrix is to be used in a fixed manner and information on a phase change pattern for changing the phase.
- the weighting / synthesizing unit 308A receives the baseband signal 307A, the baseband signal 307B, and the information 315 related to the signal processing method as inputs, and weights and combines the baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B based on the information 315 related to the signal processing method.
- the signal 309A after the weighted synthesis is output. The details of the weighting synthesis method will be described later in detail.
- Radio section 310A receives signal 309A after weighted synthesis, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, and outputs transmission signal 311A. Transmission signal 311A is output as a radio wave from antenna 312A.
- the weighting / synthesizing unit 308B receives the baseband signal 307A, the baseband signal 307B, and the information 315 related to the signal processing method as inputs, and weights and combines the baseband signal 307A and the baseband signal 307B based on the information 315 related to the signal processing method.
- the signal 316B after the weighted synthesis is output.
- FIG. 21 shows the configuration of the weighting synthesis unit (308A, 308B).
- a region surrounded by a dotted line is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the baseband signal 307A is multiplied by w11 to generate w11 ⁇ s1 (t), and is multiplied by w21 to generate w21 ⁇ s1 (t).
- the baseband signal 307B is multiplied by w12 to generate w12 ⁇ s2 (t), and is multiplied by w22 to generate w22 ⁇ s2 (t).
- s1 (t) and s2 (t) are BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Shift Keying), QPSK, 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Shift Keying), 16 QAM, 32 QAM (32 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation), It becomes a baseband signal of a modulation scheme such as 64QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK (16 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying).
- both weighting combining sections perform weighting using a fixed precoding matrix.
- the precoding matrix the following equation (37) or equation (38) is used under the condition There is a method using (36).
- the precoding matrix is a
- precoding matrix is not limited to the equation (36), and the one shown in the equation (39) may be used.
- a Ae j ⁇ 11
- b Be j ⁇ 12
- c Ce j ⁇ 21
- any one of a, b, c, and d may be “zero”.
- (2) b zero, a, c, d is not zero
- (3) c zero, a, b , D is not zero
- (4) d may be zero
- a, b, and c may be non-zero.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives the signal 316B after weighted synthesis and the information 315 related to the signal processing method as inputs, and regularly changes and outputs the phase of the signal 316B. To change regularly, the phase is changed according to a predetermined phase change pattern at a predetermined cycle (for example, every n symbols (n is an integer of 1 or more) or every predetermined time). . Details of the phase change pattern will be described in a fourth embodiment below.
- Radio section 310B receives signal 309B after the phase change, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, and outputs transmission signal 311B.
- Transmission signal 311B is output as a radio wave from antenna 312B.
- the FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of a transmission apparatus 400 different from that in FIG. In FIG. 4, a different part from FIG. 3 is demonstrated.
- Encoding section 402 receives information (data) 401 and frame configuration signal 313 as input, performs error correction encoding based on frame configuration signal 313, and outputs encoded data 402.
- the distribution unit 404 receives and distributes the encoded data 403, and outputs data 405A and data 405B.
- the encoding unit is m (m is an integer of 1 or more), and the codes created by each encoding unit
- the present invention can also be implemented in the same manner when the distribution unit outputs the divided data into two systems of data.
- FIG. 5 shows an example of a frame configuration on the time axis of the transmission apparatus according to this embodiment.
- Symbol 500_1 is a symbol for notifying the receiving apparatus of the transmission method. For example, an error correction method used for transmitting a data symbol, information on its coding rate, and a modulation method used for transmitting a data symbol The information etc. is transmitted.
- Symbol 501_1 is a symbol for estimating channel fluctuation of modulated signal z1 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u (on the time axis), and symbol 503_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- Symbol 501_2 is a symbol for estimating channel fluctuation of modulated signal z2 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u
- symbol 503_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- symbols at the same time are transmitted from the transmission antenna using the same (common) frequency.
- the channel fluctuation of each transmission antenna of the transmission device and each antenna of the reception device is set to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), and h22 (t), respectively, and reception received by the reception antenna 505 # 1 of the reception device.
- the signal is r1 (t) and the received signal received by the receiving antenna 505 # 2 of the receiving device is r2 (t)
- the following relational expression is established.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method) and the phase changing method in the present embodiment, and the weighting synthesis unit 600 integrates both the weighting synthesis units 308A and 308B of FIG. It is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
- the in-phase I component and quadrature Q component of the band signal is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method) and the phase changing method in the present embodiment, and the weighting synthesis unit 600 integrates both the weighting synthesis units 308A and 308B of FIG. It is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping
- the stream s1 (t) represents the signal with symbol number u as s1 (u), the signal with symbol number u + 1 as s1 (u + 1), and so on.
- a signal with a symbol number u is represented as s2 (u)
- a signal with a symbol number u + 1 is represented as s2 (u + 1), and so on.
- the weighting / synthesizing unit 600 receives the baseband signals 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)) and the information 315 related to the signal processing method in FIG. 3, and performs weighting according to the information 315 related to the signal processing method.
- the phase changing unit 317B changes the phase of the weighted signal 316B (z2 '(t)) and outputs a signal 309B (z2 (t)) after the phase change.
- y (t) is an expression for changing the phase in accordance with a predetermined method.
- the phase change expression at time u is expressed by, for example, Expression (43). be able to.
- phase change equation at time u + 1 can be expressed by equation (44), for example.
- phase change equation at time u + k can be expressed by equation (45).
- the regular phase change examples shown in the equations (43) to (45) are merely examples.
- the period of regular phase change is not limited to four. If the number of periods increases, there is a possibility that the reception performance (more precisely, error correction performance) of the receiving apparatus can be improved accordingly. It's likely that you should avoid small values such as.)
- phase change examples shown in the above equations (43) to (45) the configuration in which the rotation is sequentially rotated by a predetermined phase (in the above equation, by ⁇ / 2) is shown.
- the phase may be changed randomly.
- the phase by which y (t) is multiplied in the order as shown in Expression (46) or Expression (47) may be changed according to a predetermined cycle.
- What is important in the regular change of the phase is that the phase of the modulation signal is changed regularly, and the degree of the phase to be changed is made as uniform as possible, for example, from ⁇ radians to ⁇ radians.
- the phase changing unit 317B determines the phase of the input signal and the degree of change. Change while changing.
- the reception quality may be greatly improved.
- the special precoding matrix depends on the phase and amplitude components of the direct wave when received. Different.
- there is a certain rule in the LOS environment If the phase of the transmission signal is regularly changed in accordance with this rule, the data reception quality is greatly improved.
- the present invention proposes a signal processing method that improves the LOS environment.
- FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of receiving apparatus 700 in the present embodiment.
- Radio section 703_X receives reception signal 702_X received by antenna 701_X, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_X.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h11 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 706_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h12 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 706_2 is output.
- Radio section 703_Y receives reception signal 702_Y received by antenna 701_Y, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_Y.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted from the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y as input, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h21 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 708_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted from the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y as input, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h22 in equation (40).
- the channel estimation signal 708_2 is output.
- Control information decoding section 709 receives baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, detects symbol 500_1 for notifying the transmission method of FIG. 5, and outputs a signal 710 related to the transmission method information notified by the transmission apparatus.
- the signal processing unit 711 receives the baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, the channel estimation signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, and 708_2, and the signal 710 related to the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus, performs detection and decoding, and performs reception data 712_1 and 712_2 are output.
- FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of the signal processing unit 711 in the present embodiment.
- FIG. 8 mainly includes an INNER MIMO detection unit, a soft-in / soft-out decoder, and a coefficient generation unit.
- the details of the iterative decoding method in this configuration are described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3, but the MIMO transmission methods described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 are spatial multiplexing MIMO transmissions.
- the transmission method in this embodiment is a MIMO transmission method in which the phase of a signal is regularly changed with time and a precoding matrix is used, it is a non-patent document 2, This is different from Patent Document 3.
- the (channel) matrix in equation (36) is H (t)
- the precoding weight matrix in FIG. 6 is F (where the precoding matrix is a fixed one that is not changed in one received signal)
- the matrix of the phase change equation by the phase change unit is Y (t) (where Y (t) changes according to t)
- the receiving apparatus can apply the decoding methods of Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 to the received vector R (t) by obtaining H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F. . Therefore, the coefficient generation unit 819 in FIG. 8 transmits a signal 818 related to information on the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus (information for specifying a fixed precoding matrix and a phase change pattern when the phase is changed). (Corresponding to 710 in FIG. 7) is input, and a signal 820 relating to signal processing method information is output.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives a signal 820 relating to information on a signal processing method as an input, and uses this signal to perform iterative detection / decoding by using the relationship of Equation (48). Will be described.
- the signal processing unit configured as shown in FIG. 8 needs to perform a processing method as shown in FIG. 10 in order to perform iterative decoding (iterative detection). First, one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s2 are decoded.
- the storage unit 815 has a baseband signal 801X (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_X in FIG. 7), a channel estimation signal group 802X (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 706_1 and 706_2 in FIG. 7), and a baseband.
- the signal 801Y (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_Y in FIG. 7) and the channel estimation signal group 802Y (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 708_1 and 708_2 in FIG. 7) are input to realize iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F in the equation (48) is executed (calculated), and the calculated matrix is stored as a modified channel signal group.
- the storage unit 815 outputs the above signals as a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, and a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y when necessary.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y.
- the modulation scheme of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and the modulation signal (stream) s2 will be described as 16QAM.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first executes H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y to obtain candidate signal points corresponding to the baseband signal 801X.
- the state at that time is shown in FIG.
- ⁇ black circle
- the modulation method is 16QAM
- FIG. 11 shows an image diagram, all 256 candidate signal points are not shown.
- 4 bits transmitted by the modulation signal s1 are b0, b1, b2, b3, and the modulation signal s2.
- step b4 Assuming that the 4 bits transmitted in step b4 are b4, b5, b6, b7, there are candidate signal points corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) in FIG. Then, the squared Euclidean distance between the reception signal point 1101 (corresponding to the baseband signal 801X) and each candidate signal point is obtained. Then, each square Euclidean distance is divided by the noise variance ⁇ 2 .
- Each baseband signal and modulated signals s1 and s2 are complex signals.
- H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F is executed from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, a candidate signal point corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y is obtained, and a reception signal point (baseband signal)
- the square Euclidean distance is calculated by dividing the square Euclidean distance by the noise variance ⁇ 2 . Therefore, a value obtained by dividing the candidate signal point corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) and the received signal point squared Euclidean distance by the variance of noise is represented by E Y (b0, b1, b2 , B3, b4, b5, b6, b7).
- E X (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) + E Y (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) E (b0, b1, b2, b3) , B4, b5, b6, b7).
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 outputs E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Expression (28), Expression (29), and Expression (30), and details are shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804 as input, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the deinterleaver (807A) receives the log likelihood signal 806A, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304A in FIG. 3)), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving.
- the deinterleaver (807B) receives the log likelihood signal 806B, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304B) in FIG. 3), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving.
- Log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809A receives log-likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving as input, and calculates a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302A in FIG.
- LLR Log-likelihood Ratio
- log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809B receives log-likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving as input, and uses a log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302B in FIG. ) And a log likelihood ratio signal 810B is output.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 811A receives the log likelihood ratio signal 810A, performs decoding, and outputs a log likelihood ratio 812A after decoding.
- Soft-in / soft-out decoder 811B receives log-likelihood ratio signal 810B as input, performs decoding, and outputs decoded log-likelihood ratio 812B.
- the interleaver (813A) receives the log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving.
- the interleave pattern of the interleaver (813A) is the same as the interleave pattern of the interleaver (304A) of FIG.
- the interleaver (813B) receives the log likelihood ratio 812B after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving. .
- the interleave pattern of the interleaver (813B) is the same as the interleave pattern of the interleaver (304B) of FIG.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 inputs a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y, an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814A, and an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814B. And Here, not the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, but the baseband signal 816X, the modified channel estimation signal group 817X, the baseband signal 816Y, and the modified channel estimation signal group 817Y. Is used because of a delay time due to iterative decoding.
- the difference between the operation at the time of iterative decoding of the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 and the operation at the time of initial detection is that the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving are used in signal processing. It is.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as in the initial detection.
- coefficients corresponding to Equation (11) and Equation (32) are obtained from the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving.
- E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is corrected using the obtained coefficient, and the value is changed to E ′ (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5). , B6, b7) and output as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Formula (31), Formula (32), Formula (33), Formula (34), and Formula (35), and is shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3. .
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804 as input, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the operation after the deinterleaver is the same as the initial detection.
- FIG. 8 shows the configuration of the signal processing unit in the case of performing iterative detection. However, iterative detection is not necessarily an essential configuration for obtaining good reception quality, and is a component required only for iterative detection.
- the interleaver 813A or 813B may be omitted. At this time, the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 does not perform repetitive detection.
- An important part of the present embodiment is to perform an operation of H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F.
- initial detection and iterative detection may be performed using QR decomposition.
- linear calculation of MMSE (Minimum Mean Square Error) and ZF (Zero Forcing) is performed based on H (t) ⁇ Y (t) ⁇ F, and initial detection is performed. You may go.
- FIG. 9 shows a configuration of a signal processing unit different from that in FIG. 8, and is a signal processing unit for a modulated signal transmitted by the transmission apparatus in FIG.
- the difference from FIG. 8 is the number of soft-in / soft-out decoders.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 901 receives log likelihood ratio signals 810A and 810B as inputs, performs decoding, and performs decoding.
- a log likelihood ratio 902 is output.
- the distribution unit 903 receives the log likelihood ratio 902 after decoding as input, and performs distribution.
- the other parts are the same as in FIG.
- the precoding matrix is multiplied and the phase is changed with time.
- the operation of the receiving apparatus is described with the number of antennas being limited, but it can be similarly implemented even when the number of antennas is increased. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving apparatus does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment.
- the LDPC code has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoding method is not limited to the sum-product decoding as a soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- the decoding method is not limited to the sum-product decoding as a soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- soft-in / soft-out decoding methods such as BCJR algorithm, SOVA algorithm, Max-log-MAP algorithm, and the like. Details are described in Non-Patent Document 6.
- the single carrier method has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be performed even when multicarrier transmission is performed. Therefore, for example, spread spectrum communication system, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) system, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Access, etc.), Multiple-Multiple Access (SC) -OFDM (SingleCurrencyMid- wise).
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing
- SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Access, etc.
- SC Multiple-Multiple Access
- symbols other than data symbols for example, pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), control information transmission symbols, and the like may be arranged in any manner.
- FIG. 12 shows a configuration of a transmission apparatus when the OFDM method is used.
- the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201A receives the weighted signal 309A, performs OFDM scheme-related processing, and outputs a transmission signal 1202A.
- the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201B receives the signal 309B after the phase change and outputs a transmission signal 1202B.
- FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration after the OFDM scheme related processing units 1201A and 1201B in FIG. 12, and the portions related to 1201A to 312A in FIG. 12 are 1301A to 1310A, and the portions related to 1201B to 312B Are 1301B to 1310B.
- the serial / parallel converter 1302A performs serial / parallel conversion on the weighted signal 1301A (corresponding to the weighted signal 309A in FIG. 12), and outputs a parallel signal 1303A.
- Rearranger 1304A receives parallel signal 1303A as input, performs rearrangement, and outputs rearranged signal 1305A.
- the rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306A receives the rearranged signal 1305A, performs inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307A after the inverse Fourier transform.
- Radio section 1308A receives signal 1307A after inverse Fourier transform as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs modulated signal 1309A, and modulated signal 1309A is output from antenna 1310A as a radio wave.
- the serial / parallel converter 1302B performs serial / parallel conversion on the weighted signal 1301B whose phase has been changed (corresponding to the signal 309B after the phase change in FIG. 12), and outputs a parallel signal 1303B.
- Rearranger 1304B receives parallel signal 1303B as input, performs rearrangement, and outputs rearranged signal 1305B. The rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306B receives the rearranged signal 1305B, performs an inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307B after the inverse Fourier transform.
- Radio section 1308B receives signal 1307B after inverse Fourier transform as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs modulated signal 1309B, and modulated signal 1309B is output as a radio wave from antenna 1310B.
- phase 3 is not a transmission system using multicarriers, the phase is changed so as to be four periods as shown in FIG. 6, and the symbols after the phase change are arranged in the time axis direction.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as the OFDM scheme shown in FIG. 12
- the symbols after precoding and changing the phase are arranged in the time axis direction as shown in FIG.
- a method for each (sub) carrier is conceivable, but in the case of a multicarrier transmission method, a method of arranging using the frequency axis direction or both the frequency axis and the time axis is conceivable.
- this point will be described.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, and the frequency axis ranges from (sub) carrier 0 to (sub) carrier 9.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 use the same frequency band at the same time (time), and
- FIG. 14A shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1, and
- FIG. Indicates a rearrangement method of symbols of the modulation signal z2. Numbers such as # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... Are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the weighted signal 1301A input to the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302A.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equivalent to one period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, # 4n + 3 (n is an integer of 0 or more) is one cycle.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. Thereafter, symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 are complex signals.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the signal 1301B after the weighted and phase-changed input, which is input to the serial / parallel converter 1302B. .
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are changed in different phases, and # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equal. This is the period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are changed in phase, and # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are one. This is the period.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1.
- symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- a symbol group 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 6 is used, and symbol # 0 is a symbol when the phase at time u in FIG. 6 is used.
- Symbol # 1 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 1 in FIG. 6 is used, symbol # 2 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 in FIG. 6 is used, and symbol # 3 is the symbol in FIG.
- symbol #x when x mod 4 is 0 (the remainder when x is divided by 4, and therefore mod: modulo), symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u in FIG. 6 is used.
- symbol #x when x mod 4 is 1, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 1 in FIG. 6 is used, and when x mod 4 is 2, symbol #x has the phase at time u + 2 in FIG.
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 3 in FIG. 6 is used.
- the phase of modulated signal z1 shown in FIG. 14A is not changed.
- symbols can be arranged in the frequency axis direction.
- the way of arranging symbols is not limited to the arrangement as shown in FIG. Another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.
- FIG. 15 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 15A shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 15B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- 15A and 15B is different from FIG. 14 in that the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1 and the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 are different.
- FIG. 0 to # 5 are allocated from carrier 4 to carrier 9
- symbols # 6 to # 9 are allocated to carriers 0 to 3
- symbols # 10 to # 19 are allocated to each carrier according to the same rule.
- the symbol group 1502 shown in FIG. 15B is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 6 is used.
- FIG. 16 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal frequency and vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B differ from FIG. 14 in that symbols are arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. 14, whereas symbols are not arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. Is a point.
- the rearrangement method of the symbols of the modulation signal z1 and the rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 may be different.
- FIG. 17 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal axis frequency and a vertical axis time different from those in FIGS. 14 to 16, and FIG.
- the symbol rearrangement method for the signal z1 and FIG. 17B shows the symbol rearrangement method for the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction, but in FIG. 17, symbols are arranged using both the frequency and time axes.
- FIG. 6 illustrates an example in which the phase change is switched in 4 slots, but here, an example in which switching is performed in 8 slots will be described.
- a symbol group 1702 shown in FIG. 17 is a symbol for one period when using the phase changing method (thus, eight symbols), symbol # 0 is a symbol when using the phase at time u, and symbol # 0 1 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 1, symbol # 2 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 2, and symbol # 3 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 3.
- # 4 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 4
- symbol # 5 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 5
- symbol # 6 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 6
- Symbol # 7 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 7 is used.
- symbol #x when x mod 8 is 0, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u is used, and when x mod 8 is 1, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 1
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 is used, and when x mod 8 is 3, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 3
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 4 is used, and when x mod 8 is 5, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 5
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 6 is used, and symbol when x mod 8 is 7 x is a symbol when using the phase of the time u + 7.
- the number of symbols per minute is m ⁇ n symbols (that is, there are m ⁇ n types of phases to be multiplied) n slots in the frequency axis direction (number of carriers) used to arrange symbols for one period, the time axis If the slot used in the direction is m, m> n is preferable. This is because the phase of the direct wave is more gradual in fluctuation in the time axis direction than in the frequency axis direction.
- FIG. 18 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 18B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged using both the frequency and the time axis as in FIG. 17, but the difference from FIG. 17 is that in FIG. 17, the frequency direction is prioritized, and then the time axis direction.
- the time axis direction is prioritized, and then symbols are arranged in the time axis direction.
- a symbol group 1802 is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method is used.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 similarly to FIG. 15, even if the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 1 and the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 2 are different, the implementation can be similarly performed. An effect that reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. Further, in FIGS. 17 and 18, even if symbols are not sequentially arranged as in FIG. 16, it can be implemented in the same manner, and an effect that high reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. it can.
- FIG. 22 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 130B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from the above.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 0
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 1
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 2
- the phase of the time u + 3 is used.
- the phase change that was made shall be performed.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is used for the symbol # 4
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 5
- the phase at time u + 2 is used for # 6.
- # 7 the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- phase change as described above was performed for the symbol at time $ 1, since the cyclic shift is performed in the time axis direction, the phase change is performed as follows for the symbol groups 2201, 2202, 2203, and 2204. Will do.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 0
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 9
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 18.
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 28
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 1
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 10
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is performed for the symbol # 20
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is performed at # 29
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 2 is performed at # 2.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 12
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 21
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 30.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the feature in FIG. 22 is that, for example, when attention is paid to the symbol # 11, both the adjacent symbols (# 10 and # 12) in the frequency axis direction at the same time change the phase using a phase different from # 11.
- both the symbols (# 2 and # 20) adjacent to each other in the time axis direction of the same carrier of the symbol # 11 are changed in phase using a phase different from # 11.
- the above-mentioned characteristics are realized by providing the characteristic of cyclically shifting the symbol arrangement order.
- the phase changing unit 317 ⁇ / b> B is configured to change the phase only for one output from the weighting synthesis unit 600.
- the timing for changing the phase may be executed before the precoding by the weighting synthesis unit 600, and the transmission apparatus may replace the configuration shown in FIG.
- the phase changing unit 317B may be provided in the preceding stage of the weighting synthesis unit 600.
- phase change may be performed on both of the modulation signals s1 (t) and s2 (t), and the transmission apparatus is configured as shown in FIG. 26 instead of the configuration shown in FIG.
- the phase changing unit may be provided for both outputs of the weighting synthesis unit 600.
- the phase changing unit 317A regularly changes the phase of the input signal in the same manner as the phase changing unit 317B, changes the phase of the precoded signal z1 ′ (t) from the weighting synthesis unit, The signal z1 (t) whose phase has been changed is output to the transmitter.
- phase changing unit 317A and the phase changing unit 317B change the phases as shown in FIG. (However, the following is one example, and the phase changing method is not limited to this.)
- the period which changes a phase regularly may be the same in the phase change part 317A and the phase change part 317B, and may differ.
- the timing for changing the phase may be before execution of precoding by the weighting synthesis section, and the transmission apparatus may have the configuration shown in FIG. 27 instead of the configuration shown in FIG.
- each transmission signal includes information on each phase change pattern, for example, as control information, and the receiving apparatus obtains this control information.
- the phase change method that is, the phase change pattern, which is regularly switched by the transmission apparatus, and thereby correct demodulation (detection) can be performed.
- FIG. 28 differs from FIG. 6 in that information 2800 regarding phase change ON / OFF exists, and the phase change is performed to either z1 ′ (t) or z2 ′ (t) (at the same time). Alternatively, the phase change is applied to either z1 ′ (t) or z2 ′ (t) at the same frequency.). Therefore, since the phase change is performed to either z1 ′ (t) or z2 ′ (t), the phase change unit 317A and the phase change unit 317B in FIG. 28 perform the phase change (ON). In some cases, the phase is not changed (OFF).
- This control information related to ON / OFF is information 2800 related to phase change ON / OFF. Information 2800 regarding this phase change ON / OFF is output from the signal processing method information generation unit 314 shown in FIG.
- the phase change period is composed of the time for changing the phase only for z1 ′ (t) and the time for changing the phase only for z2 ′ (t).
- the cycle in which the phase change is performed only for z1 ′ (t) and the cycle in which the phase change is performed only for z2 ′ (t) are the same.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and z1 ′ ( The period when the phase is changed only for t) and the period when the phase is changed only for z2 ′ (t) may be different.
- z1 ′ (t) is described to change the phase in 4 cycles and then z2 ′ (t) is changed in 4 cycles.
- Z1 ′ (t) and z2 ′ (t) may be changed in any order (for example, z1 ′ (t) and z2 ′ (t) may be alternately changed).
- the phase change period is composed of the time for changing the phase only for s1 (t) and the time for changing the phase for only s2 (t).
- the cycle for changing the phase only for s1 (t) and the cycle for changing the phase for only s2 (t) are the same, but this is not restrictive, and only s1 (t) is used.
- the period for changing the phase may be different from the period for changing the phase only for s2 (t).
- phase change of (t) and the phase change of s2 (t) may be used (for example, the phase change of s1 (t) and the phase change of s2 (t) may be performed alternately, (The order may be according to a certain rule, or the order may be random.)
- the phase change of s1 (t) and the phase change of s2 (t) may be performed alternately, (The order may be according to a certain rule, or the order may be random.)
- the phase is periodically switched in the symbol, the error correction capability after error correction decoding can be improved, so that the reception quality in the LOS environment can be improved.
- the single carrier method is described as an example, that is, the case where the phase change is performed with respect to the time axis.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies even when multicarrier transmission is performed Can do. Therefore, for example, spread spectrum communication method, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) method, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Multiple Access), SC-OFDM (Single Carrier Multiple Access), SC-OFDM (Single Carrier Multiple Access) The same can be applied to the case of using the wavelet OFDM method shown in FIG.
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing
- SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Multiple Access
- SC-OFDM Single Carrier Multiple Access
- SC-OFDM Single Carrier Multiple Access
- the phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction. That is, in this embodiment, in the description of the phase change in the t direction, by replacing t with f (f: frequency ((sub) carrier)), the phase change method described in this embodiment is considered. Can be applied to change the phase in the frequency direction. Further, the phase changing method of the present embodiment can also be applied to the phase change in the time-frequency direction as in the description of the first embodiment.
- FIGS. 6, 25, 26, and 27 show the case where the phase is changed in the time axis direction.
- time t is replaced with carrier f.
- it corresponds to changing the phase in the frequency direction, and by changing the time t to the time t and the frequency f, that is, (t) is replaced with (t, f), the phase is changed in the time-frequency block.
- symbols other than data symbols for example, pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), control information transmission symbols, and the like may be arranged in any manner.
- the phase is regularly changed.
- each receiving device in the receiving devices that are scattered in various places as viewed from the transmitting device, each receiving device can obtain good data reception quality regardless of where the receiving devices are arranged. Disclose the method.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of a frame configuration of a part of symbols of a signal on the time-frequency axis when a multicarrier scheme such as the OFDM scheme is used in a transmission scheme that regularly changes the phase.
- a multicarrier scheme such as the OFDM scheme
- FIG. 6 shows a case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 6, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction. (By replacing time t with time t and frequency f, ie, (t) with (t, f), this corresponds to performing phase change in a block of time frequency.)
- FIG. 31 shows a frame configuration of the modulated signal z2 ′ that is an input of the phase changing unit 317B shown in FIG. 12, and one square is a symbol (however, both pre-coding and s1 and s2 are both performed). However, depending on the configuration of the precoding matrix, only one of the signals s1 and s2 may be included).
- carrier 2 may be called a subcarrier.
- the channel status of the most adjacent symbol in time $ 2 that is, the symbol 3103 at time $ 1 of carrier 2 and the symbol 3101 at time $ 3 are the channel states of carrier 2 and symbol 3100 at time $ 2. It is highly correlated with channel conditions.
- each channel state of the symbols 3101, 3102, 3103, and 3104 has a very high correlation with the channel state of the symbol 3100.
- N types of phases are prepared as phases to be multiplied in a transmission method that regularly changes phases.
- e j0 is added to the symbol shown in FIG. 31. This is because the signal z2 ′ in FIG. 6 in this symbol is multiplied by “e j0 ” to change the phase.
- Means that That is, the values described in each symbol in FIG. 31 are the same as y (t) in equation (42) and z2 (t) y 2 (t) z2 ′ (t) described in the second embodiment. This is the value of y 2 (t).
- a high data reception quality is obtained on the receiving apparatus side by utilizing the high correlation between the channel states of symbols adjacent in the frequency axis direction and / or symbols adjacent in the time axis direction. Disclose the symbol arrangement of the symbols whose phase is changed. ⁇ Condition # 1> and ⁇ Condition # 2> can be considered as conditions for obtaining high data reception quality on the receiving side.
- time X and carrier Y are data.
- Symbols for transmission (hereinafter referred to as data symbols), and adjacent symbols in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are all data symbols.
- the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding corresponding to the data symbol that is, the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding in time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y, In either case, a different phase change is performed.
- Symbols for transmission (hereinafter referred to as data symbols), which are adjacent in the frequency axis direction, that is, when time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 are both data symbols, these 3
- the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding corresponding to one data symbol that is, the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding at time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1, respectively In both cases, different phase changes are performed.
- a data symbol satisfying ⁇ condition # 1> is preferably present.
- the reason why ⁇ Condition # 1> ⁇ Condition#2> is derived is as follows. There is a certain symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol temporally adjacent to the symbol A is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above.
- symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although high reception quality is obtained as an SNR, the phase relationship of direct waves is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- symbol A there is a certain symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol adjacent to the symbol A in frequency is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above. . Therefore, if different phases are used for three symbols that are adjacent in terms of frequency, symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although it has high reception quality as an SNR, the direct wave phase relationship is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- ⁇ Condition # 3> As shown in FIG. 6, in the transmission method in which the phase is regularly changed with respect to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding, when a multicarrier transmission method such as OFDM is used, time X and carrier Y are data.
- Symbols for transmission which are adjacent in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are both data symbols, and frequency
- the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding corresponding to these five data symbols that is, , Time X ⁇ carrier Y and time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X ⁇
- Yaria Y-1 and time-based band signal of each precoded in X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 z2 ' both different phase changes are made.
- phase change will be defined from 0 radians to 2 ⁇ radians.
- the phase change applied to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding in FIG. 6 is changed to e j ⁇ X, Y , and at time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y, the base after precoding shown in FIG.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of ⁇ Condition # 3>.
- the baseband signals z2 ′ after precoding in FIG. 6 corresponding to 3102 and the baseband signals z2 ′ after precoding in FIG. 6 corresponding to 3104 are arranged to be different from each other. Even if the reception quality of the symbol 3100 is poor on the receiving side, the reception quality of the adjacent symbol is Since very high, we can ensure high reception quality after error correction decoding.
- FIG. 32 An example of symbol arrangement obtained by changing the phase under this condition is shown in FIG. 32, in any data symbol, the degree of the phase changed with respect to the symbols whose phases are adjacent in both the frequency axis direction and the time axis direction is different from each other. ing. By doing in this way, the error correction capability in the receiving apparatus can be further improved.
- phase change is performed on the two baseband signals after precoding described in Embodiment 2 (see FIG. 26).
- FIG. 26 when the phase change is applied to both the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding, there are several methods for phase change. This will be described in detail.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is set to a period of 10.
- the subband carrier 1 is applied to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is changing with time. (Although such a change is made in FIG. 32, the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after the precoding is as shown in FIG.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is constant for one period of period 10.
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is e j0
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is e j ⁇ / 9 , ... and so on.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after the precoding is performed by changing the phase of the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding with a constant value for the phase change of one cycle of the period 10. The value is changed together with the number for one cycle. (As described above, in FIG. 33, e j0 is set for the first period, and e j ⁇ / 9 ,... Are set for the second period.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is the period 10, but the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding are changed.
- the effect that the period when both of the phase changes are taken into account can be made larger than 10. As a result, there is a possibility that the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus is improved.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 'after precoding is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z ⁇ b> 2 ′ after precoding is a period 10.
- the subband carrier 1 is applied to the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is changing with time. (Although such a change is made in FIG. 32, the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is shown in FIG.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is performed in a period 3 different from the period 10.
- the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is the period 10, but the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding are changed.
- the period when considering both of the phase changes is 30, and the period when considering both the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is larger than 10. The effect that it can be done can be obtained. As a result, there is a possibility that the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus is improved.
- One effective method 2 is that when the phase change period of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is N and the phase change period of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is M, , N and M are relatively prime, the period when considering both the phase change of the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding and the phase change of the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding is N ⁇ M However, even if N and M are relatively prime, it is possible to increase the period.
- the phase change method according to the third embodiment is an example, and is not limited to this.
- the phase change method may be performed in the frequency axis direction, or the time may be changed. Even if the phase is changed in the axial direction or the phase is changed in the time-frequency block, the reception quality of data in the receiving apparatus can be improved.
- a pilot symbol SP (Scattered Pilot)
- a symbol for transmitting control information or the like may be inserted between data symbols. The phase change in this case will be described in detail.
- FIG. 47 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- FIG. 47B is the time of the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2′— It is a frame configuration on the frequency axis.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol
- 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding or precoding and phase change.
- FIG. 47 shows a symbol arrangement in the case where the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding as shown in FIG. 6 (the phase is not changed in the baseband signal z1 after the precoding). ).
- FIG. 6 shows a case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 6, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- time t time t and frequency f
- (t) is replaced with (t, f)
- this corresponds to performing phase change in a time frequency block.
- the numerical value described in the symbol of the baseband signal z2 ′ indicates a phase change value.
- the symbol of the baseband signal z1 '(z1) after precoding in FIG. 47 does not change the phase, and thus no numerical value is described.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z2 'after precoding is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- FIG. 48B is the time of the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2′— It is a frame configuration on the frequency axis.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol
- 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding and phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal z1 'after precoding and the baseband signal z2' after precoding as shown in FIG.
- FIG. 26 shows the case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 26, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- time t By replacing time t with time t and frequency f, that is, (t) is replaced with (t, f), this corresponds to performing phase change in the block of time frequency.
- Numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal z1 ′ and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding indicate a phase change value.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding, and the baseband signal z2 after precoding.
- the phase change for ' is applied to data symbols, that is, precoded symbols. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 49 shows a frame structure on the time-frequency axis of the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulated signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- 49, 4701 is a pilot symbol
- 4702 is a data symbol
- 4901 is a null symbol
- the in-phase component I 0 of the baseband signal
- the quadrature component Q 0.
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding or precoding and phase change.
- the difference between FIG. 49 and FIG. 47 is a method of constructing symbols other than data symbols.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 49 shows a symbol arrangement when the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding as shown in FIG. 6 (the phase is not changed in the baseband signal z1 after the precoding). ).
- FIG. 6 shows a case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 6, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction. 49.
- the numerical value described in the symbol of the baseband signal z2 ′ indicates a phase change value. Note that the symbol of the baseband signal z1 '(z1) after precoding in FIG. 49 does not change the phase, so that no numerical value is described.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z2 'after precoding is performed on the data symbols, that is, the symbols subjected to precoding. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 50 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal after precoding) z2 ′.
- 4701 is a pilot symbol
- 4702 is a data symbol
- 4901 is a null symbol
- the in-phase component I 0 of the baseband signal
- the quadrature component Q 0.
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding or precoding and phase change.
- the difference between FIG. 50 and FIG. 48 is a method of constructing symbols other than data symbols.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 50 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal z1 'after precoding and the baseband signal z2' after precoding as shown in FIG.
- FIG. 26 shows the case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 26, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- Numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal z1 ′ and the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding indicate a phase change value.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal z1 ′ after precoding is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding, and the baseband signal z2 after precoding.
- the phase change for ' is applied to data symbols, that is, precoded symbols. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 51 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration of FIGS. 47 and 49, and the components that operate in the same way as in FIG. 4 are given the same reference numerals. .
- the weighting / combining units 308A and 308B and the phase changing unit 317B operate only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates the timing of data symbols.
- pilot symbol (which also serves as null symbol generation) generation unit 5101 indicates that base frame signal 5102A of the pilot symbol is used when frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (and null symbol), and 5102B is output.
- precoding and no phase rotation is not performed, for example, a method of transmitting a modulation signal from one antenna (in this case, the other antenna)
- the control information symbol 5104 includes the control information 5103, the frame,
- the configuration signal 313 is input and the frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a control information symbol
- baseband signals 5102A and 5102B of the control information symbol are output.
- FIG. 51 selects a desired baseband signal from the plurality of baseband signals based on the frame configuration signal 313 among the plurality of baseband signals to be input. Then, OFDM-related signal processing is performed, and modulated signals 311A and 311B according to the frame configuration are output, respectively.
- FIG. 52 shows an example of the configuration of a transmitting apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration shown in FIGS. 48 and 50. Components that operate in the same manner as FIGS. 4 and 51 are denoted by the same reference numerals. is doing.
- the phase changing unit 317A added to FIG. 51 operates only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a timing that is a data symbol. The other operations are the same as those in FIG.
- FIG. 53 is a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG. Hereinafter, different points will be described.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG.
- phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding.
- phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is.
- the selection unit 5301 receives a plurality of baseband signals, selects a baseband signal of a symbol indicated by the frame configuration signal 313, and outputs it.
- FIG. 54 shows a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (or null symbol) or a control information symbol, phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is.
- phase changing unit 5201 receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 5201 changes the phase of baseband signal 309A after precoding. When frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (or null symbol) or a control information symbol, phase changing section 5201 stops the phase changing operation, and the baseband signal of each symbol. Is output as is. (For interpretation, it may be considered that the phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.) In the above description, pilot symbols, control symbols, and data symbols have been described as examples.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a transmission method different from precoding, for example, transmission using one antenna transmission and a space-time block code.
- a transmission method different from precoding for example, transmission using one antenna transmission and a space-time block code.
- the phase change is not performed on all symbols in the frame structure on the time-frequency axis, and the feature of the present invention is that the phase change is applied only to the precoded signal.
- the phase change is applied only to the precoded signal.
- phase change method may be different depending on the modulation scheme used by the transmission apparatus and the coding rate of the error correction code.
- Table 1 shows an example of a phase change method set in accordance with various setting parameters set by the transmission apparatus.
- # 1 is the modulation signal s1 of the first embodiment (the modulation system baseband signal s1 set by the transmission apparatus), and # 2 is the modulation signal s2 (the modulation system baseband signal s2 set by the transmission apparatus).
- the coding rate column in Table 1 indicates the coding rate set by the error correction code for the modulation schemes # 1 and # 2.
- the phase change pattern column in Table 1 is a phase change method applied to the baseband signals z1 (z1 ′) and z2 (z2 ′) after precoding.
- the phase change pattern is defined as A, B, C, D, E,..., But this is actually information indicating a change in the degree of changing the phase.
- the change pattern as shown in the above formula (46) or formula (47) is shown.
- “ ⁇ ” is described, which means that the phase change is not performed.
- modulation schemes and coding rates shown in Table 1 are examples, and modulation schemes other than the modulation schemes shown in Table 1 (for example, 128QAM and 256QAM) and coding rates (for example, 7/8) Etc.) may be included.
- error correction codes may be set separately for s1 and s2 (in the case of Table 1, one error correction code is encoded as shown in FIG. 4). ).
- a plurality of different phase change patterns may be associated with the same modulation scheme and coding rate.
- the transmission device transmits information indicating each phase change pattern to the reception device, the reception device identifies the phase change pattern by referring to the information and Table 1, and performs demodulation and decoding. Become.
- the transmission device transmits information on the modulation scheme and the error correction scheme to the reception device. Since the phase change pattern can be known by obtaining the information, the phase change pattern information is not necessarily required in this case.
- the transmission apparatus may include an amplitude changing unit that changes the amplitude after the weighting combining unit 308A in FIGS. 3 and 4 and an amplitude changing unit that changes the amplitude after the weighting combining unit 308B.
- the amplitude may be changed for one of the baseband signals z1 (t) and z2 (t) after the precoding (in this case, the amplitude changing unit is placed after one of the weighting combining units 308A and 308B). Amplitude change may be applied to both.
- mapping method may be changed regularly by the mapping unit instead of changing the phase regularly. That is, the mapping method for applying the modulation method of the modulation signal s1 (t) to 16QAM and the mapping method of the modulation signal s2 (t) to 16QAM, for example, to the modulation signal s2 (t) is regularly set to 16QAM.
- the present invention may be any combination of a method for regularly changing the phase, a method for regularly changing the mapping method, and a method for changing the amplitude, and all of them are taken into consideration. It is good also as a structure which transmits a transmission signal. In this embodiment, it can be carried out in either case of single carrier system or multicarrier transmission. Therefore, for example, spread spectrum communication method, OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing) method, SC-FDMA (Single Carrier Frequency Multiple Access), SC-OFDM (Single Carrier Multiple Access), SC-OFDM (Single Carrier Multiple Access) It is also possible to implement the case where the wavelet OFDM method shown in FIG.
- OFDM Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing
- SC-FDMA Single Carrier Frequency Multiple Access
- SC-OFDM Single Carrier Multiple Access
- SC-OFDM Single Carrier Multiple Access
- phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change As described above, in the present embodiment, as an explanation of performing phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change, the case of performing phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the time t-axis direction has been described.
- t in the description of phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the t direction, t is expressed as f (f: frequency ((sub) By replacing with () carrier)), the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change described in this embodiment can be applied to the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the frequency direction.
- the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change method of the present embodiment can be applied to the phase change, amplitude change, and mapping change in the time-frequency direction, as described in the first embodiment. It is.
- symbols other than data symbols for example, pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), control information transmission symbols, and the like may be arranged in any manner.
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Prity-Check) code (not a QC-LDPC code, an LDPC code)
- the phase is regularly changed when block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem codes), turbo codes using tail biting, or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes are used.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- 34 for example, as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, two blocks s1 and s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has one encoder. When used, it is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. " (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 transmits two streams at the same time, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2. In order to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in s1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in s2, 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 (the “cycle” in the first to fourth embodiments).
- five phase change values may be prepared.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 slots
- phase PHASE [ Slots using 1] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [2] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [3] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [4] are 300 slots.
- the modulation method is 16QAM
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [0] is 150 slots, 150 slots using phase PHASE [1], 150 slots using phase PHASE [2], 150 slots using phase PHASE [3], 150 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 100 slots, 100 slots using phase PHASE [1], 100 slots using phase PHASE [2], 100 slots using phase PHASE [3], and 100 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- ⁇ Condition # A01> should be satisfied in the supported modulation schemes.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3 and the transmission apparatus in FIG. 12, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 3 and 12 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIGS. 3 and 12 (“period” in the first to fourth embodiments).
- five phase change values may be prepared.
- two phase change values are required for one slot.
- phase change set The value is referred to as a phase change set.
- five phase change sets may be prepared in order to perform a phase change of period 5).
- These five phase change values are represented as PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], PHASE [3], and PHASE [4].
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 600 slots
- Slots that use PHASE [1] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [4] are 600 slots Need to be. This is because, depending on the phase to be used, the influence of the phase using a large number is large, and the reception quality of data depending on this influence is obtained in the receiving apparatus.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [3] must be 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] must be 600 times
- the phase PHASE Slots that use [0] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] should be 600 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is It is necessary that the slot using the phase PHASE [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 300 times
- the number of slots using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] needs to be 200 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 200 times
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [4] may be 200.
- the prepared phase change value (or phase change set) is PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N -2] and PHASE [N-1])
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [0] is K 0
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [1] is K 1
- K 0,2 K 0,2
- K 1, 2 K 1, 2.
- ⁇ condition # A03> ⁇ condition#A04> ⁇ condition in the supported modulation schemes # A05> is satisfied.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- the following conditions may be satisfied.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1] are used as N phase change values (or phase change sets).
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2], Similarly to Embodiment 1, PHASE [N-1] can also change the phase by arranging symbols in the time-axis and frequency-time-axis blocks. Although described as a phase change method of period N, the same effect can be obtained even when N phase change values (or phase change sets) are randomly used. It is not necessary to use N phase change values (or phase change sets) so as to have a periodic period, but satisfying the above-described conditions is necessary for obtaining high data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. , Become important.
- a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission system may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change) in the first to fourth embodiments.
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream, It can be set to one of the methods to change the phase regularly, In particular, this embodiment may be implemented for a (sub) carrier group for which a method of regularly changing the phase is selected.
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal
- the phase change value of PHASE [i] is “X radians”, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53
- e jX is multiplied by the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is performed on both precoded baseband signals, for example, when the phase change set of PHASE [i] is “X radians” and “Y radians”, FIG. 26, FIG. 27, 28, 52, and 54
- e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′
- e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a system including an apparatus that executes the transmission method and the reception method described in the above embodiment.
- the transmission method and reception method shown in each of the above embodiments include a broadcasting station as shown in FIG. It is implemented in a digital broadcast system 3600 that includes various types of receivers such as 3641 and mobile phone 3630.
- the broadcast station 3601 transmits multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing video data, audio data, and the like to a predetermined transmission band using the transmission method described in each of the above embodiments.
- a signal transmitted from the broadcasting station 3601 is received by an antenna (for example, antennas 3660 and 3640) built in each receiver or connected to the receiver.
- Each receiver demodulates the signal received by the antenna using the reception method described in each of the above embodiments, and acquires multiplexed data.
- the digital broadcasting system 3600 can obtain the effects of the present invention described in the above embodiments.
- the video data included in the multiplexed data is encoded using a moving image encoding method compliant with standards such as MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group) 2, MPEG4-AVC (Advanced Video Coding), VC-1, and the like.
- the audio data included in the multiplexed data includes, for example, Dolby AC (Audio Coding) -3, Dolby Digital Plus, MLP (Merdian Lossless Packing), DTS (Digital Theater Systems), DTS-HD, Linear PCM (PuldMod).
- Dolby AC Audio Coding
- MLP Mobile Lossless Packing
- DTS Digital Theater Systems
- DTS-HD Linear PCM (PuldMod).
- the audio encoding method is used.
- FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a receiver 7900 that performs the reception method described in each of the above embodiments.
- a receiver 3700 illustrated in FIG. 37 corresponds to a configuration included in the television (television) 3611, the DVD recorder 3612, the STB (Set Top Box) 3613, the computer 3620, the in-vehicle television 3641, the mobile phone 3630, and the like illustrated in FIG. To do.
- Receiver 3700 includes a tuner 3701 that converts a high-frequency signal received by antenna 3760 into a baseband signal, and a demodulator 3702 that demodulates the frequency-converted baseband signal to obtain multiplexed data.
- the receiving method shown in each of the above embodiments is implemented in the demodulator 3702, whereby the effect of the present invention described in each of the above embodiments can be obtained.
- the receiver 3700 also uses a stream input / output unit 3720 that separates video data and audio data from the multiplexed data obtained by the demodulation unit 3702, and a video decoding method corresponding to the separated video data.
- a signal processing unit 3704 that decodes data into a video signal and decodes the audio data into an audio signal using an audio decoding method corresponding to the separated audio data, and an audio output unit such as a speaker that outputs the decoded audio signal 3706 and a video display unit 3707 such as a display for displaying the decoded video signal.
- the user uses the remote controller (remote controller) 3750 to transmit information on the selected channel (selected (TV) program, selected audio broadcast) to the operation input unit 3710.
- receiver 3700 performs processing such as demodulation and error correction decoding on the signal corresponding to the selected channel in the received signal received by antenna 3760, and obtains received data.
- the receiver 3700 transmits a transmission method (such as the transmission method, modulation method, and error correction method described in the above embodiment) included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel (this is illustrated in FIGS.
- receiver 3700 of this embodiment can perform demodulation on demodulated data by demodulating by demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding (in some cases, a signal obtained by demodulating by demodulator 3702).
- the receiver 3700 may be subjected to other signal processing after the error correction decoding, and the following description is also applied to the portion where the same expression is performed.
- a recording unit (drive) 3708 for recording on a recording medium such as an optical disk or a non-volatile semiconductor memory are examples of the data obtained by processing moving images and audio.
- the optical disk is a recording medium that stores and reads information using laser light, such as a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) and a BD (Blu-ray Disc).
- the magnetic disk is a recording medium that stores information by magnetizing a magnetic material using a magnetic flux, such as an FD (Floppy Disk) (registered trademark) or a hard disk (Hard Disk).
- the non-volatile semiconductor memory is a recording medium composed of a semiconductor element such as a flash memory or a ferroelectric memory (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), for example, an SD card or a flash SSD (Solid State Drive) using the flash memory. ) And the like. Note that the types of recording media listed here are merely examples, and it goes without saying that recording may be performed using recording media other than the recording media described above.
- the user records and stores a program received by the receiver 3700 by the reception method described in each of the above embodiments, and data recorded at an arbitrary time after the broadcast time of the program Can be read and viewed.
- the receiver 3700 records the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and decoding the error correction by the recording unit 3708, but the data included in the multiplexed data Some of the data may be extracted and recorded.
- the recording unit 3708 includes the demodulating unit 3702.
- New multiplexed data obtained by extracting and multiplexing video data and audio data from the multiplexed data demodulated in (5) may be recorded. Further, the recording unit 3708 demodulates by the demodulating unit 3702 and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing only one of the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding. May be recorded. Then, the recording unit 3708 may record the content of the data broadcasting service included in the multiplexed data described above.
- the demodulator 3702 The outflow of data, personal information, and recorded data for correcting defects (bugs) in software used to operate a television or recording device on multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding If data for correcting a software defect (bug) for preventing the image is included, the software defect of the television or the recording device may be corrected by installing the data.
- the data includes data for correcting a software defect (bug) of the receiver 3700, the data can correct the defect of the receiver 3700. Accordingly, a television set, a recording device, and a mobile phone in which the receiver 3700 is mounted can be operated more stably.
- a process of extracting and multiplexing a part of data from a plurality of data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding is, for example, a stream input / output unit 3703 Done in Specifically, the stream input / output unit 3703 converts the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 3702 into video data, audio data, data broadcasting service content, etc. according to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU (not shown).
- the data is separated into a plurality of data, and only specified data is extracted from the separated data and multiplexed to generate new multiplexed data.
- the data to be extracted from the separated data may be determined by the user, for example, or may be determined in advance for each type of recording medium.
- the receiver 3700 can extract and record only the data necessary for viewing the recorded program, so that the data size of the data to be recorded can be reduced.
- the recording unit 3708 records the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and decoding error correction, but the demodulating unit 3702 demodulates and decodes error correction.
- the video data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing the video encoding is different from the video encoding method applied to the video data so that the data size or bit rate is lower than the video data. It may be converted into video data encoded by the encoding method, and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing the converted video data may be recorded.
- the moving image encoding method applied to the original video data and the moving image encoding method applied to the converted video data may conform to different standards or conform to the same standard. Only the parameters used at the time of encoding may be different.
- the recording unit 3708 demodulates the audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding so that the data size or bit rate is lower than that of the audio data.
- new multiplexed data obtained by converting into voice data encoded by a voice encoding method different from the voice encoding method applied to the voice data and multiplexing the converted voice data may be recorded.
- the processing of converting the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding into video data and audio data having different data sizes or bit rates is as follows. For example, this is performed by the stream input / output unit 3703 and the signal processing unit 3704. Specifically, in response to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU, the stream input / output unit 3703 demodulates the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding, video data, audio data, Separated into a plurality of data such as data broadcasting service content.
- the signal processing unit 3704 converts the separated video data into video data encoded by a video encoding method different from the video encoding method applied to the video data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit. And the process which converts the audio
- the stream input / output unit 3703 multiplexes the converted video data and the converted audio data, and generates new multiplexed data.
- the signal processing unit 3704 may perform conversion processing on only one of the video data and audio data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit, or perform conversion processing on both. Also good.
- the data size or bit rate of the converted video data and audio data may be determined by the user, or may be determined in advance for each type of recording medium.
- the receiver 3700 changes the data size or bit rate of video data or audio data according to the data size that can be recorded on the recording medium and the speed at which the recording unit 3708 records or reads the data. can do.
- the recording unit records or reads the data. Since the recording unit can record the program even when the speed at which the recording is performed is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 3702, the user can select an arbitrary time after the program is broadcast. It is possible to read and view the data recorded in the.
- the receiver 3700 also includes a stream output IF (Interface) 3709 that transmits the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulator 3702 to an external device via the communication medium 3730.
- stream output IF 3709 include wireless communication standards such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth, Zigbee, etc.
- Examples include a wireless communication apparatus that transmits multiplexed data modulated using a communication method to an external device via a wireless medium (corresponding to the communication medium 3730).
- the stream output IF 3709 is modulated using a communication method compliant with a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB (Universal Serial Bus), PLC (Power Line Communication), HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface), or the like.
- a wired communication device that transmits the multiplexed data to an external device via a wired transmission path (corresponding to the communication medium 3730) connected to the stream output IF 3709 may be used.
- the user can use multiplexed data received by the receiver 3700 by the reception method described in each of the above embodiments in an external device.
- the use of multiplexed data here means that the user views the multiplexed data in real time using an external device, records the multiplexed data with a recording unit provided in the external device, and further from the external device. Including transmitting multiplexed data to another external device.
- the receiver 3700 demodulates by the demodulator 3702, and the stream output IF 3709 outputs multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding.
- the data included in the multiplexed data Some data may be extracted and output.
- the stream output IF 3709 includes the demodulating unit 3702. Then, new multiplexed data obtained by extracting and multiplexing video data and audio data from multiplexed data obtained by demodulation and error correction decoding may be output.
- the stream output IF 3709 may output new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing only one of the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulator 3702.
- a process of extracting and multiplexing a part of data from a plurality of data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding is, for example, a stream input / output unit 3703 Done in Specifically, the stream input / output unit 3703 converts the multiplexed data demodulated by the demodulation unit 3702 into video data, audio data, and data broadcasting in response to an instruction from a control unit such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) (not shown).
- the data is separated into a plurality of data such as service contents, and only designated data is extracted and multiplexed from the separated data to generate new multiplexed data.
- the data to be extracted from the separated data may be determined by the user, for example, or may be determined in advance for each type of the stream output IF 3709.
- the receiver 3700 can extract and output only the data necessary for the external device, so that it is possible to reduce the communication bandwidth consumed by the output of the multiplexed data.
- the stream output IF 3709 outputs the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulating unit 3702 and performing error correction decoding.
- the video data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing the video encoding is different from the video encoding method applied to the video data so that the data size or bit rate is lower than the video data. Conversion into video data encoded by the conversion method, and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing the converted video data may be output.
- the moving image encoding method applied to the original video data and the moving image encoding method applied to the converted video data may conform to different standards or conform to the same standard. Only the parameters used at the time of encoding may be different.
- the stream output IF 3709 is demodulated by the demodulator 3702 so that the audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by performing error correction decoding has a data size or bit rate lower than that of the audio data.
- it may be converted into audio data encoded by an audio encoding method different from the audio encoding method applied to the audio data, and new multiplexed data obtained by multiplexing the converted audio data may be output.
- the processing of converting the video data and audio data included in the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding into video data and audio data having different data sizes or bit rates is as follows. For example, this is performed by the stream input / output unit 3703 and the signal processing unit 3704. Specifically, in response to an instruction from the control unit, the stream input / output unit 3703 demodulates by the demodulation unit 3702 and decodes the error correction, thereby converting the multiplexed data obtained as video data, audio data, and data broadcasting service. It is separated into a plurality of data such as contents.
- the signal processing unit 3704 converts the separated video data into video data encoded by a video encoding method different from the video encoding method applied to the video data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit. And the process which converts the audio
- the stream input / output unit 3703 multiplexes the converted video data and the converted audio data, and generates new multiplexed data.
- the signal processing unit 3704 may perform conversion processing on only one of the video data and audio data in accordance with an instruction from the control unit, or perform conversion processing on both. Also good.
- the data size or bit rate of the converted video data and audio data may be determined by the user, or may be determined in advance for each type of stream output IF 3709.
- the receiver 3700 can change and output the bit rate of video data or audio data in accordance with the communication speed with the external device. As a result, even if the communication speed with the external device is lower than the bit rate of the multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by the demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding, a new multiplex from the stream output IF is obtained. Therefore, the user can use the new multiplexed data in another communication apparatus.
- the receiver 3700 includes an AV (Audio and Visual) output IF (Interface) 3711 that outputs the video signal and the audio signal decoded by the signal processing unit 3704 to an external device to an external communication medium.
- AV output IF 3711 wireless communication conforming to wireless communication standards such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark) (IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, IEEE802.11n, etc.), WiGiG, WirelessHD, Bluetooth, Gigbee, etc.
- Wi-Fi registered trademark
- IEEE802.11b IEEE802.11b
- IEEE802.11g IEEE802.11g
- IEEE802.11n IEEE802.11n
- WiGiG WirelessHD
- Bluetooth Gigbee
- the stream output IF 3709 is a wired transmission in which a video signal and an audio signal modulated using a communication method compliant with a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB, PLC, and HDMI are connected to the stream output IF 3709. It may be a wired communication device that transmits to an external device via a path. Further, the stream output IF 3709 may be a terminal for connecting a cable that outputs the video signal and the audio signal as analog signals.
- a wired communication standard such as Ethernet (registered trademark), USB, PLC, and HDMI
- the receiver 3700 includes an operation input unit 3710 that receives an input of a user operation. Based on a control signal input to the operation input unit 3710 according to a user operation, the receiver 3700 switches power ON / OFF, switches a channel to be received, whether to display subtitles, and switches a language to be displayed. Then, various operations such as a change in volume output from the audio output unit 3706 are switched, and settings such as setting of receivable channels are changed.
- the receiver 3700 may have a function of displaying an antenna level indicating the reception quality of a signal being received by the receiver 3700.
- the antenna level refers to, for example, RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication, Received Signal Strength Indicator, received signal strength), received electric field strength, C / N (Carrier-to-noise power) of the signal received by the receiver 3700.
- RSSI Receiveived Signal Strength Indication
- Received Signal Strength Indicator received signal strength
- C / N Carrier-to-noise power
- the demodulation unit 3702 includes a reception quality measurement unit that measures RSSI, received field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, and the like of the received signal.
- the antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) is displayed on the video display unit 3707 in a format that the user can identify.
- the display format of antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of signal) is to display numerical values according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, etc.
- different images may be displayed according to RSSI, received electric field strength, C / N, BER, packet error rate, frame error rate, channel state information, and the like.
- the receiver 3700 receives a plurality of antenna levels (signal level, signal level) obtained for each of the plurality of streams s1, s2,... Received and separated by using the reception method described in the above embodiments. (Signal indicating superiority or inferiority) may be displayed, or one antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of signal) obtained from a plurality of streams s1, s2,.
- a signal level (a signal indicating superiority or inferiority of a signal) may be indicated for each hierarchy.
- the user can grasp numerically or visually the antenna level (signal level, signal indicating superiority or inferiority of the signal) when receiving using the reception method described in the above embodiments. Can do.
- the receiver 3700 includes the audio output unit 3706, the video display unit 3707, the recording unit 3708, the stream output IF 3709, and the AV output IF 3711 has been described as an example. You don't have to have everything.
- the user can use multiplexed data obtained by demodulating by demodulator 3702 and performing error correction decoding.
- Each receiver may be provided with any combination of the above configurations according to its use.
- Multiplexed data Next, an example of the structure of multiplexed data will be described in detail.
- MPEG2-transport stream TS
- MPEG2-TS MPEG2-TS
- the data structure of the multiplexed data transmitted by the transmission method and the reception method shown in each of the above embodiments is not limited to MPEG2-TS, and any other data structure will be described in each of the above embodiments. Needless to say, the same effect can be obtained.
- FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of multiplexed data.
- the multiplexed data is an element that constitutes a program (program or an event that is a part thereof) currently provided by each service, for example, a video stream, an audio stream, a presentation graphics stream (PG). ) Or an elementary stream such as an interactive graphics stream (IG).
- a program program or an event that is a part thereof
- PG presentation graphics stream
- IG interactive graphics stream
- the program provided by the multiplexed data is a movie
- the video stream is the main video and sub video of the movie
- the audio stream is the main audio portion of the movie and the sub audio mixed with the main audio
- the presentation graphics stream Shows the subtitles of the movie.
- the main video is a normal video displayed on the screen
- the sub-video is a video displayed on a small screen in the main video (for example, video of text data showing a movie outline).
- the interactive graphics stream indicates an interactive screen created by arranging GUI components on the screen.
- Each stream included in the multiplexed data is identified by a PID that is an identifier assigned to each stream. For example, 0x1011 for video streams used for movie images, 0x1100 to 0x111F for audio streams, 0x1200 to 0x121F for presentation graphics, 0x1400 to 0x141F for interactive graphics streams, 0x1B00 to 0x1B1F are assigned to video streams used for sub-pictures, and 0x1A00 to 0x1A1F are assigned to audio streams used for sub-audio mixed with the main audio.
- FIG. 39 is a diagram schematically showing an example of how multiplexed data is multiplexed.
- a video stream 3901 composed of a plurality of video frames and an audio stream 3904 composed of a plurality of audio frames are converted into PES packet sequences 3902 and 3905, respectively, and converted into TS packets 3903 and 3906.
- the data of the presentation graphics stream 3911 and the interactive graphics 3914 are converted into PES packet sequences 3912 and 3915, respectively, and further converted into TS packets 3913 and 3916.
- the multiplexed data 3917 is configured by multiplexing these TS packets (3903, 3906, 3913, 3916) into one stream.
- FIG. 40 shows in more detail how the video stream is stored in the PES packet sequence.
- the first row in FIG. 40 shows a video frame sequence of the video stream.
- the second level shows a PES packet sequence.
- a plurality of Video Presentation Units in a video stream are divided into pictures, B pictures, and P pictures, and are stored in the payload of the PES packet.
- Each PES packet has a PES header, and a PTS (Presentation Time-Stamp) that is a display time of a picture and a DTS (Decoding Time-Stamp) that is a decoding time of a picture are stored in the PES header.
- PTS Presentation Time-Stamp
- DTS Decoding Time-Stamp
- FIG. 41 shows the format of a TS packet that is finally written into the multiplexed data.
- the TS packet is a 188-byte fixed-length packet composed of a 4-byte TS header having information such as a PID for identifying a stream and a 184-byte TS payload for storing data.
- the PES packet is divided and stored in the TS payload.
- a 4-byte TP_Extra_Header is added to a TS packet, forms a 192-byte source packet, and is written in multiplexed data.
- TP_Extra_Header information such as ATS (Arrival_Time_Stamp) is described.
- ATS indicates the transfer start time of the TS packet to the PID filter of the decoder.
- source packets are arranged in the multiplexed data, and the number incremented from the head of the multiplexed data is called SPN (source packet number).
- TS packets included in the multiplexed data include PAT (Program Association Table), PMT (Program Map Table), and PCR (Program Clock Reference) in addition to each stream such as a video stream, an audio stream, and a presentation graphics stream. and so on.
- PAT indicates what the PID of the PMT used in the multiplexed data is, and the PID of the PAT itself is registered as 0.
- the PMT has the PID of each stream such as video / audio / subtitles included in the multiplexed data and the stream attribute information (frame rate, aspect ratio, etc.) corresponding to each PID, and various descriptors related to the multiplexed data. Have.
- the descriptor includes copy control information for instructing permission / non-permission of copying of multiplexed data.
- ATC Arriv Time Clock
- STC System Time Clock
- FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the data structure of the PMT in detail.
- a PMT header describing the length of data included in the PMT is arranged at the head of the PMT.
- a plurality of descriptors related to multiplexed data are arranged.
- the copy control information and the like are described as descriptors.
- a plurality of pieces of stream information regarding each stream included in the multiplexed data are arranged.
- the stream information is composed of a stream descriptor that describes a stream type for identifying a compression codec of the stream, a stream PID, and stream attribute information (frame rate, aspect ratio, etc.).
- FIG. 43 shows the structure of the multiplexed data information file.
- the multiplexed data information file is management information of multiplexed data, has a one-to-one correspondence with the multiplexed data, and includes multiplexed data information, stream attribute information, and an entry map.
- the multiplexed data information includes a system rate, a reproduction start time, and a reproduction end time as shown in FIG.
- the system rate indicates a maximum transfer rate of multiplexed data to a PID filter of a system target decoder described later.
- the ATS interval included in the multiplexed data is set to be equal to or less than the system rate.
- the playback start time is the PTS of the first video frame of the multiplexed data
- the playback end time is set by adding the playback interval for one frame to the PTS of the video frame at the end of the multiplexed data.
- FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a configuration of stream attribute information included in the multiplexed data information file.
- attribute information for each stream included in the multiplexed data is registered for each PID.
- the attribute information has different information for each video stream, audio stream, presentation graphics stream, and interactive graphics stream.
- the video stream attribute information includes the compression codec used to compress the video stream, the resolution of the individual picture data constituting the video stream, the aspect ratio, and the frame rate. It has information such as how much it is.
- the audio stream attribute information includes the compression codec used to compress the audio stream, the number of channels included in the audio stream, the language supported, and the sampling frequency. With information. These pieces of information are used for initialization of the decoder before the player reproduces it.
- the stream type included in the PMT is used.
- video stream attribute information included in the multiplexed data information is used.
- the video encoding shown in each of the above embodiments for the stream type or video stream attribute information included in the PMT.
- FIG. 45 shows an example of the configuration of a video / audio output device 4500 including a receiving device 4504 that receives video and audio data or a modulated signal including data for data broadcasting transmitted from a broadcasting station (base station). Is shown. Note that the configuration of the reception device 4504 corresponds to the reception device 3700 in FIG.
- the video / audio output device 4500 includes, for example, an OS (Operating System), and a communication device 4506 for connecting to the Internet (for example, a wireless local area network (LAN) or Ethernet). Communication device).
- OS Operating System
- LAN wireless local area network
- a remote controller which may be a mobile phone or a keyboard
- either the video 4502 in the data for data broadcasting or the hypertext 4503 provided on the Internet is selected and the operation is changed. Will do.
- hypertext 4503 provided on the Internet is selected, the displayed WWW site is changed by operating the remote controller.
- the remote controller 4507 selects a channel selected (selected (TV) program, selected audio broadcast). Send information.
- IF 4505 acquires information transmitted by the remote controller, and receiving apparatus 4504 performs processing such as demodulation and error correction decoding on a signal corresponding to the selected channel, and obtains received data.
- receiving apparatus 4504 receives the control symbol information including information on the transmission method (this is as described in FIG. 5) included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel.
- the control symbol information including information on the transmission method (this is as described in FIG. 5) included in the signal corresponding to the selected channel.
- the video / audio output device 4500 may be operated using the Internet. For example, a recording (storage) reservation is made to the video / audio output device 4500 from another terminal connected to the Internet. (Therefore, the video / audio output device 4500 has a recording unit 3708 as shown in FIG. 37.)
- the channel is selected and the receiving device 4504 is selected.
- the signal corresponding to the selected channel is subjected to processing such as demodulation and error correction decoding to obtain received data.
- the receiving apparatus 4504 transmits a transmission method (transmission method, modulation method, error correction method, etc. described in the above embodiment) included in a signal corresponding to the selected channel (this is described in FIG. 5).
- a transmission method transmission method, modulation method, error correction method, etc. described in the above embodiment
- the receiving operation, the demodulation method, the error correction decoding and the like are correctly set, so that the data symbol transmitted by the broadcasting station (base station) is set.
- the included data can be obtained.
- the transmission device is equipped with a communication / broadcasting device such as a broadcasting station, a base station, an access point, a terminal, a mobile phone, and the like.
- the receiving device is equipped with a communication device such as a television, a radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, and a base station.
- the transmission device and the reception device in the present invention are devices having a communication function, and the devices have some interface (for example, a device for executing an application such as a television, a radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone). For example, it may be possible to connect via USB).
- pilot symbols may be called preambles, unique words, postambles, reference symbols, scattered pilots, etc.
- symbols for control information may be arranged in any manner in the frame.
- the pilot symbol and the control information symbol are named, but any naming method may be used, and the function itself is important.
- the pilot symbol is, for example, a known symbol modulated by using PSK modulation in a transmitter / receiver (or the receiver may know the symbol transmitted by the transmitter by synchronizing the receiver). .), And the receiver uses this symbol to perform frequency synchronization, time synchronization, channel estimation (for each modulated signal) (estimation of CSI (Channel State Information)), signal detection, and the like. Become.
- control information symbol is information (for example, a modulation method, an error correction coding method used for communication, a communication information symbol) that needs to be transmitted to a communication partner in order to realize communication other than data (such as an application).
- This is a symbol for transmitting an error correction coding method coding rate, setting information in an upper layer, and the like.
- the present invention is not limited to all the embodiments, and can be implemented with various modifications. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the case of performing as a communication device has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and this communication method can also be performed as software.
- the phase changing method in the method of transmitting two modulated signals from two antennas has been described.
- the method is not limited to this, and precoding is performed on the four mapped signals and the phase is changed.
- the method is modified to generate four modulated signals and transmit from four antennas, that is, N-coded signals are precoded to generate N modulated signals, and N antennas are generated.
- the method of transmitting from can be similarly implemented as a phase changing method in which the phase is changed regularly.
- a MIMO communication system that transmits two modulated signals from two antennas and receives them by two antennas.
- (Multiple ⁇ ⁇ Input ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Single Output) communication system is also applicable.
- the receiving apparatus has a configuration without the antenna 701_Y, the radio unit 703_Y, the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_1 of the modulation signal z1, and the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_2 of the modulation signal z2 in the configuration illustrated in FIG. Even in this case, each of r1 and r2 can be estimated by executing the process shown in the first embodiment.
- a MIMO communication system that transmits two modulated signals from two antennas and receives them by two antennas.
- (Multiple ⁇ ⁇ Input ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ Single Output) communication system is also applicable.
- the point that precoding and phase change are applied in the transmission apparatus is as described above.
- the receiving apparatus has a configuration without the antenna 701_Y, the radio unit 703_Y, the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_1 of the modulation signal z1, and the channel fluctuation estimation unit 707_2 of the modulation signal z2 in the configuration illustrated in FIG.
- the data transmitted by the transmission device can be estimated by executing the processing shown in this specification.
- a plurality of transmitted signals can be received and decoded by one antenna in the same frequency band and at the same time (in one antenna reception, processing such as ML calculation (Max-log APP etc.) is performed.
- the signal processor 711 in FIG. 7 may perform demodulation (detection) in consideration of precoding and phase change used on the transmission side.
- precoding precoding weight
- precoding matrix any name may be used (for example, a codebook)
- the signal processing itself is important.
- the description has been focused on the case where the OFDM method is used as the transmission method.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement.
- a spread spectrum communication method may be used.
- the single carrier method the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the receiving device is described using ML calculation, APP, Max-log APP, ZF, MMSE, etc., but as a result, the soft decision result of each bit of the data transmitted by the transmitting device (Log likelihood, log likelihood ratio) and a hard decision result (“0” or “1”) are obtained. These may be collectively referred to as detection, demodulation, detection, estimation, and separation.
- Different data may be transmitted by the streams s1 (t), s2 (t) (s1 (i), s2 (i)), or the same data may be transmitted.
- regular phase change and precoding are performed for two streams of baseband signals s1 (i) and s2 (i) (where i represents the order of time or frequency (carrier)).
- the baseband signals z1 (i) and z2 (i) after the signal processing of both generated are generated.
- the in-phase I component is I 1 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 1 (i)
- the in-phase I component of the baseband signal z2 (i) after both signal processing is I 2 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 2 ( i).
- the baseband component is replaced,
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 1 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 2 (i)
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is I 2 (i)
- Let the orthogonal component be Q 1 (i)
- the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 1, and the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 2 at the same time.
- the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal r1 (i) and the replaced baseband signal r2 (i) are transmitted from different antennas using the same frequency at the same time. Also good. Also, The in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 1 (i), the quadrature component is I 2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is Q 1 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q 2 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 2 (i), the quadrature component is I 1 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is Q 1 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q 2 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) after replacement is I 1 (i), the quadrature component is I 2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) after replacement is Q 2 (i),
- the signal processing of both of the two stream signals is performed and the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the signal after both signal processing are replaced.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and there are more than two streams. It is also possible to perform both signal processing on the signal and replace the in-phase component and the quadrature component of the signal after both signal processing.
- the quadrature component is Q 1 (i)
- the in-phase I component of the baseband signal z2 (i) 5501_2 after both signal processing is I 2 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q 2 (i).
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r1 (i) 5503_1 after replacement is I r1 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q r1 (i)
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal r2 (i) 5503_2 after replacement is I r2 ( i)
- the quadrature component is Q r2 (i)
- the quadrature component Q r1 (i) of the baseband signal r1 (i) 5503_1 after replacement and the baseband signal r2 ( i)
- the in-phase component I r2 (i) of 5503_2 and the quadrature component Q r2 (i) shall be expressed as described above.
- the baseband signal may be replaced after the signal processing.
- Both the transmitting antenna of the transmitting device and the receiving antenna of the receiving device may be configured by a plurality of antennas.
- ⁇ represents a universal quantifier
- ⁇ represents an existent quantifier.
- the unit of phase, such as declination, in the complex plane is “radian”.
- a complex plane it can be displayed in polar form as a display of complex polar coordinates.
- the baseband signals s1, s2, z1, and z2 are complex signals.
- the in-phase signal is I and the quadrature signal is Q
- the complex signal is I + jQ ( j is an imaginary unit). At this time, I may be zero or Q may be zero.
- FIG. 46 shows an example of a broadcasting system using the phase changing method described in this specification.
- a video encoding unit 4601 receives video as input, performs video encoding, and outputs data 4602 after video encoding.
- the speech encoding unit 4603 receives speech as input, performs speech encoding, and outputs speech-encoded data 4604.
- the data encoding unit 4605 receives data, performs data encoding (for example, data compression), and outputs data 4606 after data encoding. These are collectively referred to as an information source encoding unit 4600.
- the transmission unit 4607 receives the data 4602 after video encoding, the data 4604 after audio encoding, and the data 4606 after data encoding as one of these data or all of these data as transmission data. Processing such as error correction coding, modulation, precoding, and phase change (for example, signal processing in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3) is performed, and transmission signals 4608_1 to 4608_N are output. The transmission signals 4608_1 to 4608_N are transmitted as radio waves by the antennas 4609_1 to 4609_N, respectively.
- the receiving unit 4612 receives the received signals 4611_1 to 4611_M received by the antennas 4610_1 to 4610_M, and performs processing such as frequency conversion, phase change, precoding decoding, log likelihood ratio calculation, error correction decoding, and the like (for example, FIG. 7).
- the reception device 4613, 4615, 4617 is output.
- the information source decoding unit 4619 receives the received data 4613, 4615, and 4617
- the video decoding unit 4614 receives the received data 4613, decodes the video, and outputs a video signal. Appears on the display.
- the voice decoding unit 4616 receives the received data 4615 as an input. Audio decoding is performed and an audio signal is output, and the audio flows from the speaker.
- the data decoding unit 4618 receives the received data 4617, performs data decoding, and outputs data information.
- the number of encoders possessed by the transmission apparatus is any number. May be. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 4, it is naturally possible to apply a method in which the transmission apparatus includes one encoder and distributes the output to a multicarrier transmission scheme such as the OFDM scheme.
- the radio units 310A and 310B in FIG. 4 may be replaced with the OFDM system related processing units 1301A and 1301B in FIG.
- the description of the OFDM scheme-related processing unit is as in the first embodiment.
- the formula (36) is given as an example of the precoding matrix, but a method using the following formula as a precoding matrix can be considered.
- the formula (37) and the formula (38) are set as the value of ⁇ .
- the present invention is not limited to this. If set, it becomes a simple precoding matrix, so this value is one of the effective values.
- the phase change value for the period N (FIG. 3, FIG. 3) in the phase change unit in FIGS. 3, 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 12, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53, the phase change is given to only one baseband signal, so that it becomes the phase change value.
- I 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (i is an integer from 0 to N-1)).
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal (that is, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 12, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, FIG. 53).
- baseband signal z ⁇ b> 2 ′ after precoding is subjected to phase change.
- PHASE [k] is given as follows.
- the phase change method in the case where two modulated signals are transmitted by a plurality of antennas has been described in detail.
- the present invention is not limited to this, but a base on which mapping of three or more modulation methods is performed. The same applies to the case where the band signal is precoded and phase-changed, the baseband signal after precoding and phase change is subjected to predetermined processing, and transmitted from a plurality of antennas.
- a program for executing the communication method may be stored in a ROM (Read Only Memory) in advance and the program may be operated by a CPU (Central Processor Unit). Further, a program for executing the communication method is stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in the storage medium is recorded in a computer RAM (Random Access Memory), and the computer is operated according to the program. You may do it.
- ROM Read Only Memory
- CPU Central Processor Unit
- Each configuration such as the above-described embodiments may be typically realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration) that is an integrated circuit. These may be individually made into one chip, or may be made into one chip so as to include all or part of the configurations of the respective embodiments. Here, it is referred to as LSI, but depending on the degree of integration, it may also be referred to as IC (Integrated Circuit), system LSI, super LSI, or ultra LSI. Further, the method of circuit integration is not limited to LSI's, and implementation using dedicated circuitry or general purpose processors is also possible. An FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) that can be programmed after manufacturing the LSI, or a reconfigurable processor that can reconfigure the connection and setting of circuit cells inside the LSI may be used.
- LSI Large Scale Integration
- Embodiment C1 In the present embodiment, the case where the precoding matrix to be used is switched when the transmission parameter is changed in the first embodiment has been described. However, in the present embodiment, the detailed example is described above (other supplements). As described in the above), as a transmission parameter, a method of switching a precoding matrix to be used when switching between transmission of the same data and transmission of different data in the streams s1 (t) and s2 (t). A phase change method associated therewith will be described.
- FIG. 56 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission apparatus when the transmission method is switched as described above.
- 56 that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 54 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
- 56 differs from FIG. 54 in that distribution section 404 receives frame configuration signal 313 as an input. The operation of the distribution unit 404 will be described with reference to FIG.
- FIG. 57 shows the operation of the distribution unit 404 when different data is transmitted than when the same data is transmitted.
- the encoded data is x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6,...
- the distributed data 405A is x1, x2, x3.
- the distributed data 405B is represented as x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6,.
- the distributed data 405A is represented as x1, x3, x5, x7, x9,...
- the distributed data 405B includes x2, x4, x6, x8, x10, It is expressed as ...
- the distribution unit 404 determines, based on the frame configuration signal 313 that is an input signal, whether the transmission mode transmits the same data or transmits different data.
- the distribution unit 404 when performing the same data transmission, the distribution unit 404 outputs x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6,... As data 405A after distribution.
- the data 405B after distribution is not output. Therefore, when frame configuration signal 313 indicates “same data transmission”, operation of distribution section 404 is as described above, and interleaver 304B and mapping section 306B in FIG. 56 do not operate. Then, only the baseband signal 307A, which is the output of the mapping unit 306A in FIG. 56, is valid and becomes an input signal for both the weighting synthesis units 308A and 308B.
- one feature is that the precoding matrix is switched when the transmission mode is switched between the case of transmitting the same data and the case of transmitting different data.
- the precoding matrix when transmitting the same data is as follows: It is good to express like this.
- Equation (52) a is a real number (a may be a complex number, but the phase change is given to the input baseband signal by precoding, so the circuit scale is as large as possible and does not become complicated. In view of this, it is better to use a real number.)
- a 1
- the weighting / combining units 308A and 308B output the input signal as it is without performing the weighting / combining operation. .
- the baseband signal 309A after weighted synthesis and the baseband signal 316B after weighted synthesis, which are output signals of the weighted synthesis sections 308A and 308B, are the same signal.
- the phase change unit 5201 changes the phase of the baseband signal 309A after the weighted synthesis, and the baseband signal after the phase change 5202 is output.
- the phase changing unit 317B changes the phase of the baseband signal 316B after the weighted synthesis, and the baseband signal after the phase change 309B is output.
- phase change performed by the phase change unit 5201 is e jA (t) (or e jA (f) or e jA (t, f) ) (where t is time and f is frequency) (therefore, e jA (t) (or e jA (f) or e jA (t, f) ) is a value to be multiplied by the input baseband signal.), and e jB (T) (or e jB (f) or e jB (t, f) ) (where t is time and f is frequency) (hence e jB (t) (or e jB (f) Or, e jB (t, f) ) is a value to be multiplied with the input baseband signal.) It is important that the following condition is satisfied.
- the transmission signal can reduce the influence of multipath, so that the reception quality of the data can be improved in the reception device.
- the phase change may be performed on only one of the baseband signal 309A after weighted synthesis and the baseband signal 316B after weighted synthesis.
- the baseband signal 5202 after the phase change is subjected to processing such as IFFT and frequency conversion when OFDM is used, and is transmitted from the transmission antenna.
- processing such as IFFT and frequency conversion when OFDM is used
- the baseband signal 5202 after the phase change may be considered to be the signal 1301A in FIG. 13).
- the baseband signal 309B after the phase change uses OFDM , IFFT, frequency conversion, etc. are performed and transmitted from the transmitting antenna.
- the baseband signal 309B after the phase change may be considered as the signal 1301B in FIG. 13).
- “transmit different data” is selected as the transmission mode, as shown in the first embodiment, it is expressed by any one of Expression (36), Expression (39), and Expression (50). Shall.
- the phase changing units 5201 and 317B in FIG. 56 it is important for the phase changing units 5201 and 317B in FIG. 56 to perform a phase changing method different from the case of “transmitting the same data”.
- the phase changing unit 5201 changes the phase and the phase changing unit 317B does not change the phase, or the phase changing unit 5201 does not change the phase.
- the phase change unit 317B changes the phase, for example, only one of the two phase change units changes the phase, the receiving apparatus can be used in both the LOS environment and the NLOS environment. Good data reception quality can be obtained.
- Expression (52) may be used as the precoding matrix, but Expression (36), Expression (50), or Expression ( If a precoding matrix expressed by (39) and different from Equation (52) is used, there is a possibility that the reception quality of data, particularly in the LOS environment, can be further improved in the receiving apparatus.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement. At this time, a spread spectrum communication method may be used. When the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the phase change is not limited to data symbols, but symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols inserted in the transmission frame of the transmission signal. Therefore, the phase change is also performed. (However, the phase change may not be performed on symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols, but the phase change may be performed in order to obtain diversity gain.) (Embodiment C2) In this embodiment, a method for configuring a base station to which Embodiment C1 is applied will be described.
- FIG. 59 shows the relationship between a base station (broadcast station) and terminals.
- Terminal P receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5905A transmitted from antenna 5906A, and performs predetermined processing to obtain received data.
- Terminal Q receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5903B transmitted from antenna 5904B of base station B (5902B), performs a predetermined process, It is assumed that received data is obtained.
- the base station A (5902A) transmits from the antenna 5904A, the transmission signal 5903A transmitted from the antenna 5906A, the frequency allocation of the transmission signal 5905A, and the base station B (5902B) transmits from the antenna 5904B and the antenna 5906B.
- the frequency allocation of the transmission signal 5903B and the transmission signal 5905B is shown.
- the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents transmission power.
- the transmission signal 5903A and transmission signal 5905A transmitted by the base station A (5902A) and the transmission signal 5903B and transmission signal 5905B transmitted by the base station B (5902B) are at least the frequency band X and the frequency band.
- Y is used, the first channel data is transmitted using the frequency band X, and the second channel data is transmitted using the frequency band Y. To do.
- terminal P receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5905A transmitted from antenna 5906A, extracts frequency band X, and performs predetermined processing. To obtain data of the first channel.
- Terminal Q receives transmission signal 5903A transmitted from antenna 5904A of base station A (5902A) and transmission signal 5903B transmitted from antenna 5904B of base station B (5902B). Extraction and predetermined processing are performed to obtain data of the second channel.
- base station A (5902A) and base station B (5902B) The configuration and operation of base station A (5902A) and base station B (5902B) at this time will be described.
- Each of base station A (5902A) and base station B (5902B) includes the transmission apparatus configured in FIGS. 56 and 13 as described in Embodiment C1.
- the base station A (5902A) When transmitting as shown in FIG. 60, the base station A (5902A) generates two different modulation signals (precoding and phase change) in the frequency band X as described in the embodiment C1. 2) Transmit two modulated signals from antennas 5904A and 5906A in FIG.
- base station A (5902A) operates interleaver 304A, mapping section 306A, weighting combining section 308A, and phase changing section 5201 in FIG.
- base station B (5902B) operates interleaver 304A, mapping section 306A, weighting combining section 308A, and phase changing section 5201 in FIG. 56 to generate modulated signal 5202, and a transmission signal corresponding to modulated signal 5202 Is transmitted from the antenna 1310A of FIG. 13, that is, the antenna 5904B of FIG.
- the base station may individually generate the encoded data as shown in FIG. 56, but the encoding created by any of the base stations Later data may be transferred to another base station.
- one of the base stations may generate a modulated signal, and the generated modulated signal may be passed to another base station.
- a signal 5901 includes information on a transmission mode (“send the same data” or “send different data”), and the base station obtains this signal, The modulation signal generation method in each frequency band is switched.
- the signal 5901 is input from another device or network as shown in FIG. 59.
- the base station A (5902A) is the master station
- the base station B (5902B) is a signal corresponding to the signal 5901. You may make it pass.
- the base station when the base station “transmits different data”, a precoding matrix and a phase change method suitable for the transmission method are set, and a modulated signal is generated.
- the two base stations when “same data is transmitted”, the two base stations respectively generate and transmit modulated signals. At this time, each base station generates a modulated signal for transmission from one antenna.
- the precoding matrix of Equation (52) is calculated by two base stations. It corresponds to setting.
- the phase changing method is as described in the embodiment C1, and for example, the condition of (Equation 53) may be satisfied.
- the frequency band X and the frequency band Y may change the transmission method with time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61, the time may pass and the frequency assignment as shown in FIG. 60 may be changed to the frequency assignment as shown in FIG.
- the phase change unit can be shared in the transmission apparatus.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement. At this time, a spread spectrum communication method may be used. When the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the phase change is not limited to data symbols, but symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols inserted in the transmission frame of the transmission signal. Therefore, the phase change is also performed. (However, the phase change may not be performed on symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols, but the phase change may be performed in order to obtain diversity gain.)
- Embodiment C3 In this embodiment, a configuration method of a repeater to which Embodiment C1 is applied will be described. Note that the repeater may be referred to as a relay station.
- FIG. 62 shows the relationship between a base station (broadcast station), a repeater, and a terminal.
- the base station 6201 transmits a modulated signal of at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y.
- Base station 6201 transmits modulated signals from antenna 6202A and antenna 6202B, respectively.
- the transmission method at this time will be described later with reference to FIG.
- Repeater A (6203A) performs processing such as demodulation on reception signal 6205A received by reception antenna 6204A and reception signal 6207A received by reception antenna 6206A to obtain reception data.
- transmission processing is performed to generate modulated signals 6209A and 6211A, which are transmitted from antennas 6210A and 6212A, respectively.
- repeater B (6203B) performs processing such as demodulation on reception signal 6205B received by reception antenna 6204B and reception signal 6207B received by reception antenna 6206B to obtain reception data. Then, in order to transmit the received data to the terminal, transmission processing is performed to generate modulated signals 6209B and 6211B, which are transmitted from antennas 6210B and 6212B, respectively.
- repeater B (6203B) is a master repeater and outputs control signal 6208, and repeater A (6203A) receives this signal. Note that it is not always necessary to provide a master repeater, and the base station 6201 may individually transmit control information to the repeater A (6203A) and the repeater B (6203B).
- the terminal P (5907) receives the modulation signal transmitted from the repeater A (6203A) and obtains data.
- Terminal Q receives signals transmitted from repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) and obtains data.
- the terminal R (6213) receives the modulation signal transmitted from the repeater B (6203B) and obtains data.
- FIG. 63 shows the frequency allocation of the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202A and the frequency allocation of the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202B among the transmission signals transmitted by the base station.
- the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents transmission power.
- the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202A and the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6202B use at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y, and the first channel is transmitted using the frequency band X. It is assumed that the data of the second channel different from the first channel is transmitted using the frequency band Y.
- the data of the first channel is transmitted in the mode of “sending different data” using the frequency band X as described in the embodiment C1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63, the modulation signal transmitted from antenna 6202A and the modulation signal transmitted from antenna 6202B include components of frequency band X. The component of the frequency band X is received by the relay A and the relay B. Therefore, as described in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment C1, the modulation signal of frequency band X is subjected to precoding (weighting synthesis) and phase change on the mapped signal. .
- FIG. 63 the data of the second channel is transmitted using the frequency band Y component transmitted from the antenna 6202A of FIG.
- the component of the frequency band Y is received by the repeater A and the repeater B.
- FIG. 64 shows the frequency allocation of the modulation signal 6209A transmitted from the antenna 6210A of the relay A, the modulation signal 6211A transmitted from the antenna 6212A, and the transmission of the relay B, among the transmission signals transmitted by the relay A and the relay B.
- the frequency allocation of the modulation signal 6209B transmitted from the antenna 6210B and the modulation signal 6211B transmitted from the antenna 6212B is shown.
- the horizontal axis represents frequency and the vertical axis represents transmission power.
- the modulation signal 6209A transmitted from the antenna 6210A and the modulation signal 6211A transmitted from the antenna 6212A use at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y
- the modulation signal transmitted from the antenna 6210B uses at least the frequency band X and the frequency band Y.
- the frequency band X is used to transmit data of the first channel, and the frequency It is assumed that data of the second channel is transmitted using the band Y.
- modulated signal 6209A transmitted from antenna 6210A and modulated signal 6211A transmitted from antenna 6212A include components of frequency band X.
- the component of the frequency band X is received by the terminal P.
- modulated signal 6209B transmitted from antenna 6210B and modulated signal 6211B transmitted from antenna 6212B include components of frequency band X.
- the component of the frequency band X is received by the terminal R. Therefore, as described in Embodiment 1 and Embodiment C1, the modulation signal of frequency band X is subjected to precoding (weighting synthesis) and phase change on the mapped signal. .
- the data of the second channel is obtained by using the component of the frequency band Y of the modulated signal transmitted from the antenna 6210A of the repeater A (6203A) and the antenna 6210B of the repeater B (6203B) in FIG. Will be transmitted.
- the “same data transmission” transmission mode described in the embodiment C1 is used.
- the component of the frequency band Y is received by the terminal Q.
- FIG. 65 shows an example of the configuration of the receiving unit and the transmitting unit of the repeater, and components that operate in the same manner as in FIG.
- the reception unit 6203X receives the reception signal 6502a received by the reception antenna 6501a and the reception signal 6502b received by the reception antenna 6501b, and performs signal processing (signal separation or synthesis, error correction decoding) on the frequency band X component.
- the data 6204X transmitted by the base station using the frequency band X is obtained and output to the distribution unit 404, and information on the transmission method included in the control information is obtained (transmitted by the repeater). Information on the transmission method at the time of acquisition is also obtained), and the frame configuration signal 313 is output.
- the receiving unit 6203X and the subsequent units are processing units for generating a modulated signal for transmission in the frequency band X.
- the receiving unit includes not only the receiving unit of the frequency band X but also other receiving units of other frequency bands, and each receiving unit has its frequency band.
- the outline of the operation of distribution section 404 is the same as the operation of the distribution section in the base station described in Embodiment C2.
- repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) When transmitting as shown in FIG. 64, repeater A (6203A) and repeater B (6203B) generate two different modulation signals in frequency band X as described in the embodiment C1 (preliminary).
- the relay A (6203A) transmits the two modulated signals from the antennas 6210A and 6212A in FIG. 62, and the relay B (6203B) transmits from the antennas 6210B and 6212B in FIG. 62, respectively.
- repeater A (6203A) is shown in FIG. 65 in processing unit 6500 related to frequency band Y corresponding to signal processing unit 6500 related to frequency band X (6500 is related to frequency band X). Although it is a signal processing unit, the frequency band Y is also provided with the same signal processing unit, and will be described with the number added in 6500.), interleaver 304A, mapping unit 306A, weighting synthesis unit 308A, phase change unit 5201 To generate a modulation signal 5202 and transmit a transmission signal corresponding to the modulation signal 5202 from the antenna 1310A in FIG. 13, that is, the antenna 6210A in FIG.
- repeater B (6203B) operates interleaver 304A, mapping unit 306A, weighting combining unit 308A, and phase changing unit 5201 in frequency band Y in FIG. 62 to generate modulated signal 5202 and generate modulated signal 5202. Is transmitted from the antenna 1310A of FIG. 13, that is, the antenna 6210B of FIG.
- FIG. 66 shows a frame configuration of a modulated signal transmitted by the base station, and the horizontal axis time and the vertical axis frequency
- information 6601 regarding the transmission method As shown in FIG. 66 (FIG. 66 shows a frame configuration of a modulated signal transmitted by the base station, and the horizontal axis time and the vertical axis frequency), information 6601 regarding the transmission method, repeater Transmits the information 6602 regarding the phase change to be applied and the data symbol 6603, and the repeater obtains the information 6601 regarding the transmission method and the information 6602 regarding the phase change applied by the repeater, thereby determining the phase change method to be applied to the transmission signal. can do. If the information 6602 regarding the phase change performed by the repeater in FIG. 66 is not included in the signal transmitted by the base station, as shown in FIG. 62, repeater B (6203B) becomes the master, and repeater A (6203A) may be instructed to change the phase.
- the repeater when the repeater “transmits different data”, a precoding matrix and a phase change method suitable for the transmission method are set, and a modulated signal is generated.
- each of the two repeaters in the case of “transmitting the same data”, each of the two repeaters generates and transmits a modulated signal. At this time, each repeater generates a modulated signal to be transmitted from one antenna.
- the precoding matrix of Equation (52) is calculated by two repeaters. It corresponds to setting.
- the phase changing method is as described in the embodiment C1, and for example, the condition of (Equation 53) may be satisfied.
- both the base station and the repeater transmit modulated signals from the two antennas, and transmit the same data from the two antennas. May be.
- the operations of the base station and the repeater at this time are as described in the embodiment C1.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same applies when a multicarrier method other than the OFDM method or a single carrier method is used. It is possible to implement. At this time, a spread spectrum communication method may be used. When the single carrier method is used, the phase change is performed in the time axis direction.
- the phase change is not limited to data symbols, but symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols inserted in the transmission frame of the transmission signal. Therefore, the phase change is also performed. (However, the phase change may not be performed on symbols such as pilot symbols and control symbols, but the phase change may be performed in order to obtain diversity gain.) (Embodiment C4) In the present embodiment, a phase change method different from the phase change methods described in “Embodiment 1” and “Other supplements” will be described.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (k is an integer from 0 to N-1).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- phase change As described above, by performing the phase change as in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain an effect that the reception apparatus is more likely to obtain good reception quality.
- the phase change of the present embodiment is not limited to the application to the single carrier scheme, and can be applied to the case of multicarrier transmission. Therefore, for example, the case of using the spread spectrum communication system, the OFDM system, the SC-FDMA, the SC-OFDM system, the wavelet OFDM system shown in Non-Patent Document 7, etc. can be similarly implemented.
- phase change is performed in the time t-axis direction as an explanation for performing the phase change, but as in the first embodiment, when the phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction Similarly, in other words, in the present embodiment, the description of the phase change in the t direction has been described in the present embodiment by replacing t with f (f: frequency ((sub) carrier)).
- the phase change change can be applied to the phase change in the frequency direction.
- the phase changing method of the present embodiment can also be applied to the phase change in the time-frequency direction as in the description of the first embodiment.
- Expression (36) is given as an example of the precoding matrix
- Expression (50) is given as an example of the precoding matrix in the other supplements.
- the phase change value for the period N (FIG. 3, FIG. 3) in the phase change unit in FIGS. 3, 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53. 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53, the phase change is given to only one of the baseband signals, so that the phase change value is obtained.)
- PHASE [i ] (I 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, N-1 (i is an integer from 0 to N-1)).
- the phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal (that is, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 12, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, FIG. 53). 3, 4, 6, 12, 25, 29, 51, and 53, only the baseband signal z ⁇ b> 2 ′ after precoding is subjected to phase change.
- the phase change value at this time will be described in detail.
- PHASE [0], PHASE [1], ..., n + 1 different phase change values required to realize a phase change method for switching the phase change values regularly with a period N 2n + 1.
- PHASE [i], ..., PHASE [n-1], PHASE [n] (i 0,1,2, ..., n-2, n-1, n (where i is 0 or more and n Integer below)).
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer from 0 to n).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer from 0 to n).
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer of 0 to n), and Z is a fixed value.
- PHASE [k] may be given as follows.
- k 0, 1, 2,..., N-2, n-1, n (k is an integer of 0 to n), and Z is a fixed value.
- phase change As described above, by performing the phase change as in the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain an effect that the reception apparatus is more likely to obtain good reception quality.
- the phase change according to the present embodiment is not limited to the application to the single carrier method, and can also be applied to multicarrier transmission. Therefore, for example, the case of using the spread spectrum communication system, the OFDM system, the SC-FDMA, the SC-OFDM system, the wavelet OFDM system shown in Non-Patent Document 7, etc. can be similarly implemented.
- phase change is performed in the time t-axis direction as an explanation for performing the phase change, but as in the first embodiment, when the phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction Similarly, in other words, in the present embodiment, the description of the phase change in the t direction has been described in the present embodiment by replacing t with f (f: frequency ((sub) carrier)).
- the phase change change can be applied to the phase change in the frequency direction.
- the phase changing method of the present embodiment can also be applied to the phase change in the time-frequency direction as in the description of the first embodiment.
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Prity-Check) code (however, an LDPC (block) that is not a QC-LDPC code)
- block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)
- block codes such as turbo codes or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- 34 for example, as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, two blocks s1 and s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has one encoder. When used, it is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. " (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 transmits two streams at the same time, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2. In order to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in s1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in s2, 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5 is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) for period 5 are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIG. However, as described in the embodiment C5, there are three different phase change values. Therefore, among the five phase change values for the period 5, the same phase change value exists. (As shown in FIG. 6, when the phase is changed only to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding, in order to change the phase of the period 5, five phase change values may be prepared.
- phase change values are required for one slot. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of the period 5, five phase change sets may be prepared).
- the five phase change values (or phase change sets) for cycle 5 are represented as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4].
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 slots
- the phase The slots using the change value P [1] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [2] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [3] are 300 slots
- the phase change value P [4 ] Need to be 300 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of data having a large influence of the phase change value using a large number is obtained.
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- the 500 slots described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 bits constituting one encoded block there are 100 slots using the phase change value P [0].
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [1] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [2]
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3]
- the slot using P [4] needs to be 100 slots.
- phase change values P [0], P [1],. .., P [2n-1], P [2n] are PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2],..., PHASE [n-1], PHASE [n] (see Embodiment C5)).
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [0] is K 0
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [1] is K 1
- ⁇ Condition # C03> The difference between K a and K b is 0 or 1, that is,
- is 0 or 1. (For ⁇ a, ⁇ b, where a, b 0,1,2, ..., 2n-1,2n (a is an integer from 0 to 2n, b is an integer from 0 to 2n), a ⁇ b) If ⁇ Condition # C03> is expressed in another way, the following conditions are satisfied.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3 and the transmission apparatus in FIG. 12, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.)
- the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 3 and 12 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- phase change values or phase change sets
- the number of phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5 is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) for period 5 are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus in FIG. However, as described in the embodiment C5, there are three different phase change values. Therefore, among the five phase change values for the period 5, the same phase change value exists. (As shown in FIG. 6, when the phase is changed only to the baseband signal z2 ′ after the precoding, in order to change the phase of the period 5, five phase change values may be prepared.
- phase change values are required for one slot. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of the period 5, five phase change sets may be prepared).
- the five phase change values (or phase change sets) for cycle 5 are represented as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4].
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 slots
- the slot using [4] needs to be 600 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times
- the second In order to transmit the encoded block the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] Is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] in the 1500 slot described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 ⁇ 2 bits constituting the two encoded blocks 300 slots, 300 slots using the phase change value P [1], 300 slots using the phase change value P [2], 300 slots using the phase change value P [3], phase
- the slot using the change value P [4] needs to be 300 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times.
- the number of slots that use the change value P [4] needs to be 200 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] needs to be 200 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 200 times.
- the phase change values P [0], P [1],. .., P [2n-1], P [2n] are PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [n-1], PHASE [n] (see Embodiment C5)
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the first encoding is the number of times K 0,1 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 2n, 1 ⁇ Condition # C06>
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the second encoding is the number of times K 0,2 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 1,2 and the number of times the phase change value P [i] is used as K i, 2 (i 0,1,2,..., 2n-1,2n (i is an integer from 0 to 2n) )
- K 2n, 2 ⁇ Condition # C07>
- phase change method for regularly switching the phase change value described in the embodiment C5 different phase change values PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., in PHASE [n-1] and PHASE [n], the number of slots using the phase change value PHASE [0] is set to G 0 when all the bits constituting the two encoded blocks are transmitted.
- G 1 is the number of slots using the phase change value PHASE [1]
- the number of slots using the phase change value PHASE [n] is G n
- ⁇ Condition # C05> can be expressed as follows.
- G 1, 2 and the number of times the phase change value PHASE [i] is used as G i, 2 (i 0,1,2,..., N-1, n (i is an integer from 0 to n) )
- ⁇ condition # C05> ⁇ condition#C06> ⁇ condition in the supported modulation schemes # C07>( ⁇ condition#C08> ⁇ condition#C09> ⁇ condition#C10>) should be satisfied.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PN [N ⁇ 1] can be changed in phase by arranging symbols in the time axis and frequency-time axis blocks.
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) are randomly used. It is not necessary to use N phase change values (or phase change sets) so as to have a periodic period, but satisfying the above-described conditions is necessary for obtaining high data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. , Become important.
- the base station may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change).
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream,
- This method may be set to any one of the methods for changing the phase regularly.
- this embodiment may be implemented for a (sub) carrier group for which the method for changing the phase regularly is selected.
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal
- the phase change value of P [i] is “X radians”, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53
- e jX is multiplied by the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is performed on both precoded baseband signals, for example, when the phase change set of P [i] is “X radians” and “Y radians”, FIG. 26, FIG. 27, 28, 52, and 54, e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′, and e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′
- e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Prity-Check) code (however, an LDPC (block) that is not a QC-LDPC code)
- block codes such as concatenated codes of LDPC codes and BCH codes (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)
- block codes such as turbo codes or Duo-Binary Turbo Codes are used
- a case where A1 and Embodiment C6 are generalized will be described.
- a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted will be described as an example.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- 34 for example, as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, two blocks s1 and s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has one encoder.
- it is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. " (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.)
- the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits.
- 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM. Since the transmission apparatus in FIG. 4 transmits two streams at the same time, when the modulation method is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2. In order to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted at s1 and 1500 symbols transmitted at s2, 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required.
- phase change values or phase change sets prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4 are the phase change values (or phase change sets) prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly in period 5.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4] need only include at least two different phase change values (P [0] , P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4] may contain the same phase change value.
- five phase change values may be prepared.
- phase change when the phase change is performed on both of the baseband signals z1 ′ and z2 ′ after the precoding, two phase change values are required for one slot. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of the period 5, five phase change sets may be prepared).
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 slots
- the phase The slots using the change value P [1] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [2] are 300 slots
- the slots using the phase change value P [3] are 300 slots
- the phase change value P [4 ] Need to be 300 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the modulation scheme is 64QAM
- the 500 slots described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 bits constituting one encoded block there are 100 slots using the phase change value P [0].
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [1] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [2]
- 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3] 100 slots that use the phase change value P [3]
- the slot using P [4] needs to be 100 slots.
- phase change values P [0], P [1],..., P [N-2], P [N-1] in the phase change method for switching the phase change values regularly in the period N It shall be expressed as However, P [0], P [1],..., P [N-2], P [N-1] are assumed to be composed of at least two different phase change values.
- P [0], P [1], ..., P [N-2], P [N-1] may contain the same phase change value.
- K i 0,1,2, ..., N-1 (i is an integer between 0 and N-1)
- ⁇ Condition # C17> should be satisfied in the supported modulation schemes.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus in FIG. 3 and the transmission apparatus in FIG. 12, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 3 and 12 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- phase change values or phase change sets prepared for a method of changing the phase regularly in period 5
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3 for the period 5 for the phase change unit of the transmission apparatus of FIG. ] shall be prepared.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4] need only include at least two different phase change values (P [0] , P [1], P [2], P [3], P [4] may contain the same phase change value. (As shown in FIG.
- phase change values may be prepared.
- the five phase change values (or phase change sets) for cycle 5 are represented as P [0], P [1], P [2], P [3], and P [4].
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [2] is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 slots
- the slot using [4] needs to be 600 slots. This is because, depending on the phase change value to be used, the reception quality of the data is greatly affected by the phase change value using a large number.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 600 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times
- the second In order to transmit the encoded block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 600 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 600 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] Is 600 slots, the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 600 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 600 times.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] in the 1500 slot described above for transmitting the number of bits of 6000 ⁇ 2 bits constituting the two encoded blocks 300 slots, 300 slots using the phase change value P [1], 300 slots using the phase change value P [2], 300 slots using the phase change value P [3], phase
- the slot using the change value P [4] needs to be 300 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] Is 300 slots
- the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 300 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 300 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 300 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is 300 slots, 300 slots using the phase change value P [3], and 300 slots using the phase change value P [4] may be used.
- the number of slots that use the change value P [4] needs to be 200 slots.
- the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times
- the phase change value P [2 ] is 200 times
- the second code In order to transmit the block, the slot using the phase change value P [0] is 200 times, the slot using the phase change value P [1] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [2] is It is preferable that there are 200 slots, the slot using the phase change value P [3] is 200 times, and the slot using the phase change value P [4] is 200 times.
- the phase change values in the phase change method for switching the phase change values regularly in the period N are P [0], P [1], P [2],..., P [N-2], It shall be represented as P [N-1].
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P [N-1] consist of at least two different phase change values And (P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P [N-1] may contain the same phase change value.)
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [0] is K 0
- the number of slots using the phase change value P [1] is K 1
- the phase is changed
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the first encoding is the number of times K 0,1 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 1, 1, and the number of times the phase change value P [i] is used as K i, 1 (i 0, 1, 2,..., N-1 (i is an integer from 0 to N-1) )
- K N-1,1 ⁇ Condition # C20>
- the number of times the phase change value P [0] is used when transmitting all the bits constituting the block after the second encoding is the number of times K 0,2 and the phase change value P [1] are used.
- K 1,2 and the number of times the phase change value P [i] is used as K i, 2 (i 0, 1, 2,..., N-1 (i is an integer between 0 and N-1) )
- K N-1,2 K N-1,2 , ⁇ Condition # C21>
- ⁇ condition # C19> ⁇ condition#C20> ⁇ condition in the supported modulation schemes # C21> should be satisfied.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- the following conditions may be satisfied instead of ⁇ Condition # C19> ⁇ Condition#C20> ⁇ Condition#C21>.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- P [0], P [1], P [2], ..., P [N-2], P] [N-1] are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PN [N ⁇ 1] can be changed in phase by arranging symbols in the time axis and frequency-time axis blocks.
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) are randomly used. It is not necessary to use N phase change values (or phase change sets) so as to have a periodic period, but satisfying the above-described conditions is necessary for obtaining high data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. , Become important.
- the base station may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change).
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream,
- This method may be set to any one of the methods for changing the phase regularly.
- this embodiment may be implemented for a (sub) carrier group for which the method for changing the phase regularly is selected.
- phase change is performed on one precoded baseband signal
- the phase change value of P [i] is “X radians”, FIG. 3, FIG. 4, FIG. 6, FIG. 25, FIG. 29, FIG. 51, and FIG. 53
- e jX is multiplied by the baseband signal z2 ′ after precoding.
- the phase change is performed on both precoded baseband signals, for example, when the phase change set of P [i] is “X radians” and “Y radians”, FIG. 26, FIG. 27, 28, 52, and 54, e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′, and e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- e jX is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z2 ′
- e jY is multiplied by the precoded baseband signal z1 ′.
- FIG. 67 shows an example of the configuration of the transmission apparatus according to the present embodiment. Elements that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 3 are given the same reference numerals, and hereinafter the same as described in FIG. The description of the operation element portion is omitted. 67 is different from FIG. 3 in that a baseband signal switching unit 6702 is inserted immediately after the weighting synthesis unit. Therefore, hereinafter, the description will focus on the operation around the baseband signal switching unit 6702.
- FIG. 21 shows the configuration of the weighting synthesis unit (308A, 308B).
- a region surrounded by a dotted line is a weighting synthesis unit.
- the baseband signal 307A is multiplied by w11 to generate w11 ⁇ s1 (t), and is multiplied by w21 to generate w21 ⁇ s1 (t).
- the baseband signal 307B is multiplied by w12 to generate w12 ⁇ s2 (t), and is multiplied by w22 to generate w22 ⁇ s2 (t).
- s1 (t) and s2 (t) are BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying), QPSK, 8PSK (8 Phase Shift Keying), 16 QAM, 32 QAM (32 Quadrature Amplitude). Modulation), 64QAM, 256QAM, 16APSK (16 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying) and other modulation system baseband signals.
- both weighting combining sections perform weighting using a fixed precoding matrix.
- the precoding matrix under the condition of the following expression (63) or expression (64), There is a method using formula (62).
- ⁇ is not limited to the equations (63) and (64), and other values, for example, ⁇ may be 1, and ⁇ is 0. ( ⁇ may be a real number greater than or equal to 0, and ⁇ may be an imaginary number).
- the precoding matrix is a
- the precoding matrix is not limited to the equation (62),
- any one of a, b, c, and d may be “zero”.
- a is zero, b, c, d is not zero, (2) b is zero, a, c, d is not zero, (3) c is zero, a, b , D may be non-zero, (4) d may be zero, and a, b, c may be non-zero.
- two values of a, b, c, and d may be zero.
- a method in which (1) a and d are zero, b and c are not zero, and (2) b and c are zero and a and d are not zero is effective.
- the precoding matrix to be used may be set and changed, and the precoding matrix may be used fixedly.
- Baseband signal switching section 6702 receives weighted signal 309A and weighted signal 316B as inputs, performs baseband signal switching, and outputs a replaced baseband signal 6701A and a replaced baseband signal 6701B. . Details of the replacement of the baseband signal are as described with reference to FIG.
- the replacement of the baseband signal according to the present embodiment is different from the signal for replacement of the baseband signal shown in FIG.
- replacement of baseband signals according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
- the in-phase I component I p1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the signal 309A (p1 (i)) after weighted synthesis are represented as Q p1 (i), and the signal 316B after weighted synthesis (p2 (i))
- the in-phase I component I p2 (i) and the quadrature Q component are represented as Q p2 (i).
- the in-phase I component I q1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement are represented as Q q1 (i), and the in-phase of the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement.
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are expressed as Q q2 (i). (Where i represents the order of time or frequency (carrier)) In the example of Fig. 67, i is time, but Fig. 67 is used when the OFDM method is used as shown in Fig. 12.
- i When applied, i may be a frequency (carrier), which will be described later.
- the baseband signal switching unit 6702 replaces baseband components, The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i), the quadrature component is Q p2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q p1 (i) The modulated signal corresponding to the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 1, and the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 2 at the same time.
- the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal q1 (i) and the replaced baseband signal q2 (i) are transmitted from different antennas using the same frequency at the same time. Also good. Also, The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i), the orthogonal component is I p2 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q p2 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i), the orthogonal component is I p1 (i), and the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i), Let the orthogonal component be Q p2 (i) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i), the orthogonal component is I p2 (i), the in-phase component
- the in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i + v), the quadrature component is Q p2 (i + w), the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i + w), Let the orthogonal component be Q p1 (i + v) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p1 (i + v), the quadrature component is I p2 (i + w), the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i + v), Let the orthogonal component be Q p2 (i + w) The in-phase component of the baseband signal q1 (i) after replacement is I p2 (i + w), the quadrature component is I p1 (i + v), the in-phase component of the baseband signal q2 (i) after replacement is Q p1 (i +
- the in-phase I component I q1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement are represented as Q q1 (i), and the in-phase of the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement.
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are expressed as Q q2 (i).
- FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the above description.
- the in-phase I component I p1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the signal 309A (p1 (i)) after weighted synthesis are expressed as Q p1.
- This is expressed as (i)
- the in-phase I component I p2 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the weighted signal 316B (p2 (i)) are expressed as Q p2 (i).
- the in-phase I component I q1 (i) and the quadrature Q component of the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement are represented as Q q1 (i)
- the in-phase of the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement are expressed as Q q2 (i).
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are expressed as Q q2 (i).
- the I component I q2 (i) and the orthogonal Q component are represented by Q q2 (i) as described above.
- the modulated signal corresponding to the baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 312A, and the modulation signal corresponding to the baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) after replacement is transmitted from the transmission antenna 312B at the same time.
- the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)) and the modulated signal corresponding to the replaced baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)) are transmitted from different antennas, such as transmitting using the same frequency.
- the same frequency is used for transmission at the same time.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives the baseband signal 6701B after replacement and information 315 regarding the signal processing method as inputs, and regularly changes and outputs the phase of the baseband signal 6701B after signal replacement. To change regularly, the phase is changed according to a predetermined phase change pattern at a predetermined cycle (for example, every n symbols (n is an integer of 1 or more) or every predetermined time). .
- a predetermined phase change pattern for example, every n symbols (n is an integer of 1 or more) or every predetermined time).
- Radio section 310B receives signal 309B after the phase change, performs processing such as quadrature modulation, band limitation, frequency conversion, and amplification, and outputs transmission signal 311B. Transmission signal 311B is output as a radio wave from antenna 312B.
- the 67 has been described in the case where there are a plurality of encoders as shown in FIG. 3. However, FIG. 67 is different from FIG. 67 in that it includes an encoder and a distributor as shown in FIG. Are used as input signals to the interleaver, and thereafter, the same operation as described above can be performed even when the configuration shown in FIG. 67 is followed.
- FIG. 5 shows an example of a frame configuration on the time axis of the transmission apparatus according to this embodiment.
- Symbol 500_1 is a symbol for notifying the receiving apparatus of the transmission method. For example, an error correction method used for transmitting a data symbol, information on its coding rate, and a modulation method used for transmitting a data symbol The information etc. is transmitted.
- Symbol 501_1 is a symbol for estimating channel fluctuation of modulated signal z1 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u (on the time axis), and symbol 503_1 is a data symbol transmitted by modulated signal z1 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- Symbol 501_2 is a symbol for estimating channel fluctuation of modulated signal z2 (t) ⁇ where t is time ⁇ transmitted by the transmission apparatus.
- Symbol 502_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u
- symbol 503_2 is a data symbol transmitted from modulated signal z2 (t) to symbol number u + 1.
- symbols at the same time are transmitted from the transmission antenna using the same (common) frequency.
- the channel fluctuation of each transmission antenna of the transmission device and each antenna of the reception device is set to h11 (t), h12 (t), h21 (t), and h22 (t), respectively, and reception received by the reception antenna 505 # 1 of the reception device.
- the signal is r1 (t) and the received signal received by the receiving antenna 505 # 2 of the receiving device is r2 (t)
- the following relational expression is established.
- FIG. 69 is a diagram related to the weighting method (precoding method), baseband signal replacement and phase changing method in the present embodiment, and weighting synthesis section 600 includes weighting synthesis section 308A in FIG. It is a weighting synthesis unit that integrates both of 308B.
- the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
- the in-phase I component and quadrature Q component of the band signal is shown in FIG. 69, the stream s1 (t) and the stream s2 (t) correspond to the baseband signals 307A and 307B of FIG. 3, that is, the bases according to the mapping of modulation schemes such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.
- the in-phase I component and quadrature Q component of the band signal are examples of modulation schemes.
- the stream s1 (t) represents the signal with symbol number u as s1 (u), the signal with symbol number u + 1 as s1 (u + 1), and so on.
- a signal with a symbol number u is represented as s2 (u)
- a signal with a symbol number u + 1 is represented as s2 (u + 1), and so on.
- the weighting synthesis unit 600 receives the baseband signals 307A (s1 (t)) and 307B (s2 (t)) and the information 315 related to the signal processing method in FIG. And outputs the signals 309A (p1 (t)) and 316B (p2 (t)) after weighted synthesis in FIG.
- the precoding matrix F can be expressed by the following equation.
- the relation between the in-phase I component I q2 (i) of 6701B (q2 (i)), the orthogonal Q component Q q2 (i), and p1 (t) and p2 (t) is as described above. If the phase change equation by the phase change unit is y (t), the baseband signal 309B (q2 ′ (i)) after the phase change can be expressed by the following equation (70).
- y (t) is an expression for changing the phase according to a predetermined method.
- the phase change expression at time u is expressed by, for example, Expression (71). be able to.
- phase change equation at time u + 1 can be expressed by equation (72), for example.
- phase change equation at time u + k can be expressed by equation (73).
- the regular phase change examples shown in the equations (71) to (73) are merely examples.
- the period of regular phase change is not limited to four. If the number of periods increases, there is a possibility that the reception performance (more precisely, error correction performance) of the receiving apparatus can be improved accordingly. It's likely that you should avoid small values such as.)
- phase change examples shown in the above formulas (71) to (73) the configuration in which the phase is sequentially rotated by a predetermined phase (in the above formula, by ⁇ / 2) is shown.
- the phase may be changed randomly.
- the phase by which y (t) is multiplied in the order as shown in Expression (74) or Expression (75) may be changed according to a predetermined cycle.
- What is important in the regular change of the phase is that the phase of the modulation signal is changed regularly, and the degree of the phase to be changed is made as uniform as possible, for example, from ⁇ radians to ⁇ radians.
- the baseband signal replacement unit replaces the baseband signal described above to change the phase.
- the unit changes the phase of the input signal while regularly changing the degree of change.
- the reception quality may be greatly improved.
- the special precoding matrix depends on the phase and amplitude components of the direct wave when received. Different.
- there is a certain rule in the LOS environment If the phase of the transmission signal is regularly changed in accordance with this rule, the data reception quality is greatly improved.
- the present invention proposes a signal processing method that improves the LOS environment.
- FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of receiving apparatus 700 in the present embodiment.
- Radio section 703_X receives reception signal 702_X received by antenna 701_X, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_X.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h11 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 706_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 705_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission device receives baseband signal 704_X, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h12 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 706_2 is output.
- Radio section 703_Y receives reception signal 702_Y received by antenna 701_Y, performs processing such as frequency conversion and orthogonal demodulation, and outputs baseband signal 704_Y.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_1 in modulated signal z1 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y as input, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_1 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h21 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 708_1 is output.
- Channel fluctuation estimation section 707_2 in modulated signal z2 transmitted by the transmission apparatus receives baseband signal 704_Y, extracts channel estimation reference symbol 501_2 in FIG. 5, and obtains a value corresponding to h22 in equation (66).
- the channel estimation signal 708_2 is output.
- Control information decoding section 709 receives baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, detects symbol 500_1 for notifying the transmission method of FIG. 5, and outputs a signal 710 related to the transmission method information notified by the transmission apparatus.
- the signal processing unit 711 receives the baseband signals 704_X and 704_Y, the channel estimation signals 706_1, 706_2, 708_1, and 708_2, and the signal 710 related to the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus, performs detection and decoding, and performs reception data 712_1 and 712_2 are output.
- FIG. 8 shows an example of the configuration of the signal processing unit 711 in the present embodiment.
- FIG. 8 mainly includes an INNER MIMO detection unit, a soft-in / soft-out decoder, and a coefficient generation unit.
- the details of the iterative decoding method in this configuration are described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3, but the MIMO transmission methods described in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3 are spatial multiplexing MIMO transmissions.
- the transmission scheme in this embodiment is a scheme, it is a MIMO transmission scheme in which the phase of a signal is regularly changed with time, a precoding matrix is used, and a baseband signal is replaced.
- the point is different from Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
- the (channel) matrix in equation (66) is H (t)
- the precoding weight matrix in FIG. 69 is F (where the precoding matrix is a fixed one that is not changed in one received signal)
- the coefficient generation unit 819 in FIG. 8 transmits a signal 818 related to information on the transmission method notified by the transmission apparatus (information for specifying a fixed precoding matrix and a phase change pattern when the phase is changed). (Corresponding to 710 in FIG. 7) is input, and a signal 820 relating to signal processing method information is output.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives a signal 820 related to information on the signal processing method, and uses this signal to perform iterative detection and decoding. The operation will be described.
- the signal processing unit configured as shown in FIG. 8 needs to perform a processing method as shown in FIG. 10 in order to perform iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulation signal (stream) s2 are decoded.
- one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s1 and one codeword (or one frame) of the modulated signal (stream) s2 A log-likelihood ratio (LLR) is obtained.
- detection and decoding are performed again using the LLR. This operation is performed a plurality of times (this operation is called iterative decoding (iterative detection)).
- this operation is called iterative decoding (iterative detection)).
- the description will focus on a method for creating a log likelihood ratio (LLR) of a symbol at a specific time in one frame.
- the storage unit 815 has a baseband signal 801X (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_X in FIG. 7), a channel estimation signal group 802X (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 706_1 and 706_2 in FIG. 7), and a baseband.
- the signal 801Y (corresponding to the baseband signal 704_Y in FIG. 7) and the channel estimation signal group 802Y (corresponding to the channel estimation signals 708_1 and 708_2 in FIG. 7) are input to realize iterative decoding (iterative detection).
- the calculated matrix is stored as a modified channel signal group.
- the storage unit 815 outputs the above signals as a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, and a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y when necessary.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 receives the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y.
- the modulation scheme of the modulation signal (stream) s1 and the modulation signal (stream) s2 will be described as 16QAM.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains candidate signal points corresponding to the baseband signal 801X from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y. The state at that time is shown in FIG. In FIG. 11, ⁇ (black circle) is a candidate signal point on the IQ plane. Since the modulation method is 16QAM, there are 256 candidate signal points. (However, since FIG. 11 shows an image diagram, all 256 candidate signal points are not shown.) Here, 4 bits transmitted by the modulation signal s1 are b0, b1, b2, b3, and the modulation signal s2.
- step b4 Assuming that the 4 bits transmitted in step b4 are b4, b5, b6, b7, there are candidate signal points corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) in FIG. Then, the squared Euclidean distance between the reception signal point 1101 (corresponding to the baseband signal 801X) and each candidate signal point is obtained. Then, each square Euclidean distance is divided by the noise variance ⁇ 2 .
- Each baseband signal and modulated signals s1 and s2 are complex signals.
- candidate signal points corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y are obtained from the channel estimation signal group 802X and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, and the square Euclidean distance from the reception signal point (corresponding to the baseband signal 801Y) is obtained.
- the square Euclidean distance is divided by the noise variance ⁇ 2 . Therefore, a value obtained by dividing the candidate signal point corresponding to (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) and the received signal point squared Euclidean distance by the variance of noise is represented by E Y (b0, b1, b2 , B3, b4, b5, b6, b7).
- E X (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) + E Y (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) E (b0, b1, b2, b3) , B4, b5, b6, b7).
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 outputs E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Expression (28), Expression (29), and Expression (30), and details are shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3.
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804 as input, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the deinterleaver (807A) receives the log likelihood signal 806A, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304A) in FIG. 67), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving.
- the deinterleaver (807B) receives the log likelihood signal 806B, performs deinterleaving corresponding to the interleaver (interleaver (304B in FIG. 67)), and outputs a log likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving.
- Log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809A receives log-likelihood signal 808A after deinterleaving, and calculates the log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302A in FIG.
- LLR Log-Likelihood Ratio
- log-likelihood ratio calculation section 809B receives log-likelihood signal 808B after deinterleaving and inputs the log-likelihood ratio (LLR: Log-Likelihood Ratio) of bits encoded by encoder 302B in FIG. ) And a log likelihood ratio signal 810B is output.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 811A receives the log likelihood ratio signal 810A, performs decoding, and outputs a log likelihood ratio 812A after decoding.
- Soft-in / soft-out decoder 811B receives log-likelihood ratio signal 810B as input, performs decoding, and outputs decoded log-likelihood ratio 812B.
- the interleaver (813A) receives the log-likelihood ratio 812A after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs a log-likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving.
- the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (813A) is the same as the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (304A) of FIG.
- the interleaver (813B) receives the log likelihood ratio 812B after decoding obtained in the (k-1) th soft-in / soft-out decoding, performs interleaving, and outputs the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving. .
- the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (813B) is the same as the interleaving pattern of the interleaver (304B) of FIG.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 inputs a baseband signal 816X, a modified channel estimation signal group 817X, a baseband signal 816Y, a modified channel estimation signal group 817Y, an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814A, and an interleaved log likelihood ratio 814B. And Here, not the baseband signal 801X, the channel estimation signal group 802X, the baseband signal 801Y, and the channel estimation signal group 802Y, but the baseband signal 816X, the modified channel estimation signal group 817X, the baseband signal 816Y, and the modified channel estimation signal group 817Y. Is used because of a delay time due to iterative decoding.
- the difference between the operation at the time of iterative decoding of the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 and the operation at the time of initial detection is that the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 814B after interleaving are used in signal processing. It is.
- the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 first obtains E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) as in the initial detection.
- coefficients corresponding to Equation (11) and Equation (32) are obtained from the log likelihood ratio 814A after interleaving and the log likelihood ratio 914B after interleaving.
- E (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5, b6, b7) is corrected using the obtained coefficient, and the value is changed to E ′ (b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, b5). , B6, b7) and output as a signal 804.
- Log likelihood calculation section 805A receives signal 804, calculates the log likelihood of bits b0 and b1, and b2 and b3, and outputs log likelihood signal 806A. However, in the calculation of the log likelihood, the log likelihood when “1” and the log likelihood when “0” are calculated.
- the calculation method is as shown in Expression (31), Expression (Expression 32), Expression (33), Expression (34), and Expression (35), and is shown in Non-Patent Document 2 and Non-Patent Document 3. Yes.
- log likelihood calculation section 805B receives signal 804 as input, calculates log likelihood of bits b4 and b5 and b6 and b7, and outputs log likelihood signal 806B.
- the operation after the deinterleaver is the same as the initial detection.
- FIG. 8 shows the configuration of the signal processing unit in the case of performing iterative detection. However, iterative detection is not necessarily an essential configuration for obtaining good reception quality, and is a component required only for iterative detection.
- the interleaver 813A or 813B may be omitted. At this time, the INNER MIMO detection unit 803 does not perform repetitive detection.
- FIG. 9 shows a configuration of a signal processing unit different from that in FIG. 8, and is a signal processing unit for a modulated signal transmitted from a transmission apparatus to which the encoder and distribution unit of FIG. 8 differs from FIG. 8 in the number of soft-in / soft-out decoders.
- the soft-in / soft-out decoder 901 receives log likelihood ratio signals 810A and 810B as inputs, performs decoding, and performs decoding.
- a log likelihood ratio 902 is output.
- Distribution section 903 receives log likelihood ratio 902 after decoding as input, and performs distribution. Other parts are the same as those in FIG.
- the transmission apparatus of the MIMO transmission system transmits a plurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas as in the present embodiment
- the precoding matrix is multiplied and the phase is changed with time.
- the operation of the receiving apparatus is described with the number of antennas being limited, but it can be similarly implemented even when the number of antennas is increased. That is, the number of antennas in the receiving apparatus does not affect the operation and effect of the present embodiment.
- the coding is not limited to the LDPC code, and the decoding method is not limited to the example of the sum-product decoding as the soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- the decoding method is not limited to the example of the sum-product decoding as the soft-in / soft-out decoder.
- There are other soft-in / soft-out decoding methods for example, BCJR algorithm, SOVA algorithm, Max-log-MAP algorithm, and the like. Details are described in Non-Patent Document 6.
- the single carrier method has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and the same can be implemented even when multicarrier transmission is performed. Therefore, for example, the case of using the spread spectrum communication system, the OFDM system, the SC-FDMA, the SC-OFDM system, the wavelet OFDM system shown in Non-Patent Document 7, etc. can be similarly implemented.
- symbols other than data symbols for example, pilot symbols (preamble, unique word, etc.), control information transmission symbols, and the like may be arranged in any manner.
- FIG. 70 shows the configuration of a transmission apparatus when the OFDM method is used. 70 that operate in the same manner as in FIGS. 3, 12, and 67 are given the same reference numerals.
- the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201A receives the weighted signal 309A, performs OFDM scheme-related processing, and outputs a transmission signal 1202A.
- the OFDM scheme-related processing unit 1201B receives the signal 309B after the phase change and outputs a transmission signal 1202B.
- FIG. 13 shows an example of the configuration after the OFDM scheme-related processing units 1201A and 1201B in FIG. 70.
- the portions related to 1201A to 312A in FIG. Are 1301B to 1310B.
- the serial / parallel converter 1302A performs serial / parallel conversion on the baseband signal 1301A after replacement (corresponding to the baseband signal 6701A after replacement in FIG. 70), and outputs a parallel signal 1303A.
- Rearranger 1304A receives parallel signal 1303A as input, performs rearrangement, and outputs rearranged signal 1305A.
- the rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306A receives the rearranged signal 1305A, performs inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307A after the inverse Fourier transform.
- Radio section 1308A receives signal 1307A after inverse Fourier transform as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs modulated signal 1309A, and modulated signal 1309A is output from antenna 1310A as a radio wave.
- the serial / parallel converter 1302B performs serial / parallel conversion on the signal 1301B whose phase has been changed (corresponding to the signal 309B after the phase change in FIG. 12), and outputs a parallel signal 1303B.
- Rearranger 1304B receives parallel signal 1303B as input, performs rearrangement, and outputs rearranged signal 1305B. The rearrangement will be described in detail later.
- the inverse fast Fourier transform unit 1306B receives the rearranged signal 1305B, performs an inverse fast Fourier transform, and outputs a signal 1307B after the inverse Fourier transform.
- Radio section 1308B receives signal 1307B after inverse Fourier transform as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, outputs modulated signal 1309B, and modulated signal 1309B is output as a radio wave from antenna 1310B.
- the phase 67 is not a transmission system using multicarriers, and therefore, the phase is changed so as to be four periods as shown in FIG. 69, and the symbols after the phase change are arranged in the time axis direction.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as the OFDM scheme as shown in FIG. 70 is used, naturally, as shown in FIG.
- a method of arranging using the frequency axis direction or both the frequency axis and the time axis is conceivable. Hereinafter, this point will be described.
- FIG. 14 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time, and the frequency axis ranges from (sub) carrier 0 to (sub) carrier 9.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 use the same frequency band at the same time (time), and
- FIG. 14A shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1, and
- FIG. Indicates a rearrangement method of symbols of the modulation signal z2. Numbers such as # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... Are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the baseband signal 1301A after replacement which are input to the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302A.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equivalent to one period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, # 4n + 3 (n is an integer of 0 or more) is one cycle.
- symbols # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are arranged in order from carrier 0, and symbols # 0 to # 9 are arranged at time $ 1. Thereafter, symbols # 10 to # 19 are regularly arranged such that they are arranged at time $ 2.
- the modulation signals z1 and z2 are complex signals.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3,... are sequentially assigned to the symbols of the signal 1301B after the phase input to the serial / parallel conversion unit 1302B is changed.
- # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are changed in different phases, and # 0, # 1, # 2, and # 3 are equal. This is the period.
- # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are changed in phase, and # 4n, # 4n + 1, # 4n + 2, and # 4n + 3 are one. This is the period.
- a symbol group 1402 shown in FIG. 14B is a symbol for one cycle when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 69 is used, and symbol # 0 is a symbol when using the phase at time u in FIG.
- symbol # 1 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 1 in FIG. 69 is used
- symbol # 2 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 in FIG. 69 is used
- symbol # 3 is the symbol in FIG.
- symbol #x when x mod 4 (the remainder when x is divided by 4, and therefore mod: modulo) is 0, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u in FIG. 69 is used. Yes, when x mod 4 is 1, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 1 in FIG. 69 is used, and when x mod 4 is 2, symbol #x has the phase at time u + 2 in FIG. When x mod 4 is 3, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 3 in FIG. 69 is used.
- the phase of modulated signal z1 shown in FIG. 14A is not changed.
- symbols can be arranged in the frequency axis direction.
- the way of arranging symbols is not limited to the arrangement as shown in FIG. Another example will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.
- FIG. 15 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 15A shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 15B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- 15A and 15B is different from FIG. 14 in that the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z1 and the symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 are different.
- FIG. 0 to # 5 are allocated from carrier 4 to carrier 9
- symbols # 6 to # 9 are allocated to carriers 0 to 3
- symbols # 10 to # 19 are allocated to each carrier according to the same rule.
- the symbol group 1502 shown in FIG. 15B is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method shown in FIG. 6 is used.
- FIG. 16 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal frequency and vertical axis time different from FIG. 14, and FIG. 16 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIGS. 16A and 16B differ from FIG. 14 in that symbols are arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. 14, whereas symbols are not arranged in order on the carrier in FIG. Is a point.
- the rearrangement method of the symbols of the modulation signal z1 and the rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2 may be different.
- FIG. 17 shows an example of a symbol rearrangement method in rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at a horizontal axis frequency and a vertical axis time different from those in FIGS. 14 to 16, and FIG.
- the symbol rearrangement method for the signal z1 and FIG. 17B shows the symbol rearrangement method for the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged in the frequency axis direction, but in FIG. 17, symbols are arranged using both the frequency and time axes.
- a symbol group 1702 shown in FIG. 17 is a symbol for one period when using the phase changing method (thus, eight symbols), symbol # 0 is a symbol when using the phase at time u, and symbol # 0 1 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 1, symbol # 2 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 2, and symbol # 3 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 3.
- # 4 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 4
- symbol # 5 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 5
- symbol # 6 is a symbol when using the phase at time u + 6
- Symbol # 7 is a symbol when the phase at time u + 7 is used.
- symbol #x when x mod 8 is 0, symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u is used, and when x mod 8 is 1, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 1
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 2 is used, and when x mod 8 is 3, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 3
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 4 is used, and when x mod 8 is 5, symbol #x uses the phase at time u + 5
- symbol #x is a symbol when the phase at time u + 6 is used, and symbol when x mod 8 is 7 x is a symbol when using the phase of the time u + 7.
- the number of symbols per minute is m ⁇ n symbols (that is, there are m ⁇ n types of phases to be multiplied) n slots in the frequency axis direction (number of carriers) used to arrange symbols for one period, the time axis If the slot used in the direction is m, m> n is preferable. This is because the phase of the direct wave is more gradual in fluctuation in the time axis direction than in the frequency axis direction.
- FIG. 18 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 1301B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from FIG. 17, and FIG. 18 (A) shows the modulation signal z1.
- FIG. 18B shows a symbol rearrangement method of the modulation signal z2.
- symbols are arranged using both the frequency and the time axis as in FIG. 17, but the difference from FIG. 17 is that in FIG. 17, the frequency direction is prioritized, and then the time axis direction.
- the time axis direction is prioritized, and then symbols are arranged in the time axis direction.
- a symbol group 1802 is a symbol for one period when the phase changing method is used.
- FIGS. 17 and 18 similarly to FIG. 15, even if the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 1 and the symbol arrangement method of the modulation signal z ⁇ b> 2 are different, the implementation can be similarly performed. An effect that reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. Further, in FIGS. 17 and 18, even if symbols are not sequentially arranged as in FIG. 16, it can be implemented in the same manner, and an effect that high reception quality can be obtained can be obtained. it can.
- FIG. 22 shows an example of the symbol rearrangement method in the rearrangement units 1301A and 130B in FIG. 13 at the horizontal axis frequency and the vertical axis time different from the above.
- the phase at times u to u + 3 in FIG. 69 is changed.
- the phase change using the phase at the time u in the # 1, the phase change using the phase at the time u + 1, in # 2, the phase change using the phase at the time u + 2, and in the # 3 at the time u + 3 It is assumed that the phase is changed using the phase.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is used for the symbol # 4
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 5
- the phase at time u + 2 is used for # 6.
- # 7 the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- phase change as described above was performed for the symbol at time $ 1, since the cyclic shift is performed in the time axis direction, the phase change is performed as follows for the symbol groups 2201, 2202, 2203, and 2204. Will do.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 0
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 9
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 18.
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 28
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the # 1
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 10
- the phase is changed using the phase at time u + 3.
- the phase change using the phase at time u is performed for the symbol # 20
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 1 is performed at # 29
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 2 is performed at # 2.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the phase change using the phase of the time u is used for the symbol # 12
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 1 is used for the symbol # 21
- the phase change using the phase of the time u + 2 is used for the # 30.
- the phase change using the phase at time u + 3 is performed.
- the feature in FIG. 22 is that, for example, when attention is paid to the symbol # 11, both the adjacent symbols (# 10 and # 12) in the frequency axis direction at the same time change the phase using a phase different from # 11.
- both the symbols (# 2 and # 20) adjacent to each other in the time axis direction of the same carrier of the symbol # 11 are changed in phase using a phase different from # 11.
- the above-mentioned characteristics are realized by providing the characteristic of cyclically shifting the symbol arrangement order.
- the phase changing unit 317A receives the replaced baseband signal 6701A (q1 (i)), and the phase changing unit 317B receives the replaced baseband signal 6701B (q2 (i)). It will be.
- FIG. 31 shows an example of a frame configuration of a part of symbols of a signal on the time-frequency axis when a multicarrier scheme such as the OFDM scheme is used in a transmission scheme that regularly changes the phase.
- FIG. 31 shows a frame configuration of the modulated signal z2 ′ corresponding to the baseband signal after replacement, which is an input of the phase changing unit 317B shown in FIG. 67, and one square is a symbol (however, precoding is performed). Therefore, it is normal that both signals of s1 and s2 are included, but depending on the configuration of the precoding matrix, there may be only one signal of s1 and s2.
- carrier 2 the channel state of the most adjacent symbol in time $ 2, that is, the symbol 3103 at time $ 1 and the symbol 3101 at time $ 3 of carrier 2 is the carrier state of symbol 610a at carrier 2 and time $ 2. It is highly correlated with channel conditions.
- each channel state of the symbols 3101, 3102, 3103, and 3104 has a very high correlation with the channel state of the symbol 3100.
- N types of phases are prepared as phases to be multiplied in a transmission method that regularly changes phases.
- e j0 is added to the symbol shown in FIG. 31. This is because the signal z2 ′ in FIG. 6 in this symbol is multiplied by “e j0 ” to change the phase.
- a high data reception quality is obtained on the receiving apparatus side by utilizing the high correlation between the channel states of symbols adjacent in the frequency axis direction and / or symbols adjacent in the time axis direction. Disclose the symbol arrangement of the symbols whose phase has been changed. Conditions # D1-1 and # D1-2 are conceivable as conditions for obtaining high data reception quality on the receiving side. ⁇ Condition # D1-1> As shown in FIG. 69, when a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used in a transmission method in which the phase is regularly changed with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement, time X and carrier Y are used for data transmission.
- time X and carrier Y are used for data transmission. If the symbols adjacent to each other in the frequency axis direction, ie, time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 are both data symbols, these three data
- the baseband signal q2 after replacement corresponding to the symbol that is, the baseband signal q2 after replacement at time X ⁇ carrier Y, time X ⁇ carrier Y-1 and time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1, all have different phase changes. Is done.
- ⁇ Condition # D1-1> there should be a data symbol that satisfies ⁇ condition # D1-2>.
- symbol A There is a certain symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol temporally adjacent to the symbol A is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above.
- symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although high reception quality is obtained as an SNR, the phase relationship of direct waves is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- symbol A there is a symbol (hereinafter referred to as symbol A) in the transmission signal, and the channel state of each symbol adjacent to the symbol A in frequency is highly correlated with the channel state of symbol A as described above. . Therefore, if different phases are used for three symbols that are adjacent in terms of frequency, symbol A has poor reception quality in the LOS environment (although it has high reception quality as an SNR, the direct wave phase relationship is poor). It is very likely that good reception quality can be obtained with the two symbols adjacent to the remaining symbol A even if the reception quality is poor because of this situation, and as a result, after error correction decoding. Can obtain good reception quality.
- ⁇ Condition # D1-1> and ⁇ Condition # D1-2> may further improve the data reception quality in the receiving apparatus. Therefore, the following conditions can be derived.
- ⁇ Condition # D1-3> As shown in FIG. 69, when a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used in a transmission method in which the phase is regularly changed with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement, time X and carrier Y are used for data transmission. Symbols (hereinafter referred to as data symbols), and adjacent symbols in the time axis direction, that is, time X ⁇ 1 ⁇ carrier Y and time X + 1 ⁇ carrier Y are both data symbols, and in the frequency axis direction.
- the time X ⁇ carrier Y ⁇ 1 and the time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1 are both data symbols
- the baseband signal q2 after replacement corresponding to these five data symbols ie, the time X ⁇ Carrier Y and time X-1 Carrier Y and time X + 1 Carrier Y and time X Carrier Y-1
- the baseband signal q2 after each replacement in beauty time X ⁇ carrier Y + 1, either a different phase changes are made.
- phase change will be defined from 0 radians to 2 ⁇ radians.
- the phase change applied to the baseband signal q2 after replacement shown in FIG. 69 is changed to e j ⁇ X, Y.
- ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 ⁇ ⁇ X ⁇ 1, Y + 1 are In ⁇ Condition # D1-3>, ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X ⁇ 1, Y and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X + 1, Y and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 and ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X-1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X + 1, Y and ⁇ X-1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y-1 and ⁇ X-1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X + 1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y + 1 and ⁇ X + 1, Y ⁇ ⁇ X, Y ⁇ 1 and ⁇ X
- FIG. 31 shows an example of ⁇ Condition # D1-3>.
- FIG. 32 An example of symbol arrangement obtained by changing the phase under this condition is shown in FIG. 32, in any data symbol, the degree of the phase changed with respect to the symbols whose phases are adjacent in both the frequency axis direction and the time axis direction is different from each other. ing. By doing in this way, the error correction capability in the receiving apparatus can be further improved.
- phase change is performed on the two baseband signals q2 after replacement described above (see FIG. 68)
- a phase change is given to both the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement, there are several methods for phase change. This will be described in detail.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is set to a period 10.
- the (sub) carrier 1 is replaced with a baseband after replacement.
- the phase change applied to the signal q2 is changed with time. (In FIG. 32, such a change is made, but the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement is as shown in FIG.
- the value for changing the phase for one period of period 10 is constant.
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement is ej0 , and the next (replacement)
- the value of the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after the replacement is e j ⁇ / 9 , and so on.
- the symbol “e j0 ” is attached to the symbol illustrated in FIG. 33, and this is obtained by multiplying the signal q1 in FIG. 26 in this symbol by “e j0 ” and the phase. Means changed.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after the replacement is performed by changing the phase of the baseband signal q2 after the precoding after changing the phase, with the value of the phase change for one period of 10 being constant. The value is changed together with the number for one cycle. (As described above, in FIG. 33, e j0 is set for the first period, and e j ⁇ / 9 ,...
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is the cycle 10, but both the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement are considered.
- the effect that the period can be made larger than 10 can be obtained. As a result, there is a possibility that the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus is improved.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed as shown in FIG. 32 as described above.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is set to a period 10.
- the (sub) carrier 1 is replaced with a baseband after replacement.
- the phase change applied to the signal q2 is changed with time. (In FIG. 32, such a change is made, but the period 10 may be used and another phase change method may be used.)
- the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement is as shown in FIG.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q ⁇ b> 2 after replacement is performed in a period 3 different from the period 10.
- the symbol “e j0 ” is attached to the symbol illustrated in FIG. 30, and this is obtained by multiplying the baseband signal q 1 after replacement in this symbol by “e j0 ”. It means that the phase has been changed.
- the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement is the cycle 10, but both the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement are considered.
- the cycle is 30, and it is possible to obtain an effect that the cycle when the phase change of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the phase change of the baseband signal q2 after replacement are taken into consideration can be made larger than 10. it can.
- phase change is performed in the frequency axis direction, phase change is performed in the time axis direction, and phase change is performed in the time-frequency block.
- a pilot symbol SP (Scattered Pilot)
- a symbol for transmitting control information or the like may be inserted between data symbols. The phase change in this case will be described in detail.
- FIG. 47 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol and 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a baseband signal after replacement or a symbol subjected to phase change with the baseband signal after replacement.
- FIG. 47 shows a symbol arrangement in the case where the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement as shown in FIG. 69 (the phase change is not performed on the baseband signal q1 after replacement).
- FIG. 69 shows the case where the phase change is performed in the time axis direction, but in FIG. 69, by replacing the time t with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction.
- time t time t and frequency f
- the base after replacement in FIG. the numerical values set forth in a symbol of the band signals q 2 shows a phase change value.
- the symbol of the baseband signal q1 (z1) after the replacement in FIG. 47 does not change the phase, and thus no numerical value is described.
- phase change for the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed on the data symbols, that is, the symbols subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- 4701 indicates a pilot symbol
- 4702 indicates a data symbol
- the data symbol 4702 is a symbol subjected to precoding and phase change.
- FIG. 48 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement. Therefore, the numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement in FIG. 48 indicate phase change values.
- the important point in FIG. 48 is that the phase change for the baseband signal q1 after replacement is performed on data symbols, that is, symbols that have been subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement.
- the phase change with respect to the band signal q2 is performed on data symbols, that is, symbols on which precoding and baseband signals have been replaced. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded).
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 49 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 49 shows a symbol arrangement in the case where the phase is changed with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement as shown in FIG. 69 (the phase change is not performed on the baseband signal q1 after replacement).
- FIG. 69 the case where the phase is changed in the time axis direction is shown, but in FIG. 6, considering that the time t is replaced with the carrier f, this corresponds to performing the phase change in the frequency direction. 49.
- time t time t and frequency f
- (t) is replaced with (t, f)
- this corresponds to changing the phase with a block of time frequency.
- phase change with respect to the baseband signal q2 after replacement is performed on the data symbol, that is, the symbol subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement. (Here, it is described as a symbol, but the symbol described here includes both the s1 symbol and the s2 symbol because it has been pre-coded). , Z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 50 shows a frame configuration on the time-frequency axis of the modulation signal (baseband signal q1 after replacement) z1 or z1 ′ and the modulation signal (baseband signal q2 after replacement) z2 ′.
- the difference between FIG. 50 and FIG. 48 is a method of constructing symbols other than data symbols.
- the modulation signal z2 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z1 ′, and vice versa.
- the modulation signal z1 ′ is a null symbol in the time and carrier in which the pilot symbol is inserted in the modulation signal z2 ′.
- FIG. 50 shows the symbol arrangement when the phase is changed for the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement. Therefore, the numerical values described in the symbols of the baseband signal q1 after replacement and the baseband signal q2 after replacement in FIG. 50 indicate phase change values.
- the important point in FIG. 50 is that the phase change for the baseband signal q1 after replacement is performed on the data symbols, that is, the symbols subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement, and the baseband after replacement.
- the phase change with respect to the signal q2 is performed on data symbols, that is, on symbols subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement.
- Z1 ′ is not subjected to phase change
- pilot symbols inserted into z2 ′ is not subjected to phase change.
- FIG. 51 shows an example of the configuration of a transmission apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration of FIGS. 47 and 49, and the components that operate in the same way as in FIG. 4 are given the same reference numerals. . 51 does not illustrate the baseband signal switching unit illustrated in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 51, the baseband signal switching unit is provided between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIG. 67 and FIG. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- weighting combining sections 308A and 308B, phase changing section 317B, and baseband signal exchanging section operate only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a timing that is a data symbol.
- pilot symbol (which also serves as null symbol generation) generation unit 5101 indicates that base frame signal 5102A of the pilot symbol is used when frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a pilot symbol (and null symbol), and 5102B is output.
- the control information symbol 5104 includes control information 5103,
- the frame configuration signal 313 is input and indicates that the frame configuration signal 313 is a control information symbol
- baseband signals 5102A and 5102B of the control information symbol are output.
- FIG. 52 shows an example of the configuration of a transmitting apparatus that generates and transmits the modulation signal having the frame configuration shown in FIGS. 48 and 50. Components that operate in the same manner as FIGS. 4 and 51 are denoted by the same reference numerals. is doing.
- the phase changing unit 317A added to FIG. 51 operates only when the frame configuration signal 313 indicates a timing that is a data symbol. The other operations are the same as those in FIG. 52 does not show the baseband signal switching unit shown in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 52, the baseband signal switching unit is located between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIGS. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- FIG. 53 is a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG. 53 does not illustrate the baseband signal switching unit illustrated in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 53, the baseband signal switching unit is provided between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIGS. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding.
- phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is. (For interpretation, it may be considered that the phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.)
- the selection unit 5301 receives a plurality of baseband signals, selects a baseband signal of a symbol indicated by the frame configuration signal 313, and outputs it.
- FIG. 54 shows a configuration method of a transmission apparatus different from that in FIG. 54 does not illustrate the baseband signal switching unit illustrated in FIG. 67 or 70, but in contrast to FIG. 54, the baseband signal switching unit is provided between the weighting synthesis unit and the phase change unit, as in FIG. 67 and FIG. A band signal switching unit may be inserted.
- the phase changing unit 317B receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 317B changes the phase of baseband signal 316B after precoding.
- phase changing section 317B stops the operation of changing the phase, and the baseband signal of each symbol Is output as is. (For interpretation, it may be considered that the phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.)
- the phase changing unit 5201 receives a plurality of baseband signals as shown in FIG. If frame configuration signal 313 indicates that it is a data symbol, phase changing section 5201 changes the phase of baseband signal 309A after precoding.
- phase changing section 5201 stops the phase changing operation, and the baseband signal of each symbol.
- phase rotation corresponding to “e j0 ” is forcibly performed.
- pilot symbols, control symbols, and data symbols have been described as examples.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a transmission method different from precoding, for example, transmission using one antenna transmission and a space-time block code.
- the symbol is transmitted using a scheme, etc., it is important not to change the phase, and conversely, for a symbol subjected to precoding and baseband signal replacement, Performing the phase change is important in the present invention.
- Non-Patent Document 12 to Non-Patent Document 15 a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Prity-Check) code (which may be an LDPC code that is not a QC-LDPC code)
- a QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Prity-Check) code which may be an LDPC code that is not a QC-LDPC code
- a method for regularly changing the phase when using a block code such as a concatenated code of LDPC code and BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code), a turbo code using tail biting, or a Duo-Binary Turbo Code explain in detail.
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameters, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- FIG. 34 applies, for example, the encoder and distribution unit shown in FIG. 4 to the transmission apparatuses in FIGS. 69 and 70, transmits two streams s1 and s2, and the transmission apparatus has one transmission apparatus.
- FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a change in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one post-encoding block when a block code is used when the encoder is included. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 34, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the above-described transmitting apparatus transmits two streams simultaneously, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2, so s1 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in step S1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in step s2.
- the base after the replacement is prepared.
- phase change is performed on both the band signal q1 and the baseband signal q2 after replacement, two phase change values are required for one slot, and these two phase change values are referred to as a phase change set. Therefore, in this case, in order to perform the phase change of cycle 5, it is sufficient to prepare five phase change sets).
- These five phase change values are PHASE [0], PHASE [1] , PHASE [2], PHASE [3], and PHASE [4].
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 slots
- phase PHASE [ Slots using 1] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [2] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [3] are 300 slots
- slots using phase PHASE [4] are 300 slots.
- the modulation method is 16QAM
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [0] is 150 slots, 150 slots using phase PHASE [1], 150 slots using phase PHASE [2], 150 slots using phase PHASE [3], 150 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 100 slots, 100 slots using phase PHASE [1], 100 slots using phase PHASE [2], 100 slots using phase PHASE [3], and 100 slots using phase PHASE [4] Must be a slot.
- ⁇ Condition # D1-4> should be satisfied in the supported modulation schemes. become. However, when a plurality of modulation schemes are supported, the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases). In some cases, there may be a modulation scheme that cannot satisfy ⁇ Condition # D1-4>. In this case, the following conditions should be satisfied instead of ⁇ Condition # D1-4>.
- FIG. 35 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for two encoded blocks when a block code is used.
- FIG. 35 shows a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted as shown in the transmission apparatus of FIG. 67 and the transmission apparatus of FIG. 70, and the transmission apparatus has two encoders.
- FIG. 6 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots required for one encoded block when a block code is used. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.) As shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- 67 and 70 in FIG. 67 transmit two streams at the same time, and since there are two encoders, two streams transmit different code blocks. become. Therefore, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, two encoded blocks are transmitted in the same section by s1 and s2, and for example, the first encoded block is transmitted by s1, and the second block is transmitted by s2. Since two encoded blocks are transmitted, 3000 slots are required to transmit the first and second encoded blocks.
- phase change values or phase change sets prepared for the method of changing the phase regularly is 5. That is, it is assumed that five phase change values (or phase change sets) are prepared for the phase change unit of the transmission device of FIG. 67 and the transmission device of FIG. (As shown in FIG. 69, when the phase change is performed only on the baseband signal q2 after replacement, five phase change values may be prepared in order to change the phase of cycle 5. Also, the base after the replacement is prepared. If to both band signals q 1 and replaced after the baseband signal q2 perform the phase change is called for one slot, changing the two phase values are needed.
- phase change sets are designated as PHASE [0], PHASE [1 ], PHASE [2], PHASE [3], PHASE [4].
- the slot using the phase PHASE [0] is 600 slots
- Slots that use PHASE [1] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 slots
- slots that use phase PHASE [4] are 600 slots Need to be. This is because, depending on the phase to be used, the influence of the phase using a large number is large, and the reception quality of data depending on this influence is obtained in the receiving apparatus.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [3] must be 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] must be 600 times
- the phase PHASE Slots that use [0] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 600 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 600 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [4] should be 600 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 300 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is It is necessary that the slot using the phase PHASE [3] is 300 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 300 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 300 times
- the number of slots using the phase PHASE [4] is 300 times.
- the slot using phase PHASE [0] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [1] is 200 times
- the slot using phase PHASE [2] is 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [3] needs to be 200 times
- the slot using the phase PHASE [4] needs to be 200 times
- the phase PHASE is transmitted in order to transmit the second coding block.
- Slots that use [0] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [1] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [2] are 200 times
- slots that use phase PHASE [3] are 200 times
- the number of slots using phase PHASE [4] may be 200.
- K 0,2 K 0,2
- K 1, 2 K 1, 2.
- ⁇ condition # D1-6> ⁇ condition# D1- 7> ⁇ Condition#D1-8> should be satisfied.
- the number of bits that can be transmitted in one symbol is generally different depending on each modulation scheme (there may be the same in some cases).
- the following conditions should be satisfied.
- N phase change values are required for the phase change method of period N.
- PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2], PHASE [N-1] are used as N phase change values (or phase change sets).
- N phase change values (or phase change sets) PHASE [0], PHASE [1], PHASE [2], ..., PHASE [N-2],
- the phase can also be changed by placing symbols in the time axis and frequency-time axis blocks in PHASE [N-1].
- N phase change values or phase change sets
- N phase change values or phase change sets
- the base station may be able to select one of the transmission methods from these modes.
- the spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme is a method of transmitting signals s1 and s2 mapped by a selected modulation scheme from different antennas as shown in Non-Patent Document 3, and the precoding matrix is fixed.
- the MIMO transmission scheme is a scheme that performs only precoding (no phase change).
- the space-time block coding method is a transmission method shown in Non-Patent Documents 9, 16, and 17.
- the transmission of only one stream is a method of performing a predetermined process on the signal s1 mapped by the selected modulation method and transmitting the signal from the antenna.
- a multi-carrier transmission scheme such as OFDM is used, a first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers, a second carrier group different from the first carrier group composed of a plurality of carriers,...
- multi-carrier transmission is realized with a plurality of carrier groups, and for each carrier group, a spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission scheme, a MIMO transmission scheme with a fixed precoding matrix, a space-time block coding scheme, and transmission of only one stream,
- the method may be set to any one of the methods for changing the phase regularly.
- the (sub) carrier group for which the method for changing the phase regularly is selected may be implemented.
- the transmitter described in this embodiment which performs precoding, baseband signal replacement, and phase change, and the contents described in this specification can be used in combination, and in particular in this embodiment. It is possible to combine and use the contents related to all the phase changes described in this specification for the phase change unit described.
- Embodiment D2 In the present embodiment, in the case of the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4, when the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4 is compatible with a multicarrier scheme such as the OFDM scheme, the transmission apparatus of FIGS. A description will be given of an initialization method for phase change in a case where the phase change is regularly performed as described in this specification when one encoder and a distribution unit are applied.
- Non-Patent Document 12 to Non-Patent Document 15 QC (Quasi Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density Prity-Check) code (not QC-LDPC code, LDPC code may be used), LDPC code And a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) concatenated code, a turbo code using tail biting, or a block code such as Duo-Binary Turbo Code is considered.
- QC-LDPC code Low-Density Prity-Check
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (cyclic redundancy check), transmission parameter, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- FIG. 34 shows, for example, a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted to the above-described transmission apparatus, and the transmission apparatus has one encoder.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.)
- the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the above-described transmitting apparatus transmits two streams simultaneously, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2, so s1 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in step S1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in step s2.
- FIG. 71A shows a frame configuration on the time and frequency axes of the modulated signal z1 ′ or z1 (transmitted by the antenna 312A).
- FIG. 71 (b) shows a frame configuration on the time and frequency axes of the modulated signal z2 (transmitted by the antenna 312B).
- the frequency (band) used by the modulation signal z1 ′ or z1 and the frequency (band) used by the modulation signal z2 are the same, and the modulation signal z1 ′ or z1 and the modulation signal at the same time. z2 exists.
- the transmitting apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in the section A, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to the communication partner. It is assumed that modulation scheme information for transmitting two encoded blocks is included.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the first encoded block in the section B.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the second encoded block in section C.
- the transmission apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section D, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to a communication partner.
- a preamble control symbol
- the transmission apparatus transmits the third encoded block in the section E.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the fourth encoded block in section F.
- the transmitting apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section A, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to the communication partner. It is assumed that modulation scheme information for transmitting two encoded blocks is included.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the first encoded block in the section B.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the second encoded block in section C.
- the transmission apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section D, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to a communication partner.
- a preamble control symbol
- the transmission apparatus transmits the third encoded block in the section E.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the fourth encoded block in section F.
- FIG. 72 shows the number of slots used when 16QAM is used as the modulation scheme in the case of transmitting a coding block as shown in FIG. 34, particularly in the first coding block. 750 slots are required to transmit. Similarly, in the second encoded block, the number of slots used when QPSK is used as the modulation scheme is shown, and 1500 slots are required to transmit the second encoded block.
- FIG. 73 shows the number of slots used when transmitting a coded block as shown in FIG. 34, particularly in the third coded block, when QPSK is used as the modulation scheme. 1,500 slots are required to transmit. Then, as described in this specification, the modulation signal z1, that is, the modulation signal transmitted by the antenna 312A, is not subjected to phase change, and the modulation signal z2, that is, the modulation signal transmitted by the antenna 312B is not changed. Let us consider the case where the phase is changed. At this time, FIGS. 72 and 73 show a method of changing the phase.
- phase change values are prepared, and the seven phase change values are named # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, and # 6.
- the phase change is used regularly and periodically. That is, the phase change values are # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, #
- the change is made regularly and periodically, such as 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6,.
- phase change value used to transmit the first slot of each coding block is fixed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 72, the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the second encoded block is the same as the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the first encoded block. Similarly, it is # 0.
- the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the third coded block is not set to # 3, but the first of the first and second coded blocks. Similar to the phase change value used for transmitting the slot, it is assumed to be # 0.
- the method of initializing the phase change value for each coding block that is, the method of fixing the phase change value used for the first slot of any coding block as # 0 has been described.
- it can be performed in units of frames.
- the phase change value used in the first slot may be fixed to # 0.
- the precoding matrix used by the weighting synthesis unit for precoding is expressed as a complex number, but the precoding matrix can also be expressed as a real number.
- two mapped baseband signals are s1 (i) and s2 (i) (where i is time or frequency), and two precodings obtained for precoding are used.
- the baseband signals after coding are z1 (i) and z2 (i).
- the baseband signal after mapping (of the modulation scheme used) is the in-phase component of s1 (i) as I s1 (i), the quadrature component as Q s1 (i), and the base after mapping (of the modulation scheme used)
- the in-phase component of the band signal s2 (i) is I s2 (i)
- the quadrature component is Q s2 (i)
- the baseband signal after precoding is the in-phase component of z1 (i), I z1 (i)
- I z2 (i) an in-phase component of a baseband signal after precoding z2 (i)
- the quadrature component configured in real H r
- the following relational expression is established.
- the precoding matrix H r which is composed of a real number is represented as shown below.
- a 11, a 12, a 13, a 14, a 21, a 22, a 23, a 24, a 31, a 32, a 33, a 34, a 41, a 42, a 43, a 44 Is a real number.
- Non-Patent Document 12 to Non-Patent Document 15 QC (Quasi-Cyclic) LDPC (Low-Density-Parity-Check) code (not QC-LDPC code, LDPC code may be used), LDPC code And a BCH code (Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code) concatenated code, a turbo code using tail biting, or a block code such as Duo-Binary Turbo Code is considered.
- QC-Cyclic Low-Density-Parity-Check
- BCH code Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code
- turbo code using tail biting or a block code such as Duo-Binary Turbo Code
- the number of bits constituting the block after coding is the number of bits constituting the block code (however, Control information etc. as described may be included.)
- control information or the like for example, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check), transmission parameter, etc.
- the number of bits constituting the block after encoding is the block code. It may be the sum of the number of bits and the number of bits such as control information.
- FIG. 34 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block when a block code is used.
- FIG. 34 shows, for example, a case where two streams s1 and s2 are transmitted to the above-described transmission apparatus, and the transmission apparatus has one encoder.
- FIG. 7 is a diagram showing changes in the number of symbols and the number of slots necessary for one encoded block. (At this time, as a transmission method, either single carrier transmission or multicarrier transmission such as OFDM may be used.)
- the number of bits constituting one encoded block in the block code is 6000 bits. In order to transmit 6000 bits, 3000 symbols are required when the modulation method is QPSK, 1500 symbols when 16 QAM, and 1000 symbols when 64 QAM.
- the above-described transmitting apparatus transmits two streams simultaneously, when the modulation scheme is QPSK, the above-described 3000 symbols are allocated 1500 symbols to s1 and 1500 symbols to s2, so s1 1500 slots (herein referred to as “slots”) are required to transmit 1500 symbols transmitted in step S1 and 1500 symbols transmitted in step s2.
- FIG. 71A shows a frame configuration on the time and frequency axes of the modulated signal z1 ′ or z1 (transmitted by the antenna 312A).
- FIG. 71 (b) shows a frame configuration on the time and frequency axes of the modulated signal z2 (transmitted by the antenna 312B).
- the frequency (band) used by the modulation signal z1 ′ or z1 and the frequency (band) used by the modulation signal z2 are the same, and the modulation signal z1 ′ or z1 and the modulation signal at the same time. z2 exists.
- the transmitting apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in the section A, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to the communication partner. It is assumed that modulation scheme information for transmitting two encoded blocks is included.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the first encoded block in the section B.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the second encoded block in section C.
- the transmission apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section D, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to a communication partner.
- a preamble control symbol
- the transmission apparatus transmits the third encoded block in the section E.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the fourth encoded block in section F.
- the transmitting apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section A, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to the communication partner. It is assumed that modulation scheme information for transmitting two encoded blocks is included.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the first encoded block in the section B.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the second encoded block in section C.
- the transmission apparatus transmits a preamble (control symbol) in section D, and is a symbol for transmitting control information to a communication partner.
- a preamble control symbol
- the transmission apparatus transmits the third encoded block in the section E.
- the transmission apparatus transmits the fourth encoded block in section F.
- FIG. 72 shows the number of slots used when 16QAM is used as the modulation scheme in the case of transmitting a coding block as shown in FIG. 34, particularly in the first coding block. 750 slots are required to transmit. Similarly, in the second encoded block, the number of slots used when QPSK is used as the modulation scheme is shown, and 1500 slots are required to transmit the second encoded block.
- FIG. 73 shows the number of slots used when transmitting a coded block as shown in FIG. 34, particularly in the third coded block, when QPSK is used as the modulation scheme. 1,500 slots are required to transmit. Then, as described in this specification, the modulation signal z1, that is, the modulation signal transmitted by the antenna 312A, is not subjected to phase change, and the modulation signal z2, that is, the modulation signal transmitted by the antenna 312B is not changed. Let us consider the case where the phase is changed. At this time, FIGS. 72 and 73 show a method of changing the phase.
- phase change values are prepared, and the seven phase change values are named # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, and # 6.
- the phase change is used regularly and periodically. That is, the phase change values are # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, #
- the change is made regularly and periodically, such as 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6,.
- the above-mentioned terminal monitors how the first encoded block is transmitted, that is, monitors the pattern of the phase change value in the transmission of the last slot of the first encoded block, Estimating a phase change value to use for the first slot of the second encoded block;
- the transmission apparatus transmits information on the phase change value used in the first slot of the second encoded block. The method can be considered. In the case of (a), since the terminal needs to monitor the transmission of the first encoded block, the power consumption increases, and in the case of (b), the data transmission efficiency decreases.
- phase change value used to transmit the first slot of each coding block is fixed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 72, the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the second encoded block is the same as the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the first encoded block. Similarly, it is # 0.
- the phase change value used to transmit the first slot of the third coded block is not set to # 3, but the first of the first and second coded blocks. Similar to the phase change value used for transmitting the slot, it is assumed to be # 0.
- the method of initializing the phase change value for each coding block that is, the method of fixing the phase change value used for the first slot of any coding block as # 0 has been described.
- it can be performed in units of frames.
- the phase change value used in the first slot may be fixed to # 0.
- the first encoded block becomes the first encoded block
- the first encoded block becomes the third encoded block.
- the block is an encoding block and is described above with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73
- the above-described example is “the phase change value used in the first slot is fixed (with # 0) in units of frames”. ing.
- FIG. 74 shows an outline of a frame configuration of a signal transmitted by a broadcasting station in the DVB-T2 standard.
- the OFDM method since the OFDM method is used, a frame is formed on the time-frequency axis.
- FIG. 74 shows a frame structure on the time-frequency axis.
- the frame includes P1 Signaling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1 Post-Signalling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 7405_N) (PLP: Physical Layer Pipe).
- L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402) and L1 Post-Signalling data (7403) are referred to as P2 symbols.
- PLP # 1 to #N 7405_1 to 7405_N
- P1 Signaling data (7401) is a symbol for the receiver to perform signal detection and frequency synchronization (including frequency offset estimation), and at the same time, FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) size information in the frame, SISO (Single-Input) Information on whether to transmit the modulation signal is transmitted in either a single-output (MISO) / multi-input single-output (MISO) system.
- FFT Fast Fourier Transform
- SISO Single-Input
- L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402) is used to transmit guard interval information used in a transmission frame, information on a signal processing method performed to reduce PAPR (Peak to Average Power Ratio), and L1 Post-Signalling data.
- Modulation method error correction method (FEC: Forward Error Correction), coding rate information of error correction method, L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information, pilot pattern information, cell (frequency domain) unique number Information, information indicating which mode of normal mode and extended mode (the number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between normal mode and extended mode) is used, and the like are transmitted.
- FEC Forward Error Correction
- coding rate information of error correction method L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information, pilot pattern information, cell (frequency domain) unique number Information, information indicating which mode of normal mode and extended mode (the number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between normal mode and extended mode) is used, and the like are transmitted.
- FEC Forward Error Correction
- L1 Post-Signalling data size and information size information pilot pattern information
- cell (frequency domain) unique number Information information indicating which mode of normal mode and extended mode (the number of subcarriers used for data transmission differs between normal mode and extended mode) is used
- L1 Post-Signalling data (7403)
- the coding rate information, the number of blocks transmitted by each PLP, and the like are transmitted.
- Common PLP (7404) and PLP # 1 to #N are areas for transmitting data.
- P1 Signaling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1 Post-Signalling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), and PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 6105_N) are Although it is described as being transmitted in time division, in reality, there are two or more types of signals at the same time. An example is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 75, L1 Pre-Signalling data, L1 Post-Signalling data, and Common PLP may exist at the same time, or PLP # 1 and PLP # 2 may exist at the same time. . That is, each signal uses a time division and a frequency division together to form a frame.
- FIG. 76 shows a transmission apparatus in which a transmission method for changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is applied to a transmission apparatus of the DVB-T2 standard (for example, a broadcasting station).
- a PLP signal generation unit 7602 receives PLP transmission data 7601 (data for a plurality of PLPs) and a control signal 7609 and receives information on error correction coding of each PLP included in the control signal 7609, information on modulation schemes, and the like. Based on the information, error correction coding and mapping based on the modulation method are performed, and a PLP (orthogonal) baseband signal 7603 is output.
- P2 symbol signal generation section 7605 receives P2 symbol transmission data 7604 and control signal 7609 as input, and performs error correction coding based on information such as P2 symbol error correction information and modulation scheme information contained in control signal 7609. Then, mapping based on the modulation method is performed, and a (quadrature) baseband signal 7606 of P2 symbols is output.
- the control signal generation unit 7608 receives the transmission data 7607 for P1 symbol and the transmission data 7604 for P2 symbol as input, and each symbol group in FIG. 74 (P1 Signaling data (7401), L1 Pre-Signalling data (7402), L1 Post).
- -Signaling data (7403), Common PLP (7404), PLP # 1 to #N (7405_1 to 7405_N)) transmission method (error correction code, coding rate of error correction code, modulation method, block length, frame configuration, Information on the selected transmission method including a transmission method that regularly switches the precoding matrix, pilot symbol insertion method, information on PAPR reduction method such as IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) / FFT information, information on guard interval insertion method) Is output as a control signal 7609.
- IFFT Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
- FFT Fast Fourier Transform
- guard interval insertion method information on guard interval insertion method
- a frame configuration unit 7610 receives a PLP baseband signal 7603, a P2 symbol baseband signal 7606, and a control signal 7609, and performs rearrangement in frequency and time axis based on the frame configuration information included in the control signal.
- the stream 1 (orthogonal) baseband signal 7611_1 the signal after mapping, that is, the baseband signal based on the modulation scheme used
- the stream 2 (orthogonal) baseband signal 7611_2 the signal after mapping
- the signal processing unit 7612 receives the baseband signal 7611_1 of the stream 1, the baseband signal 7611_2 of the stream 2, and the control signal 7609, and the modulated signal 1 after signal processing based on the transmission method included in the control signal 7609 (7613_1) And modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing is output.
- a characteristic point here is that when a transmission method for changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is selected as a transmission method, the signal processing unit Similar to FIGS. 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, and 69, the signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is subjected to phase change processing, and this signal processing is performed.
- the performed signals are modulated signal 1 (7613_1) after signal processing and modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing.
- Pilot insertion section 7614_1 receives modulated signal 1 after signal processing (7613_1) and control signal 7609 as input, and modulates signal 1 after signal processing (7613_1) based on information regarding the pilot symbol insertion method included in control signal 7609. A pilot symbol is inserted into, and a modulated signal 7615_1 after the pilot symbol is inserted is output. Pilot insertion section 7614_2 receives modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing and control signal 7609 as input, and receives modulated signal 2 (7613_2) after signal processing based on information on the pilot symbol insertion method included in control signal 7609. A pilot symbol is inserted into, and a modulated signal 7615_2 after the pilot symbol is inserted is output.
- IFFT (Inverse Fast Fourier Transform) section 7616_1 receives modulated signal 7615_1 after pilot symbol insertion and control signal 7609 as input, performs IFFT based on IFFT method information included in control signal 7609, and outputs signal 7617_1 after IFFT. Is output.
- IFFT section 7616_2 receives modulated signal 7615_2 after pilot symbol insertion and control signal 7609 as input, performs IFFT based on IFFT method information included in control signal 7609, and outputs post-IFFT signal 7617_2.
- the PAPR reduction unit 7618_1 receives the signal 7617_1 after IFFT and the control signal 7609 as input, performs a process for PAPR reduction on the signal 7617_1 after IFFT based on information on PAPR reduction included in the control signal 7609, and after PAPR reduction
- the signal 7619_1 is output.
- PAPR reduction section 7618_2 receives signal 7617_2 after IFFT and control signal 7609 as input, performs processing for PAPR reduction on signal 7617_2 after IFFT based on information related to PAPR reduction included in control signal 7609, and after PAPR reduction
- the signal 7619_2 is output.
- the guard interval insertion unit 7620_1 receives the signal 7619_1 after PAPR reduction and the control signal 7609 as inputs, and inserts a guard interval into the signal 7619_1 after PAPR reduction based on the information on the guard interval insertion method included in the control signal 7609.
- a signal 7621_1 after insertion of the guard interval is output.
- the guard interval insertion unit 7620_2 receives the signal 7619_2 after PAPR reduction and the control signal 7609 as input, and inserts a guard interval into the signal 7619_2 after PAPR reduction based on the information on the guard interval insertion method included in the control signal 7609.
- the signal 7621_2 after insertion of the guard interval is output.
- the P1 symbol insertion unit 7622 receives the signal 7621_1 after the guard interval insertion, the signal 7621_2 after the guard interval insertion, and the transmission data 7607 for the P1 symbol, and generates a P1 symbol signal from the transmission data 7607 for the P1 symbol, A P1 symbol is added to the signal 7621_1 after the insertion of the guard interval, a P1 symbol is added to the signal 7623_1 after the addition of the P1 symbol, and a signal 7621_2 after the insertion of the guard interval, and a P1 symbol is added.
- the later signal 7623_2 is output.
- the signal of the P1 symbol may be added to both the signal 7623_1 after the addition of the P1 symbol and the signal 7623_2 after the addition of the P1 symbol, or may be added to either of them.
- a zero signal is present as the baseband signal in the signal that is not added in the section where the added signal is added.
- the radio processing unit 7624_1 receives the signal 7623_1 after the addition of the P1 symbol and the control signal 7609 as input, performs processing such as frequency conversion and amplification, and outputs a transmission signal 7625_1. Then, the transmission signal 7625_1 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 7626_1. Radio processing section 7624_2 receives P7 symbol-processed signal 7623_2 and control signal 7609 as input, performs frequency conversion, amplification, and the like, and outputs transmission signal 7625_2. Then, the transmission signal 7625_2 is output as a radio wave from the antenna 7626_2.
- each PLP transmission method for example, a transmission method for transmitting one modulation signal, after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is performed using P1 symbols, P2 symbols, and control symbol groups.
- a modulation method used are transmitted to the terminal.
- the terminal cuts out only PLP necessary as information, and performs demodulation (including signal separation and signal detection) and error correction decoding, the terminal consumes less power. Therefore, as in the case described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, as a transmission method, a transmission method for regularly changing the phase of a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement) is used.
- a method is proposed in which the phase change value (# 0) used in the first slot of the PLP transmitted is fixed.
- the PLP transmission method is not limited to the above, and a space-time code as shown in Non-Patent Document 9, Non-Patent Document 16, and Non-Patent Document 17 and other transmission methods may be designated. Is possible.
- FIG. 77 shows a frame configuration on the frequency-time axis when transmitting using phase change.
- phase change values are prepared in a transmission method in which phase change is regularly performed on a signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement).
- the seven phase change values are named # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, and # 6.
- the phase change value is used regularly and periodically. That is, the phase change values are # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, # 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6, #
- the change is made regularly and periodically, such as 0, # 1, # 2, # 3, # 4, # 5, # 6,.
- PLP $ 1 has a slot (symbol) at time T, carrier 3 (7701 in FIG. 77) as the head of the slot, and time T + 4, carrier 4 as the end of the slot (7702 in FIG. 77).
- carrier 3 is the first slot
- second slot is time T
- carrier 4 is time T
- carrier 5 The seventh slot is time T + 1, carrier 1
- the eighth slot is time T + 1, carrier 2
- the ninth slot is time T + 1, carrier 3, and so on.
- the 14th slot is time T + 1, carrier 8, the 15th slot is time T + 2, carrier 1, and so on.
- PLP $ K has a slot (symbol) with time S, carrier 4 (7703 in FIG. 77) as the head of the slot, and time S + 8, carrier 4 as the end of the slot (7704 in FIG. 77). (See FIG. 77). That is, for PLP $ K, time S, carrier 4 is the first slot, second slot is time S, carrier 5, and third slot is time S, carrier 6, The fifth slot is time S, carrier 8, the ninth slot is time S + 1, carrier 1, the tenth slot is time S + 1, carrier 2, and so on. The 16th slot is time S + 1, carrier 8, the 17th slot is time S + 2, carrier 1, and so on.
- information on the slots used by each PLP including information on the first slot (symbol) and information on the last slot (symbol) of each PLP is determined by control symbols such as P1 symbols, P2 symbols, and control symbol groups. Will be transmitted.
- the phase change value # 0 is used for the slot of time T, carrier 3 (7701 in FIG. 77), which is the first slot of PLP $ 1.
- the last slot of PLP $ K-1 which uses time S, carrier 3 (7705 in FIG. 77) in the slot, regardless of the phase change value number, is the first slot in PLP $ K.
- a certain slot of time S and carrier 4 (7703 in FIG.
- precoding matrix # 0 is used for the first slot of another PLP transmitted using a transmission method that regularly changes the phase of the signal after pre-coding (or after pre-coding and baseband signal replacement). And precoding is used.
- the receiving apparatus extracts the required PLP from the information of the slot used by each PLP included in the control symbols such as the P1 symbol, the P2 symbol, and the control symbol group, and demodulates (signal separation, signal detection). Error correction decoding is performed.
- the receiving apparatus knows in advance the phase change rule of the transmission method in which the phase is regularly changed in the signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement), and In some cases, the transmitting device transmits information on the rules to be used, and the receiving device obtains the information and knows the rules being used.) Based on the number of the first slot in each PLP, By matching the timing of the phase change switching rule, it is possible to demodulate information symbols (including signal separation and signal detection).
- a broadcast station base station transmits a modulated signal with a frame configuration as shown in FIG. 78 that operate in the same manner as in FIG. 74 are given the same reference numerals.
- a characteristic point is that a subframe for transmitting one modulation signal and a subframe for transmitting a plurality of modulation signals in the main frame so that the gain control of the reception signal can be easily adjusted in the receiver (terminal). It is a point that is separated.
- “transmit one modulated signal” means that a plurality of modulated signals that are the same as when one modulated signal is transmitted from one antenna are generated and the plurality of signals are transmitted from a plurality of different antennas. Shall be included.
- PLP # 1 (7405_1) to PLP # N (7405_N) constitute a subframe 7800 for transmitting one modulated signal
- the subframe 7800 is composed of only PLP and includes a plurality of subframes 7800.
- PLP $ 1 (7802_1) to PLP $ M (7802_M) constitute a subframe 7801 for transmitting a plurality of modulation signals.
- the subframe 7801 is composed of only PLP and one modulation. There is no PLP that transmits a signal.
- PLP PLP $ 1 (7802_1) to PLP $ M (7802_M)
- PLP $ 1 (7802_1) to PLP $ M (7802_M) at the head slot is precoded using the precoding matrix # 0 (referred to as precoding matrix initialization).
- precoding matrix initialization referred to as precoding matrix initialization
- another transmission method for example, a transmission method using a precoding method without phase change, a transmission method using a space-time block code, and spatial multiplexing MIMO transmission
- the PLP using any of the methods is not related to the initialization of the precoding matrix described above.
- PLP $ 1 is the first PLP of a subframe that transmits a plurality of modulated signals of the Xth main frame
- PLP $ 1 ′ is the Yth (however, different from X). It is assumed that this is the first PLP of a subframe that transmits a plurality of modulated signals of the main frame. It is assumed that both PLP $ 1 and PLP $ 1 'use a transmission method that regularly changes the phase of the signal after precoding (or after precoding and baseband signal replacement).
- the same components as those in FIG. 77 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
- the first slot of PLP $ 1 which is the first PLP of the subframe for transmitting a plurality of modulation signals of the Xth main frame (7701 (time T, slot of carrier 3) in FIG. 79), changes the phase. It is assumed that the phase change is performed using the value # 0.
- the first slot of PLP $ 1 ′ which is the first PLP of a subframe for transmitting a plurality of modulated signals of the Y-th mainframe (7901 (time T ′, slot of carrier 7) in FIG. 79), It is assumed that the phase change is performed using the phase change value # 0.
- the phase change is performed using the phase change value # 0 in the first slot of the first PLP of the subframe in which a plurality of modulated signals are transmitted. This is also important in order to suppress the problems (a) and (b) described in the embodiment D2.
- phase change value # 0 is used to change the phase of the first slot of PLP $ 1 (7701 (time T, slot of carrier 3) in FIG. 79)
- the phase change value is updated on the frequency axis.
- the slot of carrier 4 is changed in phase using phase change value # 1
- the slot of time T and carrier 5 is changed in phase using phase change value # 2
- time T carrier 6 is changed.
- the phase change is performed using the phase change value # 3, and so on.
- the first slot of PLP $ 1 ′ (7901 (time T ′, slot of carrier 7) in FIG. 79) is phase-shifted using phase change value # 0.
- the slot of carrier 8 performs phase change using phase change value # 1
- the slot of carrier T1 + 1 and carrier 1 performs phase change using phase change value # 2.
- the slot of carrier 1 performs phase change using phase change value # 3
- the slot of carrier 1 performs phase change using phase change value # 4,... , And.
- the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4 when the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4 is compatible with a multicarrier system such as the OFDM system, the transmission apparatus of FIG.
- the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4 when the transmission apparatus of FIG. 4 is compatible with a multicarrier system such as the OFDM system, the transmission apparatus of FIG.
- the case where one encoder and a distribution unit are applied has been described as an example.
- the transmission device in FIG. 3 the transmission device in FIG. 12, the transmission device in FIG. 67, and the transmission device in FIG. Even when the two streams of s2 are transmitted and the transmission apparatus has two encoders, the phase change value initialization described in the present embodiment can be applied.
- the average transmission power of modulation signal # 1 and the average transmission power of modulation signal # 2 may be set in any manner.
- the average transmission power of the modulation signal # 1 and the modulation signal are applied by applying a transmission power control technique used in a general wireless communication system.
- the average transmission power of # 2 can be set differently.
- signal power control may be performed in the state of the baseband signal (for example, transmission power control is performed at the time of mapping of the modulation scheme to be used), or a power amplifier (in front of the antenna) ( Transmission power control may be performed by a power amplifier.
- Embodiment F1 Method for regularly changing phase with respect to modulated signals after precoding described in Embodiment 1-4, Embodiment A1, Embodiment C1-C7, Embodiment D1-D3 and Embodiment E1 Is applicable to any baseband signals s1 and s2 mapped in the IQ plane.
- Embodiment 1-4 Embodiment A1, Embodiment C1-C7, Embodiment D1-D3, and Embodiment E1
- the baseband signals s1 and s2 are not described in detail.
- the method of regularly changing the phase of the pre-coded modulation signal is applied to the baseband signals s1 and s2 generated from the error correction encoded data, s1 and s2
- s1 and s2 There is a possibility that better reception quality can be obtained by controlling the average power (average value).
- the modulation scheme applied to the baseband signal s1 is QPSK and the modulation scheme applied to the baseband signal s2 is 16QAM. Since the modulation scheme of s1 is QPSK, s1 transmits 2 bits of data per symbol. The two bits to be transmitted are named b0 and b1. In contrast, since the modulation scheme of s2 is 16QAM, s2 transmits 4 bits of data per symbol. The 4 bits to be transmitted are named b2, b3, b4, and b5. Since the transmission apparatus transmits one slot composed of one symbol of s1 and one symbol of s2, 6-bit data of b0, b1, b2, b3, b4, and b5 is transmitted per slot. .
- FIG. 80 which is an example of 16QAM signal point arrangement on the IQ plane
- (b2, b3, b4, b5) (0, 0, 1, 1)
- (I, Q) (1 ⁇ g, 1 ⁇ g)
- FIG. 81 which is an example of the QPSK signal point arrangement on the IQ plane
- b0 and b1 shown on the right shoulder in FIG. 81 indicate the arrangement of the numerical values shown on the IQ plane, respectively.
- FIG. 82 shows the relationship of the log likelihood ratio obtained by the receiving apparatus in this case.
- FIG. 82 is a diagram schematically showing the absolute values of the log likelihood ratios from b0 to b5 when the receiving apparatus obtains the log likelihood ratio.
- 8200 is the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b0
- 8201 is the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b1
- 8202 is the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b2
- 8203 is the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b3.
- 8204 is the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b4
- 8205 is the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b5.
- the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b0 and b1 transmitted by QPSK and the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b2 to b5 transmitted by 16QAM are compared,
- the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b0 and b1 is larger than the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b2 to b5. That is, the reliability in the receiving devices b0 and b1 is higher than the reliability in the receiving devices b2 to b5. This is because the minimum Euclidean distance of the signal point on the IQ plane of QPSK is
- the receiver performs error correction decoding in this situation (for example, when the communication system uses an LDPC code, reliability propagation decoding such as sum-product decoding), the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b0 and b1 Due to the difference in reliability that the value is larger than the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio from b2 to b5, the reception quality of the data of the receiving apparatus deteriorates due to the influence of the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio from b2 to b5. The problem occurs.
- the difference between the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b0 and b1 and the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio of b2 to b5 is compared with FIG. Should be made smaller. Therefore, it is considered that “the average power (average value) of s1 is different from the average power (average value) of s2”.
- signal processing related to a power changing unit here, called a power changing unit, but may be called an amplitude changing unit or a weighting unit
- a weighting synthesis (precoding) unit The example of the structure of a part is shown.
- FIG. 84 components that operate in the same manner as in FIGS. 3 and 6 are given the same reference numerals.
- FIG. 85 the same reference numerals are assigned to the components that operate in the same manner as in FIGS.
- s1 (t) is a baseband signal (signal after mapping) of the modulation scheme QPSK
- the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 81
- h is as shown in equation (78)
- s2 (t) is a modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping)
- the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 80
- g is as shown in Equation (79).
- t is time, and in this embodiment, the time axis direction will be described as an example.
- the power changing unit (8401B) receives the modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B and the control signal (8400) as input, and sets a value for changing the set power based on the control signal (8400) u. Then, a signal (8402B) obtained by multiplying the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of the modulation scheme 16QAM by u is output.
- u is a real number and u> 1.0.
- F is a precoding matrix in a method of regularly changing the phase of a modulated signal after precoding
- y (t) (y (t) is an absolute value for a phase change value for regularly changing the phase.
- the imaginary number is 1 (including a real number)
- ej ⁇ (t) the following equation is established.
- the ratio between the average power of QPSK and the average power of 16QAM is set to 1: u 2 .
- the reception state in which the absolute value of the log likelihood ratio shown in FIG. For example, for the ratio 1: u 2 of the average power of QPSK and the average power of 16QAM, u is
- the minimum Euclidean distance of signal points on the IQ plane of QPSK can be made equal to the minimum Euclidean distance of signal points on the IQ plane of 16QAM, and good reception quality can be obtained.
- the condition that the minimum Euclidean distances of signal points on the IQ planes of two different modulation schemes are equal is merely an example of a method of setting the ratio between the average power of QPSK and the average power of 16QAM.
- the value u for changing the power may be changed between the signal points on the IQ plane of two different modulation schemes.
- better reception quality can be obtained by setting a value (a larger value or a smaller value) different from the value at which the minimum Euclidean distance becomes equal.
- transmission power control transmission power is generally controlled based on feedback information from a communication partner.
- the feature of the present invention is that transmission power is controlled regardless of feedback information from a communication partner, and this point will be described in detail.
- the value u for changing the power is set by the control signal (8400)” has been described.
- the control signal (8400) for further improving the reception quality of data in the receiving apparatus.
- the method of setting the value u for changing the power by means of will be described in detail.
- Example 1-1 Data used for generation of s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports an error correction code having a plurality of block lengths (the number of bits constituting one block after encoding, which is also referred to as a code length)
- a method of setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the block length of the error correction code applied to 1 will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction encoding of a block length selected from a plurality of supported block lengths is distributed into two systems.
- the encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the block length of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the feature of the present invention is that the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u for changing the power according to the selected block length indicated by the control signal (8400).
- a value for changing the power according to the block length X is described in the form of u LX .
- the power changing section (8401B) sets the value u L1000 for power changes
- the power changing section (8401B) is a power change
- the power change unit (8401B) sets the value u L3000 for the power change.
- u L1000 u L1500 .
- the settable power change value is 2
- the transmitter can select one of the power change values from among a plurality of settable power change values and perform the power change. Is an important point.
- Example 1-2 When the transmission apparatus supports error correction codes of a plurality of coding rates, the average power of s1 and s2 according to the coding rate of the error correction code applied to the data used to generate s1 and s2 A method of setting (average value) will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail-biting turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- a plurality of encodings are available. Rate is supported.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction coding at a coding rate selected from a plurality of supported coding rates is distributed to two systems. The encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the coding rate of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the selected coding rate indicated by the control signal (8400).
- a value for changing the power according to the coding rate rx is described in the form of urX .
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the coding rates may be 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a value for power change that can be set when two or more coding rates can be set in the transmission apparatus.
- the transmission apparatus selects one of the power change values from among a plurality of settable power change values, and performs the power change. It is important to be able to. (Example 1-3) In order for the receiving apparatus to obtain better data reception quality, it is important to implement the following.
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 according to the modulation scheme used for generating s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports a plurality of modulation schemes will be described.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to QPSK, and the modulation scheme of s2 is changed from 16QAM to 64QAM by a control signal (or either 16QAM or 64QAM can be set).
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 86. In FIG. 86, k is
- mapping of 64QAM determines the values of I and Q from the 6-bit input, and this point can be implemented in the same manner as the description of the mapping of QPSK and 16QAM.
- FIG. 86 which is an example of 64QAM signal point arrangement on the IQ plane
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to QPSK
- the modulation scheme of s2 is fixed to QPSK
- the power is not changed for a fixed modulation scheme (here, QPSK)
- the power is changed for a plurality of configurable modulation schemes (here, 16QAM and 64QAM).
- the transmission apparatus is not configured as shown in FIG. 84, but has a configuration in which the power changing unit 8401B is excluded from the configuration shown in FIG. 84 and a power changing unit is provided on the s1 (t) side.
- the fixed modulation method here, QPSK
- the following relational expression (86) is established.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed, and the modulation scheme C has c signal points on the IQ plane. Further, as the modulation scheme of s2, any number of signal points in I-Q plane the number of signal points in a number of modulation scheme A and the I-Q plane b-number of the modulation scheme B of (a>b> c) It is assumed that these settings are possible.
- the reception apparatus can obtain high data reception quality.
- the power is not changed for a fixed modulation method (here, modulation method C), but the power is changed for a plurality of settable modulation methods (here, modulation method A and modulation method B).
- modulation method C a fixed modulation method
- modulation method A and modulation method B a plurality of settable modulation methods
- s2 modulation scheme is fixed to modulation scheme C and s1 modulation scheme is changed from modulation scheme A to modulation scheme B (set to either modulation scheme A or modulation scheme B)”, u b ⁇ It may be u a .
- a set of (s1 modulation method, s2 modulation method) is set to (modulation method C, modulation method A) or (modulation method A, modulation method C) or (modulation method C, modulation method B) or (modulation method).
- Example 2 An example of an operation different from Example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that s1 (t) is a modulation system 64QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping), the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 86, and k is as shown in equation (85). Further, s2 (t) is a modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping), the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 80, and g is as shown in Equation (79). Note that t is time, and in this embodiment, the time axis direction will be described as an example.
- the power changing unit (8401B) receives the modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B and the control signal (8400) as input, and sets a value for changing the set power based on the control signal (8400) u. Then, a signal (8402B) obtained by multiplying the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of the modulation scheme 16QAM by u is output. Note that u is a real number and u ⁇ 1.0.
- F is a precoding matrix in a method of regularly changing the phase of a modulated signal after precoding
- y (t) is a phase change value for regularly changing the phase (y (t) is an absolute value)
- the imaginary number is 1 (including a real number), that is, it can be expressed as ej ⁇ (t)
- Expression (82) is established.
- the ratio of the average power of 64QAM and the average power of 16QAM is set to 1: u 2 .
- the reception state as shown in FIG. 83 is obtained, so that the reception quality of data in the reception device can be improved.
- transmission power control transmission power is generally controlled based on feedback information from a communication partner.
- the feature of the present invention is that transmission power is controlled regardless of feedback information from a communication partner, and this point will be described in detail.
- the value u for changing the power is set by the control signal (8400)” has been described.
- the control signal (8400) for further improving the reception quality of data in the receiving apparatus.
- the method of setting the value u for changing the power by means of will be described in detail.
- Example 2-1 Data used for generation of s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports an error correction code having a plurality of block lengths (the number of bits constituting one block after encoding, which is also referred to as a code length)
- a method of setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the block length of the error correction code applied to 1 will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction encoding of a block length selected from a plurality of supported block lengths is distributed into two systems.
- the encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the block length of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the feature of the present invention is that the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u for changing the power according to the selected block length indicated by the control signal (8400).
- a value for changing the power according to the block length X is described in the form of u LX .
- the power changing section (8401B) sets the value u L1000 for power changes
- the power changing section (8401B) is a power change
- the power change unit (8401B) sets the value u L3000 for the power change.
- u L1000 u L1500 .
- the settable power change value is 2
- the transmitter can select one of the power change values from among a plurality of settable power change values and perform the power change. Is an important point.
- Example 2-2 When the transmission apparatus supports error correction codes of a plurality of coding rates, the average power of s1 and s2 according to the coding rate of the error correction code applied to the data used to generate s1 and s2 A method of setting (average value) will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail-biting turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- a plurality of encodings are available. Rate is supported.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction coding at a coding rate selected from a plurality of supported coding rates is distributed to two systems. The encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the coding rate of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the selected coding rate indicated by the control signal (8400).
- a value for changing the power according to the coding rate rx is described in the form of u rx .
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the coding rates may be 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a value for power change that can be set when two or more coding rates can be set in the transmission apparatus.
- the transmission apparatus selects one of the power change values from among a plurality of settable power change values, and performs the power change. It is important to be able to. (Example 2-3) In order for the receiving apparatus to obtain better data reception quality, it is important to implement the following.
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 according to the modulation scheme used for generating s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports a plurality of modulation schemes will be described.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to 64QAM, and the modulation scheme of s2 is changed from 16QAM to QPSK by a control signal (or either 16QAM or QPSK can be set).
- the mapping method of s1 (t) is as shown in FIG. 86.
- k is the equation (85).
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 80.
- g is Equation (79)
- the modulation scheme of s2 (t) is QPSK.
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 81.
- h is assumed to be Expression (78).
- the average power (average value) is equal between 16QAM and QPSK.
- s1 modulation method is fixed to 64QAM
- s2 modulation method is fixed to 64QAM
- s1 modulation method is changed from 16QAM to QPSK (either 16QAM or QPSK). Setting)
- it is preferable to satisfy u 4 ⁇ u 16 (similar to the description in Example 1-3).
- the value multiplied for the power change at 16QAM is u 16
- the value multiplied for the power change at QPSK is u 4
- the power change is not performed for 64QAM.
- a setting of (64QAM, 16QAM) or (16QAM, 64QAM) or (64QAM, QPSK) or (QPSK, 64QAM) is set for (s1 modulation method, s2 modulation method). If possible, the relationship u 4 ⁇ u 16 should be satisfied.
- modulation scheme of s1 is fixed, and the modulation scheme C has c signal points on the IQ plane. Further, as the modulation scheme of s2, any one of modulation scheme A having a number of signal points in the IQ plane and modulation scheme B having two signal points in the IQ plane (c>b> a) It is assumed that these settings are possible.
- the reception apparatus can obtain high data reception quality.
- the power is not changed for a fixed modulation method (here, modulation method C), but the power is changed for a plurality of settable modulation methods (here, modulation method A and modulation method B).
- modulation method C a fixed modulation method
- modulation method A and modulation method B a plurality of settable modulation methods
- s2 modulation method is fixed to modulation method C and s1 modulation method is changed from modulation method A to modulation method B (set to either modulation method A or modulation method B)”, u a ⁇ It may be u b .
- a set of (s1 modulation method, s2 modulation method) is set to (modulation method C, modulation method A) or (modulation method A, modulation method C) or (modulation method C, modulation method B) or (modulation method).
- Example 3 An example of an operation different from Example 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
- s1 (t) is a modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping)
- the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 80
- g is as shown in Equation (79).
- s2 (t) is a modulation system 64QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping)
- the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 86
- k is as shown in equation (85).
- t is time, and in this embodiment, the time axis direction will be described as an example.
- the power changing unit (8401B) receives the modulation system 64QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B and the control signal (8400) as input, and sets the value for changing the power based on the control signal (addition 400). Assuming u, a signal (8402B) obtained by multiplying the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307B of the modulation scheme 64QAM by u is output. Note that u is a real number and u> 1.0.
- F is a precoding matrix in a method of regularly changing the phase of a modulated signal after precoding
- y (t) is a phase change value for regularly changing the phase (y (t) is an absolute value)
- the imaginary number is 1 (including a real number), that is, it can be expressed as ej ⁇ (t)
- Expression (82) is established.
- the ratio of the average power of 16QAM and the average power of 64QAM is set to 1: u 2 .
- the reception state as shown in FIG. 83 is obtained, so that the reception quality of data in the reception device can be improved.
- transmission power control transmission power is generally controlled based on feedback information from a communication partner.
- the feature of the present invention is that transmission power is controlled regardless of feedback information from a communication partner, and this point will be described in detail.
- the value u for changing the power is set by the control signal (8400)” has been described.
- the control signal (8400) for further improving the reception quality of data in the receiving apparatus.
- the method of setting the value u for changing the power by means of will be described in detail.
- Example 3-1 Data used for generation of s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports an error correction code having a plurality of block lengths (the number of bits constituting one block after encoding, which is also referred to as a code length)
- a method of setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the block length of the error correction code applied to 1 will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction encoding of a block length selected from a plurality of supported block lengths is distributed into two systems.
- the encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the block length of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the feature of the present invention is that the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u for changing the power according to the selected block length indicated by the control signal (8400).
- a value for changing the power according to the block length X is described in the form of u LX .
- the power changing section (8401B) sets the value u L1000 for power changes
- the power changing section (8401B) is a power change
- the power change unit (8401B) sets the value u L3000 for the power change.
- u L1000 u L1500 .
- the settable power change value is 2
- the transmitter can select one of the power change values from among a plurality of settable power change values and perform the power change. Is an important point.
- Example 3-2 When the transmission apparatus supports error correction codes of a plurality of coding rates, the average power of s1 and s2 according to the coding rate of the error correction code applied to the data used to generate s1 and s2 A method of setting (average value) will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail-biting turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- a plurality of encodings are available. Rate is supported.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction coding at a coding rate selected from a plurality of supported coding rates is distributed to two systems. The encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the coding rate of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the selected coding rate indicated by the control signal (8400).
- a value for changing the power according to the coding rate rx is described in the form of u rx .
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the coding rates may be 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a value for power change that can be set when two or more coding rates can be set in the transmission apparatus.
- the transmission apparatus selects one of the power change values from among a plurality of settable power change values, and performs the power change. It is important to be able to. (Example 3-3) In order for the receiving apparatus to obtain better data reception quality, it is important to implement the following.
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 according to the modulation scheme used for generating s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports a plurality of modulation schemes will be described.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to 16QAM, and the modulation scheme of s2 is changed from 64QAM to QPSK by the control signal (or 64QAM or QPSK can be set).
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 80.
- g is Equation (79).
- the mapping method of s1 (t) is as shown in FIG.
- k is equation (85), and the modulation scheme of s2 (t) is QPSK.
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 81, and h in FIG. 81 is assumed to be expression (78).
- the average power is equal between 16QAM and QPSK.
- the receiving apparatus can obtain high data reception quality regardless of whether the modulation scheme of s2 is 16QAM or 64QAM.
- (16QAM, 64QAM) or (64QAM, 16QAM) or (16QAM, QPSK) or (QPSK, 16QAM) is set as the set of (s1 modulation method, s2 modulation method). If possible, the relationship u 4 ⁇ u 64 should be satisfied.
- modulation scheme of s1 is fixed, and the modulation scheme C has c signal points on the IQ plane. Further, as the modulation scheme of s2, any one of modulation scheme A having a number of signal points in the IQ plane and modulation scheme B having two signal points in the IQ plane (c>b> a) It is assumed that these settings are possible.
- the reception apparatus can obtain high data reception quality.
- the power is not changed for a fixed modulation method (here, modulation method C), but the power is changed for a plurality of settable modulation methods (here, modulation method A and modulation method B).
- modulation method C a fixed modulation method
- modulation method A and modulation method B a plurality of settable modulation methods
- s2 modulation method is fixed to modulation method C and s1 modulation method is changed from modulation method A to modulation method B (set to either modulation method A or modulation method B)”, u a ⁇ It may be u b .
- a set of (s1 modulation method, s2 modulation method) is set to (modulation method C, modulation method A) or (modulation method A, modulation method C) or (modulation method C, modulation method B) or (modulation method).
- s1 (t) is a baseband signal (signal after mapping) of the modulation scheme QPSK
- the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 81
- h is as shown in equation (78)
- s2 (t) is a modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping)
- the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 80
- g is as shown in Equation (79).
- t is time, and in this embodiment, the time axis direction will be described as an example.
- the power changing unit (8401A) receives the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of the modulation scheme QPSK and the control signal (8400), and sets a value for changing the set power based on the control signal (8400) to v Then, a signal (8402A) obtained by multiplying the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of the modulation scheme QPSK by v is output.
- F is a precoding matrix in a method of regularly changing the phase of a modulated signal after precoding
- y (t) (y (t) is an absolute value for a phase change value for regularly changing the phase.
- the imaginary number is 1 (including a real number), that is, it can be expressed as ej ⁇ (t)
- the following equation (87) is established.
- the reception state as shown in FIG. 83 is obtained, so that the reception quality of data in the reception device can be improved.
- transmission power is generally controlled based on feedback information from a communication partner.
- the feature of the present invention is that transmission power is controlled regardless of feedback information from a communication partner, and this point will be described in detail.
- “values v and u for changing the power are set by the control signal (8400)”.
- a control signal in order to further improve the reception quality of data in the receiving device
- the setting of the values v and u for changing the power according to 8400 will be described in detail.
- Example 4-1 Data used for generation of s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports an error correction code having a plurality of block lengths (the number of bits constituting one block after encoding, which is also referred to as a code length)
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the block length of the error correction code applied to 1 will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction encoding of a block length selected from a plurality of supported block lengths is distributed into two systems.
- the encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the block length of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets a value v for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power in accordance with the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing units (8401A, 8401B) set values v and u for changing the power according to the selected block length indicated by the control signal (8400).
- values for power change according to the block length X are described in the form of v LX and u LX , respectively.
- the power change unit (8401A) sets the value v L1000 for changing the power
- the power change unit (8401A) changes the power.
- the power changing section (8401B) sets the value u L1000 for power changes, if 1500 is selected as the block length, the power changing section (8401B) is a power change When the value u L1500 for is set and 3000 is selected as the block length, the power change unit (8401B) sets the value u L3000 for power change.
- v L1000 , v L1500 , v L3000 there are two in the set of (v L1000 , v L1500 , v L3000 ).
- v LX and u LX are , the ratio of the average power values, 1: being set so as to satisfy w 2 are as described above.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and in the transmission apparatus, when two or more code lengths can be set, a value u LX that can be set when power is set.
- the transmitter selects one of the power change values u LX from among a plurality of settable power change values u LX , and changes the power. It is one important point that when the code length can be set in two or more in the transmission apparatus, there are two or more values v LX for power change that can be set.
- the transmission apparatus can select one of the power change values v LX from a plurality of settable power change values v LX and perform the power change. It is a point. (Example 4-2) When the transmission apparatus supports error correction codes of a plurality of coding rates, the average power of s1 and s2 according to the coding rate of the error correction code applied to the data used for generating s1 and s2 A method of setting (average value) will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail-biting turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- a plurality of encodings are available. Rate is supported.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction coding at a coding rate selected from a plurality of supported coding rates is distributed to two systems. The encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the coding rate of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets a value v for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing units (8401A, 8401B) set the values v and u for changing the power according to the selected coding rate indicated by the control signal (8400).
- values for changing the power according to the coding rate rx are described in the form of v rx and u rx , respectively.
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets a value v r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets the value v r3 for changing the power.
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the coding rates are 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.
- the case of three coding rates has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a value for power change that can be set when two or more coding rates can be set in the transmission apparatus.
- the transmitting apparatus selects one of the power change values u rx that can be set from among a plurality of settable power change values u rx.
- the power changeable value v rX is two or more.
- the transmission apparatus can select one of the power change values v rX from among a plurality of settable power change values v rX and change the power. What you can do is also important. (Example 4-3) In order for the receiving apparatus to obtain better data reception quality, it is important to implement the following.
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the modulation scheme used for generating s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports a plurality of modulation schemes will be described.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to QPSK and the modulation scheme of s2 is changed from 16QAM to 64QAM by a control signal (or either 16QAM or 64QAM can be set).
- the mapping method of s1 (t) is as shown in FIG. 81.
- h is Equation (78).
- mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 80.
- g is Equation (79)
- the modulation scheme of s2 (t) is 64QAM.
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 86.
- k is assumed to be Expression (85).
- the reception apparatus can obtain high data reception quality regardless of whether the modulation scheme of s2 is 16QAM or 64QAM.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed, and the modulation scheme C has c signal points on the IQ plane.
- the modulation scheme of s2 is any one of modulation scheme A having a number of signal points on the IQ plane and modulation scheme B having a number of signal points on the IQ plane of b (a>b> c).
- a modulation method of the average power and s2 modulation scheme of s1 is the modulation scheme C
- the ratio of the average power 1: and w a 2 is the ratio of the average power 1: and w a 2.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is modulation scheme C and the average power is set to modulation scheme B as the modulation scheme of s2, the ratio of the average power is set to 1: w b 2 .
- the receiving apparatus can obtain the reception quality of high data.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to the modulation scheme C
- the modulation scheme of s2 is fixed to the modulation scheme C
- the modulation scheme of s1 is changed from the modulation scheme A to the modulation scheme B”.
- Example 5 An example of operation different from Example 4 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that s1 (t) is a baseband signal (signal after mapping) of the modulation scheme 64QAM, the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 86, and k is as shown in equation (85). Further, s2 (t) is a modulation system 16QAM baseband signal (signal after mapping), the mapping method is as shown in FIG. 80, and g is as shown in Equation (79). Note that t is time, and in this embodiment, the time axis direction will be described as an example.
- the power changing unit (8401A) receives the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of the modulation scheme 64QAM and the control signal (8400), and sets a value for changing the set power based on the control signal (8400) to v Then, a signal (8402A) obtained by multiplying the baseband signal (signal after mapping) 307A of the modulation scheme 64QAM by v is output.
- F is a precoding matrix in a method of regularly changing the phase of a modulated signal after precoding
- y (t) is a phase change value for regularly changing the phase (y (t) is an absolute value)
- the imaginary number is 1 (including a real number)
- the reception state as shown in FIG. 83 is obtained, so that the reception quality of data in the reception device can be improved.
- transmission power is generally controlled based on feedback information from a communication partner.
- the feature of the present invention is that transmission power is controlled regardless of feedback information from a communication partner, and this point will be described in detail.
- “values v and u for changing the power are set by the control signal (8400)”.
- a control signal in order to further improve the reception quality of data in the receiving device
- the setting of the values v and u for changing the power according to 8400 will be described in detail.
- Example 5-1 Data used for generation of s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports an error correction code having a plurality of block lengths (the number of bits constituting one block after encoding, which is also referred to as a code length)
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the block length of the error correction code applied to 1 will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- block codes such as tail bited turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction encoding of a block length selected from a plurality of supported block lengths is distributed into two systems.
- the encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the block length of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets a value v for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power in accordance with the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing units (8401A, 8401B) set values v and u for changing the power according to the selected block length indicated by the control signal (8400).
- values for power change according to the block length X are described in the form of v LX and u LX , respectively.
- the power change unit (8401A) sets the value v L1000 for changing the power
- the power change unit (8401A) changes the power.
- the power changing section (8401B) sets the value u L1000 for power changes, if 1500 is selected as the block length, the power changing section (8401B) is a power change When the value u L1500 for, and 3000 is selected as the block length, the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u L3000 for changing the power.
- v L1000 , v L1500 , v L3000 there are two in the set of (v L1000 , v L1500 , v L3000 ).
- v LX and u LX are , the ratio of the average power values, 1: being set so as to satisfy w 2 are as described above.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and in the transmission apparatus, when two or more code lengths can be set, a value u LX that can be set when power is set.
- the transmitter selects one of the power change values u LX from among a plurality of settable power change values u LX , and changes the power. It is one important point that when the code length can be set in two or more in the transmission apparatus, there are two or more values v LX for power change that can be set.
- the transmission apparatus can select one of the power change values v LX from a plurality of settable power change values v LX and perform the power change. It is a point.
- Example 5-2 When the transmission apparatus supports error correction codes of a plurality of coding rates, the average power of s1 and s2 according to the coding rate of the error correction code applied to the data used for generating s1 and s2 A method of setting (average value) will be described.
- error correction codes include block codes such as tail-biting turbo codes or duobinary turbo codes, and LDPC codes.
- a plurality of encodings are available. Rate is supported.
- Encoded data that has been subjected to error correction coding at a coding rate selected from a plurality of supported coding rates is distributed to two systems. The encoded data distributed to the two systems is modulated by the s1 modulation method and the s2 modulation method, respectively, to generate baseband signals (mapped signals) s1 (t) and s2 (t).
- the control signal (8400) is a signal indicating the coding rate of the selected error correction code
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets a value v for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u for changing the power according to the control signal (8400).
- a feature of the present invention is that the power changing units (8401A, 8401B) set the values v and u for changing the power according to the selected coding rate indicated by the control signal (8400).
- values for changing the power according to the coding rate rx are described in the form of v rx and u rx , respectively.
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets a value v r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401A) sets the value v r3 for changing the power.
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets a value u r1 for changing the power
- the power changing unit (8401B) sets the value u r3 for changing the power.
- the coding rates are 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4, respectively.
- the case of three coding rates has been described as an example.
- the present invention is not limited to this, and a value for power change that can be set when two or more coding rates can be set in the transmission apparatus.
- the transmitting apparatus selects one of the power change values u rx that can be set from among a plurality of settable power change values u rx.
- the power changeable value v rX is two or more.
- the transmission apparatus can select one of the power change values v rX from among a plurality of settable power change values v rX and change the power. What you can do is also important. (Example 5-3) In order for the receiving apparatus to obtain better data reception quality, it is important to implement the following.
- a method for setting the average power (average value) of s1 and s2 in accordance with the modulation scheme used for generating s1 and s2 when the transmission apparatus supports a plurality of modulation schemes will be described.
- the modulation scheme of s1 is fixed to 64QAM, and the modulation scheme of s2 is changed from 16QAM to QPSK by a control signal (or either 16QAM or QPSK can be set).
- the mapping method of s1 (t) is as shown in FIG. 86.
- k is the equation (85).
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 80.
- g is Equation (79)
- the modulation scheme of s2 (t) is QPSK.
- the mapping method of s2 (t) is as shown in FIG. 81.
- h is assumed to be Expression (78).
Abstract
Description
本発明は、特にマルチアンテナを用いた通信を行う送信装置および受信装置に関する。
図24の(A)(B)は、レイリ-フェージング環境、及びライスファクタK=3、10、16dBのライスフェージング環境において、LDPC(low-density parity-check)符号化されたデータを2×2(2アンテナ送信、2アンテナ受信)空間多重MIMO伝送した場合のBER(Bit Error Rate)特性(縦軸:BER、横軸:SNR(signal-to-noise power ratio))のシミュレーション結果の一例を示している。図24の(A)は、反復検波を行わないMax-log-APP(非特許文献1、非特許文献2参照)(APP:a posterior probability)のBER特性、図24の(B)は、反復検波を行ったMax-log-APP(非特許文献1、非特許文献2参照)(反復回数5回)のBER特性を示している。図24(A)(B)からわかるように、反復検波を行う、または行わないに関係なく、空間多重MIMOシステムでは、ライスファクタが大きくなると受信品質が劣化することが確認できる。このことから、「空間多重MIMOシステムでは、伝搬環境が安定的になると受信品質が劣化する」という従来のシングルの変調信号を送信するシステムにはない、空間多重MIMOシステム固有の課題をもつことがわかる。
(実施の形態1)
本実施の形態の送信方法、送信装置、受信方法、受信装置について詳しく説明する。
ここでは、NtxNr空間多重MIMOシステムにおけるMIMO信号の反復検波について述べる。
umnの対数尤度比を式(6)のように定義する。
<システムモデル>
図23に、以降の説明につながるシステムの基本構成を示す。ここでは、2×2空間多重MIMOシステムとし、ストリームA,Bではそれぞれにouterエンコーダがあり、2つのouterエンコーダは同一のLDPC符号のエンコーダとする(ここではouterエンコーダとしてLDPC符号のエンコーダを用いる構成を例に挙げて説明するが、outerエンコーダが用いる誤り訂正符号はLDPC符号に限ったものではなく、ターボ符号、畳み込み符号、LDPC畳み込み符号等の他の誤り訂正符号を用いても同様に実施することができる。また、outerエンコーダは、送信アンテナごとに有する構成としているがこれに限ったものではなく、送信アンテナが複数であっても、outerエンコーダは一つであってもよく、また、送信アンテナ数より多くのouterエンコーダを有していてもよい。)。そして、ストリームA,Bではそれぞれにインタリーバ(πa,πb)がある。ここでは、変調方式を2h-QAMとする(1シンボルでhビットを送信することになる。)。
図2はフレーム構成を示しており、インタリーブ後のシンボルの順番を記載している。このとき、以下の式のように(ia,ja),(ib,jb)をあらわすものとする。
<反復復号>
ここでは、受信機におけるLDPC符号の復号で用いるsum-product復号およびMIMO信号の反復検波のアルゴリズムについて詳しく述べる。
2元MxN行列H={Hmn}を復号対象とするLDPC符号の検査行列とする。集合[1,N]={1,2,・・・,N}の部分集合A(m),B(n)を次式のように定義する。
Step A・1(初期化):Hmn=1を満たす全ての組(m,n)に対して事前値対数比βmn=0とする。ループ変数(反復回数)lsum=1とし、ループ最大回数をlsum,maxと設定する。
Step A・2(行処理):m=1,2,・・・,Mの順にHmn=1を満たす全ての組(m,n)に対して、以下の更新式を用いて外部値対数比αmnを更新する。
Step A・3(列処理):n=1,2,・・・,Nの順にHmn=1を満たす全ての組(m,n)に対して、以下の更新式を用いて外部値対数比βmnを更新する。
以上が、1回のsum-product復号の動作である。その後、MIMO信号の反復検波が行われる。上述のsum-product復号の動作の説明で用いた変数m,n,αmn,βmn,λn,Lnにおいて、ストリームAにおける変数をma,na,αa mana,βa mana,λna,Lna、ストリームBにおける変数をmb,nb,αb mbnb,βb mbnb,λnb,Lnbであらわすものとする。
<MIMO信号の反復検波>
ここでは、MIMO信号の反復検波におけるλnの求め方について詳しく説明する。
Step B・1(初期検波;k=0):初期検波のとき、λ0,na,λ0,nbを以下のように求める。
反復APP復号のとき:
Step B・2(反復検波;反復回数k):反復回数kのときのλk,na,λk,nbは、式(11)(13)-(15)(16)(17)から式(31)-(34)のようにあらわされる。ただし、(X,Y)=(a,b)(b,a)となる。
反復APP復号のとき:
図3は、本実施の形態における送信装置300の構成の一例である。符号化部302Aは、情報(データ)301A、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313(符号化部302Aがデータの誤り訂正符号化に使用する誤り訂正方式、符号化率、ブロック長等の情報が含まれており、フレーム構成信号313が指定した方式を用いることになる。また、誤り訂正方式は、切り替えても良い。)にしたがい、例えば、畳み込み符号、LDPC符号、ターボ符号等の誤り訂正符号化を行い、符号化後のデータ303Aを出力する。
マッピング部306Aは、インタリーブ後のデータ305A、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、QPSK(Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)、16QAM(16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)、64QAM(64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)等の変調を施し、ベースバンド信号307Aを出力する。(フレーム構成信号313に基づき、変調方式は、切り替えても良い。)
図19は、QPSK変調におけるベースバンド信号を構成する同相成分Iと直交成分QのIQ平面におけるマッピング方法の一例としている。例えば、図19(A)のように、入力データが「00」の場合、I=1.0、Q=1.0が出力され、以下同様に、入力データが「01」の場合、I=―1.0、Q=1.0が出力され、・・・、が出力される。図19(B)は、図19(A)とは異なるQPSK変調のIQ平面におけるマッピング方法の例であり、図19(B)が図19(A)と異なる点は、図19(A)における信号点が、原点を中心に回転させることで図19(B)の信号点を得ることができる。このようなコンスタレーションの回転方法については、非特許文献9、非特許文献10に示されており、また、非特許文献9、非特許文献10に示されているCyclic Q Delayを適用してもよい。図19とは別の例として、図20に16QAMのときのIQ平面における信号点配置を示しており、図19(A)に相当する例が図20(A)であり、図19(B)に相当する例が図20(B)となる。
マッピング部306Bは、インタリーブ後のデータ305B、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、QPSK(Quadrature Phase Shift Keying)、16QAM(16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)、64QAM(64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation)等の変調を施し、ベースバンド信号307Bを出力する。(フレーム構成信号313に基づき、変調方式は、切り替えても良い。)
信号処理方法情報生成部314は、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313に基づいた信号処理方法に関する情報315を出力する。なお、信号処理方法に関する情報315は、どのプリコーディング行列を固定的に用いるのかを指定する情報と、位相を変更する位相変更パターンの情報を含む。
重み付け合成部308Bは、ベースバンド信号307A、ベースバンド信号307B、信号処理方法に関する情報315を入力とし、信号処理方法に関する情報315に基づいて、ベースバンド信号307Aおよびベースバンド信号307Bを重み付け合成し、重み付け合成後の信号316Bを出力する。
あるいは、上記式(36)において、αは、
なお、プリコーディング行列は、式(36)に限ったものではなく、式(39)に示すものを用いてもよい。
位相変更部317Bは、重み付け合成後の信号316B及び信号処理方法に関する情報315を入力とし、当該信号316Bの位相を規則的に変更して出力する。規則的に変更するとは、予め定められた周期(例えば、n個のシンボル毎(nは1以上の整数)あるいは予め定められた時間毎)で、予め定められた位相変更パターンに従って位相を変更する。位相変更パターンの詳細については、下記実施の形態4において説明する。
図4は、図3とは異なる送信装置400の構成例を示している。図4において、図3と異なる部分について説明する。
分配部404は符号化後のデータ403を入力とし、分配し、データ405Aおよびデータ405Bを出力する。なお、図4では、符号化部が一つの場合を記載したが、これに限ったものではなく、符号化部をm(mは1以上の整数)とし、各符号化部で作成された符号化データを分配部が、2系統のデータにわけて出力する場合についても、本発明は同様に実施することができる。
シンボル501_1は、送信装置が送信する変調信号z1(t){ただし、tは時間}のチャネル変動を推定するためのシンボルである。シンボル502_1は変調信号z1(t)が(時間軸における)シンボル番号uに送信するデータシンボル、シンボル503_1は変調信号z1(t)がシンボル番号u+1に送信するデータシンボルである。
このとき、z1(t)におけるシンボルとz2(t)におけるシンボルにおいて、同一時刻(同一時間)のシンボルは、同一(共通)の周波数を用いて、送信アンテナから送信されることになる。
図5において、504#1、504#2は送信装置における送信アンテナ、505#1、505#2は受信装置における受信アンテナを示しており、送信装置は、変調信号z1(t)を送信アンテナ504#1、変調信号z2(t)を送信アンテナ504#2から送信する。このとき、変調信号z1(t)および変調信号z2(t)は、同一(共通の)周波数(帯域)を占有しているものとする。送信装置の各送信アンテナと受信装置の各アンテナのチャネル変動をそれぞれh11(t)、h12(t)、h21(t)、h22(t)とし、受信装置の受信アンテナ505#1が受信した受信信号をr1(t)、受信装置の受信アンテナ505#2が受信した受信信号をr2(t)とすると、以下の関係式が成立する。
規則的な位相変更の周期は4に限ったものではない。この周期の数が多くなればその分だけ、受信装置の受信性能(より正確には誤り訂正性能)の向上を促すことができる可能性がある(周期が大きければよいというわけではないが、2のような小さい値は避ける方がよい可能性が高い。)。
LOS環境では、特殊なプリコーディング行列を用いると、受信品質が大きく改善する可能性があるが、直接波の状況により、その特殊なプリコーディング行列は受信した際の直接波の位相、振幅成分により異なる。しかし、LOS環境には、ある規則があり、この規則に従い送信信号の位相を規則的に変更すれば、データの受信品質が大きく改善する。本発明は、LOS環境を改善する信号処理方法を提案している。
送信装置で送信された変調信号z1におけるチャネル変動推定部705_1は、ベースバンド信号704_Xを入力とし、図5におけるチャネル推定用のリファレンスシンボル501_1を抽出し、式(40)のh11に相当する値を推定し、チャネル推定信号706_1を出力する。
無線部703_Yは、アンテナ701_Yで受信された受信信号702_Yを入力とし、周波数変換、直交復調等の処理を施し、ベースバンド信号704_Yを出力する。
送信装置で送信された変調信号z2におけるチャネル変動推定部707_2は、ベースバンド信号704_Yを入力とし、図5におけるチャネル推定用のリファレンスシンボル501_2を抽出し、式(40)のh22に相当する値を推定し、チャネル推定信号708_2を出力する。
信号処理部711は、ベースバンド信号704_X、704_Y、チャネル推定信号706_1、706_2、708_1、708_2、及び、送信装置が通知した送信方法の情報に関する信号710を入力とし、検波、復号を行い、受信データ712_1および712_2を出力する。
したがって、図8の係数生成部819は、送信装置が通知した送信方法の情報(用いた固定のプリコーディング行列及び位相を変更していた場合の位相変更パターンを特定するための情報)に関する信号818(図7の710に相当)を入力とし、信号処理方法の情報に関する信号820を出力する。
図8に示す構成の信号処理部では、反復復号(反復検波)を行うため図10に示すような処理方法を行う必要がある。初めに、変調信号(ストリーム)s1の1符号語(または、1フレーム)、および、変調信号(ストリーム)s2の1符号語(または、1フレーム)の復号を行う。その結果、soft-in/soft-outデコーダから、変調信号(ストリーム)s1の1符号語(または、1フレーム)、および、変調信号(ストリーム)s2の1符号語(または、1フレーム)の各ビットの対数尤度比(LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio)が得られる。そして、そのLLRを用いて再度、検波・復号が行われる。この操作が複数回行われる(この操作を反復復号(反復検波)と呼ぶ。)。以降では、1フレームにおける特定の時間のシンボルの対数尤度比(LLR)の作成方法を中心に説明する。
<初期検波の場合>
INNER MIMO検波部803は、ベースバンド信号801X、チャネル推定信号群802X、ベースバンド信号801Y、チャネル推定信号群802Yを入力とする。ここでは、変調信号(ストリーム)s1、変調信号(ストリーム)s2の変調方式が16QAMとして説明する。
INNER MIMO検波部803は、E(b0,b1,b2,b3,b4,b5,b6,b7)を信号804として出力する。
デインタリーバ(807A)は、対数尤度信号806Aを入力とし、インタリーバ(図3のインタリーバ(304A))に対応するデインタリーブを行い、デインタリーブ後の対数尤度信号808Aを出力する。
対数尤度比算出部809Aは、デインタリーブ後の対数尤度信号808Aを入力とし、図3の符号化器302Aで符号化されたビットの対数尤度比(LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio)を算出し、対数尤度比信号810Aを出力する。
Soft-in/soft-outデコーダ811Aは、対数尤度比信号810Aを入力とし、復号を行い、復号後の対数尤度比812Aを出力する。
<反復復号(反復検波)の場合、反復回数k>
インタリーバ(813A)は、k-1回目のsoft-in/soft-outデコードで得られた復号後の対数尤度比812Aを入力とし、インタリーブを行い、インタリーブ後の対数尤度比814Aを出力する。このとき、インタリーブ(813A)のインタリーブのパターンは、図3のインタリーバ(304A)のインタリーブパターンと同様である。
なお、図8では、反復検波を行う場合の、信号処理部の構成について示したが、反復検波は必ずしも良好な受信品質を得る上で必須の構成ではなく、反復検波のみに必要とする構成部分、インタリーバ813A、813Bを有していない構成でもよい。このとき、INNER MIMO検波部803は、反復的な検波を行わないことになる。
また、非特許文献11に示されているように、H(t)×Y(t)×Fに基づき、MMSE(Minimum Mean Square Error)、ZF(Zero Forcing)の線形演算を行い、初期検波を行ってもよい。
また、本実施の形態では、特にLDPC符号を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、また、復号方法についても、soft-in/soft-outデコーダとして、sum-product復号を例に限ったものではなく、他のsoft-in/soft-outの復号方法、例えば、BCJRアルゴリズム、SOVAアルゴリズム、Max-log-MAPアルゴリズムなどがある。詳細については、非特許文献6に示されている。
図12は、OFDM方式を用いたときの送信装置の構成を示している。図12において、図3と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付した。
OFDM方式関連処理部1201Aは、重み付け後の信号309Aを入力とし、OFDM方式関連の処理を施し、送信信号1202Aを出力する。同様に、OFDM方式関連処理部1201Bは、位相変更後の信号309Bを入力とし、送信信号1202Bを出力する。
シリアルパラレル変換部1302Aは、重み付け後の信号1301A(図12の重み付け後の信号309Aに相当する)シリアルパラレル変換を行い、パラレル信号1303Aを出力する。
逆高速フーリエ変換部1306Aは、並び換え後の信号1305Aを入力とし、逆高速フーリエ変換を施し、逆フーリエ変換後の信号1307Aを出力する。
無線部1308Aは、逆フーリエ変換後の信号1307Aを入力とし、周波数変換、増幅等の処理を行い、変調信号1309Aを出力し、変調信号1309Aはアンテナ1310Aから電波として出力される。
並び換え部1304Bは、パラレル信号1303Bを入力とし、並び換えを行い、並び換え後の信号1305Bを出力する。なお、並び換えについては、後で詳しく述べる。
無線部1308Bは、逆フーリエ変換後の信号1307Bを入力とし、周波数変換、増幅等の処理を行い、変調信号1309Bを出力し、変調信号1309Bはアンテナ1310Bから電波として出力される。
同様に、シリアルパラレル変換部1302Bが入力とする重み付けされ位相が変更された後の信号1301Bのシンボルに対し、順番に、#0、#1、#2、#3、・・・と番号をふる。ここでは、周期4の場合を考えているので、#0、#1、#2、#3はそれぞれ異なる位相変更を行っていることになり、#0、#1、#2、#3が一周期分となる。同様に考えると、#4n、#4n+1、#4n+2、#4n+3(nは0以上の整数)はそれぞれ異なる位相変更を行っていることになり、#4n、#4n+1、#4n+2、#4n+3が一周期分となる。
そして、図14(B)に示すシンボル群1402は、図6に示す位相変更方法を用いたときの1周期分のシンボルであり、シンボル#0は図6の時刻uの位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、シンボル#1は図6の時刻u+1の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、シンボル#2は図6の時刻u+2の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、シンボル#3は図6の時刻u+3の位相を用いたときのシンボルである。したがって、シンボル#xにおいて、x mod 4が0(xを4で割ったときの余り、したがって、mod:modulo)のとき、シンボル#xは図6の時刻uの位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、x mod 4が1のとき、シンボル#xは図6の時刻u+1の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、x mod 4が2のとき、シンボル#xは図6の時刻u+2の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、x mod 4が3のとき、シンボル#xは図6の時刻u+3の位相を用いたときのシンボルである。
このように、OFDM方式などのマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いた場合、シングルキャリア伝送のときとは異なり、シンボルを周波数軸方向に並べることができるという特徴を持つことになる。そして、シンボルの並べ方については、図14のような並べ方に限ったものではない。他の例について、図15、図16を用いて説明する。
周波数軸方向のシンボル群2220についても同様に、#4のシンボルでは時刻uの位相を用いた位相変更、#5では時刻u+1の位相を用いた位相変更、#6では時刻u+2の位相を用いた位相変更、#7では時刻u+3の位相を用いた位相変更を行うものとする。
時間軸方向のシンボル群2201では、#0のシンボルでは時刻uの位相を用いた位相変更、#9では時刻u+1の位相を用いた位相変更、#18では時刻u+2の位相を用いた位相変更、#27では時刻u+3の位相を用いた位相変更を行うものとする。
時間軸方向のシンボル群2203では、#20のシンボルでは時刻uの位相を用いた位相変更、#29では時刻u+1の位相を用いた位相変更、#2では時刻u+2の位相を用いた位相変更、#11では時刻u+3の位相を用いた位相変更を行うものとする。
図22においての特徴は、例えば#11のシンボルに着目した場合、同一時刻の周波数軸方向の両隣のシンボル(#10と#12)は、ともに#11とは異なる位相を用いて位相の変更を行っているとともに、#11のシンボルの同一キャリアの時間軸方向の両隣のシンボル(#2と#20)は、ともに#11とは異なる位相を用いて位相の変更を行っていることである。そして、これは#11のシンボルに限ったものではなく、周波数軸方向および時間軸方向ともに両隣にシンボルが存在するシンボルすべてにおいて#11のシンボルと同様の特徴をもつことになる。これにより、効果的に位相を変更していることになり、直接波の定常的な状況に対する影響を受けづらくなるため、データの受信品質が改善される可能性が高くなる。
(実施の形態2)
上記実施の形態1においては、重み付け合成された(固定のプリコーディング行列でプリコーディングされた)信号z(t)の位相を変更することとした。ここでは、上記実施の形態1と同等の効果を得られる位相変更方法の各種の実施形態について開示する。
しかしながら、位相の変更を実行するタイミングとしては、重み付け合成部600によるプリコーディングの前に実行することとしてもよく、送信装置は、図6に示した構成に代えて、図25に示すように、位相変更部317Bを重み付け合成部600の前段に設ける構成としてもよい。
位相変更部317Aは、位相変更部317Bと同様に入力された信号の位相を規則的に変更するものであり、重み付け合成部からのプリコーディングされた信号z1’(t)の位相を変更し、位相を変更した信号z1(t)を送信部に出力する。
両変調信号の位相を規則的に変更する場合には、それぞれの送信信号には、例えば制御情報として、それぞれの位相変更パターンの情報が含まれることとし、受信装置は、この制御情報を得ることで、送信装置が規則的に切り替えた位相変更方法、つまり、位相変更パターンを知ることができ、これにより、正しい復調(検波)を実行することが可能となる。
このとき、例えば、z1’(t)は、周期4で位相変更を行うものとする。(このとき、z2’(t)は位相変更を行わない。)したがって、時刻uにおいて、y1(u)=ej0、y2(u)=1、時刻u+1において、y1(u+1)=ejπ/2、y2(u+1)=1、時刻u+2において、y1(u+2)=ejπ、y2(u+2)=1、時刻u+3において、y1(u+3)=ej3π/2、y2(u+3)=1とするものとする。
時刻8kのとき、y1(8k)=ej0、y2(8k)=1、
時刻8k+1のとき、y1(8k+1)=ejπ/2、y2(8k+1)=1、
時刻8k+2のとき、y1(8k+2)=ejπ、y2(8k+2)=1、
時刻8k+3のとき、y1(8k+3)=ej3π/2、y2(8k+3)=1、
時刻8k+4のとき、y1(8k+4)=1、y2(8k+4)=ej0、
時刻8k+5のとき、y1(8k+5)=1、y2(8k+5)=ejπ/2、
時刻8k+6のとき、y1(8k+6)=1、y2(8k+6)=ejπ、
時刻8k+7のとき、y1(8k+7)=1、y2(8k+7)=ej3π/2
となる。
図29の位相変更部317Aは、s1’(t)=y1(t)s1(t)となるように、また、位相変更部317Bは、s2’(t)=y2(t)s2(t)となるように、位相の変更を行うことになる。
時刻8kのとき、y1(8k)=ej0、y2(8k)=1、
時刻8k+1のとき、y1(8k+1)=ejπ/2、y2(8k+1)=1、
時刻8k+2のとき、y1(8k+2)=ejπ、y2(8k+2)=1、
時刻8k+3のとき、y1(8k+3)=ej3π/2、y2(8k+3)=1、
時刻8k+4のとき、y1(8k+4)=1、y2(8k+4)=ej0、
時刻8k+5のとき、y1(8k+5)=1、y2(8k+5)=ejπ/2、
時刻8k+6のとき、y1(8k+6)=1、y2(8k+6)=ejπ、
時刻8k+7のとき、y1(8k+7)=1、y2(8k+7)=ej3π/2
となる。
これによって、受信装置側における送信信号z1(t)及びz2(t)を受信したときのそれぞれの受信状態を均等にすることができるとともに、受信した信号z1(t)及びz2(t)それぞれのシンボルにおいて位相が周期的に切り替えられることにより、誤り訂正復号後の誤り訂正能力を向上させることができるので、LOS環境における受信品質を向上させることができる。
本実施の形態では、シングルキャリア方式を例、つまり、位相変更を時間軸に対して行う場合について説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、マルチキャリア伝送を行った場合でも同様に実施することができる。したがって、例えば、スペクトル拡散通信方式、OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing)方式、SC-FDMA(Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access)、SC-OFDM(Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing)方式、非特許文献7等で示されているウェーブレットOFDM方式等を用いた場合についても同様に実施することができる。前述したように、本実施の形態では、位相変更を行う説明として、時間t軸方向で位相変更を行う場合で説明したが、実施の形態1と同様に、周波数軸方向に位相変更を行う、つまり、本実施の形態において、t方向での位相変更の説明において、tをf(f:周波数((サブ)キャリア))に置き換えて、考えることで、本実施の形態で説明した位相変更方法を、周波数方向に位相変更ことに適用することができることになる。また、本実施の形態の位相変更方法は、実施の形態1の説明と同様に、時間-周波数方向に対する位相変更に対して、適用することも可能である。
(実施の形態3)
上記実施の形態1及び2においては、位相を規則的に変更することとした。本実施の形態3においては、送信装置から見て、各所に点在することになる受信装置において、受信装置がどこに配置されていても、各受信装置が良好なデータの受信品質を得るための手法について開示する。
図31は、規則的に位相を変更する送信方式において、OFDM方式のようなマルチキャリア方式を用いたときの、時間-周波数軸における信号の一部のシンボルのフレーム構成の一例を示している。
はじめに、実施の形態1で説明した、2つのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号のうち、一方のベースバンド信号(図6参照)に位相変更を行った場合の例で説明する。
図31は、図12に示した位相変更部317Bの入力である変調信号z2’のフレーム構成を示しており、1つの四角がシンボル(ただし、プリコーディングを行っているため、s1とs2の両者の信号を含んでいるのが通常であるが、プリコーディング行列の構成次第では、s1とs2の一方の信号のみであることもある。)を示している。
キャリア2において、時刻$2に時間的に最も隣接するシンボル、つまりキャリア2の時刻$1のシンボル3103と時刻$3のシンボル3101のそれぞれのチャネル状態は、キャリア2、時刻$2のシンボル3100のチャネル状態と、非常に相関が高い。
上述したように、シンボル3101、3102、3103、3104のそれぞれのチャネル状態は、シンボル3100のチャネル状態との相関が非常に高い。
この受信側で高いデータの受信品質が得られる条件として、<条件#1>、<条件#2>が考えられる。
<条件#1>
図6のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応するプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYにおけるそれぞれのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
<条件#2>
図6のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応するプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
この<条件#1><条件#2>が導出される理由は以下の通りである。
送信信号においてあるシンボル(以降、シンボルAと呼称する)があり、当該シンボルAに時間的に隣接したシンボルそれぞれのチャネル状態は、上述したとおり、シンボルAのチャネル状態との相関が高い。
したがって、周波数的に隣接した3シンボルで、異なる位相を用いていると、LOS環境において、シンボルAが劣悪な受信品質(SNRとしては高い受信品質を得ているものの、直接波の位相関係が劣悪な状況であるため受信品質が悪い状態)であっても、残りのシンボルAに隣接する2シンボルでは、良好な受信品質を得ることができる可能性が非常に高く、その結果、誤り訂正復号後は良好な受信品質を得ることができる。
<条件#3>
図6のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、かつ、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら5つのデータシンボルに対応するプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、つまり、時間X・キャリアYおよび時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYおよび時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれのプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
ここで、「異なる位相変更」について、補足を行う。位相変更は、0ラジアンから2πラジアンで定義されることになる。例えば、時間X・キャリアYにおいて、図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対して施す位相変更をejθX,Y、時間X-1・キャリアYにおいて、図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対して施す位相変更をejθX-1,Y、時間X+1・キャリアYにおいて、図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に対して施す位相変更をejθX+1,Yとすると、0ラジアン≦θX,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX-1,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX+1,Y<2πとなる。したがって、<条件#1>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX+1,Y≠θX-1,Yが成立することになる。同様に考えると、<条件#2>では、θX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX-1,Y+1が成立することになり、<条件#3>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX-1,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX,Y+1が成立することになる。
図31は<条件#3>の例であり、シンボルAに該当するシンボル3100に相当する図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に乗じられている位相と、そのシンボル3100に時間的に隣接するシンボル3101に相当する図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、3103に相当する図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に乗じられている位相と、周波数的に隣接するシンボル3102に相当する図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’、3104に相当する図6のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’に乗じられている位相が互いに異なるように配されており、これによって、受信側においてシンボル3100の受信品質が劣悪であろうとも、その隣接するシンボルの受信品質は非常に高くなるため、誤り訂正復号後の高い受信品質を確保できる。
図32を見ればわかるように、いずれのデータシンボルにおいても、その位相が周波数軸方向及び時間軸方向の双方において隣接しあうシンボルに対して変更された位相の度合いは互いに異なる位相変更量となっている。このようにすることで、受信装置における誤り訂正能力を更に向上させることができる。
同様に、図32では、周波数方向で隣接するシンボルにデータシンボルが存在していた場合、<条件#2>がすべてのX、すべてのYで成立している。
同様に、図32では、周波数方向で隣接するシンボルにデータシンボルが存在し、かつ、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボルにデータシンボルが存在していた場合、<条件#3>がすべてのX、すべてのYで成立している。
図26のように、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z1’、および、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’の両者に位相変更を与える場合、位相変更方法について、いくつかの方法がある。その点について、詳しく説明する。
以上のようにすることで、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’の位相変更は周期10であるが、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z1’の位相変更とプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期は10より大きくすることができるという効果を得ることができる。これにより、受信装置のデータの受信品質が向上する可能性がある。
上記で説明したフレーム構成以外にも、データシンボル間にパイロットシンボル(SP(Scattered Pilot))や制御情報を伝送するシンボルなどが挿入されることも考えられる。この場合の位相変更について詳しく説明する。
図51において、重み付け合成部308A、308B、および、位相変更部317Bは、フレーム構成信号313がデータシンボルであるタイミングを示しているときのみ動作することになる。
図47から図50のフレーム構成では示していなかったが、プリコーディング(および、位相回転を施さない)を施さない、例えば、1アンテナから変調信号を送信する方式、(この場合、もう一方のアンテナからは信号を伝送しないことになる)、または、時空間符号(特に時空間ブロック符号)を用いた伝送方式を用いて制御情報シンボルを送信する場合、制御情報シンボル5104は、制御情報5103、フレーム構成信号313を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313が制御情報シンボルであることを示している場合、制御情報シンボルのベースバンド信号5102A、5102Bを出力する。
図52は、図48、図50のフレーム構成の変調信号を生成し、送信する送信装置の構成の一例を示しており、図4、図51と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付している。図51に対して追加した位相変更部317Aは、フレーム構成信号313がデータシンボルであるタイミングを示しているときのみ動作することになる。その他については、図51と同様の動作となる。
選択部5301は、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313が示したシンボルのベースバンド信号を選択し、出力する。
同様に、位相変更部5201は、図54のように、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とする。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、データシンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号309Aに対し、位相変更を施す。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、パイロットシンボル(またはヌルシンボル)、または、制御情報シンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、位相変更の動作を停止し、各シンボルのベースバンド信号をそのまま出力する。(解釈としては、「ej0」に相当する位相回転を強制的に行っていると考えればよい。)
上述の説明では、パイロットシンボルと制御シンボルとデータシンボルを例に説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、プリコーディングとは異なる伝送方法、例えば、1アンテナ送信、時空間ブロック符号を用いた伝送方式、等を用いて伝送するシンボルであれば、同様に、位相変更を与えない、ということが重要となり、これとは逆に、プリコーディングを行ったシンボルに対しては、位相変更を行うことが本発明では重要なこととなる。
(実施の形態4)
上記実施の形態1及び2においては、位相を規則的に変更すること、実施の形態3においては、隣り合うシンボルの位相の変更の度合いを異ならせることを開示した。
以下の表1には、送信装置が設定した各種設定パラメータに応じて設定する位相変更方法の一例を示している。
即ち、変調信号s1(t)のマッピング方式を16QAM、変調信号s2(t)のマッピング方式を16QAMであったものを、例えば、変調信号s2(t)に適用するマッピング方式を規則的に、16QAM→16APSK(16 Amplitude Phase Shift Keying)→I-Q平面において16QAM、16APSKとは異なる信号点配置となる第1のマッピング方法→I-Q平面において16QAM、16APSKとは異なる信号点配置となる第2のマッピング方法→・・・というように変更することで、上述してきたように位相を規則的に変更する場合と同様に、受信装置において、データの受信品質を向上する効果を得ることができる。
本実施の形態では、シングルキャリア方式、マルチキャリア伝送いずれの場合でも実施することができる。したがって、例えば、スペクトル拡散通信方式、OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing)方式、SC-FDMA(Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access)、SC-OFDM(Single Carrier Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing)方式、非特許文献7等で示されているウェーブレットOFDM方式等を用いた場合についても実施することができる。前述したように、本実施の形態では、位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更を行う説明として、時間t軸方向で位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更を行う場合で説明したが、実施の形態1と同様に、周波数軸方向に位相変更を行うときと同様に、つまり、本実施の形態において、t方向での位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更の説明において、tをf(f:周波数((サブ)キャリア))に置き換えて、考えることで、本実施の形態で説明した位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更を、周波数方向に位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更ことに適用することができることになる。また、本実施の形態の位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更方法は、実施の形態1の説明と同様に、時間-周波数方向に対する位相変更、振幅変更、マッピング変更に対して、適用することも可能である。
(実施の形態A1)
本実施の形態では、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check)符号(QC-LDPC符号でない、LDPC符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号、テイルバイティングを用いたターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの規則的に位相を変更する方法について詳しく説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと乗じる位相との関係について説明する。
<条件#A01>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#A01>を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#A01>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#A02>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図3の送信装置および図12の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと乗じる位相との関係について説明する。
<条件#A03>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,1としたとき、
<条件#A04>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=KN-1,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,2としたとき、
<条件#A05>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=KN-1,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#A03><条件#A04><条件#A05>を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#A03><条件#A04><条件#A05>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#A06>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#A07>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#A08>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと乗じる位相の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
特に、規則的に位相を変更する方法を選択した(サブ)キャリア群では、本実施の形態を実施するとよい。
(実施の形態B1)
以下では、上記各実施の形態で示した送信方法及び受信方法の応用例とそれを用いたシステムの構成例を説明する。
図36は、上記実施の形態で示した送信方法及び受信方法を実行する装置を含むシステムの構成例を示す図である。上記各実施の形態で示した送信方法及び受信方法は、図36に示すような放送局と、テレビ(テレビジョン)3611、DVDレコーダ3612、STB(Set Top Box)3613、コンピュータ3620、車載のテレビ3641及び携帯電話3630等の様々な種類の受信機を含むデジタル放送用システム3600において実施される。具体的には、放送局3601が、映像データや音声データ等が多重化された多重化データを上記各実施の形態で示した送信方法を用いて所定の伝送帯域に送信する。
また、本実施の形態の受信機3700は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データ(場合によっては、復調部3702で復調されて得られる信号に対して誤り訂正復号を行わないこともある。また、受信機3700は、誤り訂正復号後に他の信号処理が施されることもある。以降について、同様の表現を行っている部分についても、この点は同様である。)に含まれるデータ、または、そのデータに相当するデータ(例えば、データを圧縮することによって得られたデータ)や、動画、音声を加工して得られたデータを、磁気ディスク、光ディスク、不揮発性の半導体メモリ等の記録メディアに記録する記録部(ドライブ)3708を備える。ここで光ディスクとは、例えばDVD(Digital Versatile Disc)やBD(Blu-ray Disc)等の、レーザ光を用いて情報の記憶と読み出しがなされる記録メディアである。磁気ディスクとは、例えばFD(Floppy Disk)(登録商標)やハードディスク(Hard Disk)等の、磁束を用いて磁性体を磁化することにより情報を記憶する記録メディアである。不揮発性の半導体メモリとは、例えばフラッシュメモリや強誘電体メモリ(Ferroelectric Random Access Memory)等の、半導体素子により構成された記録メディアであり、フラッシュメモリを用いたSDカードやFlash SSD(Solid State Drive)などが挙げられる。なお、ここで挙げた記録メディアの種類はあくまでその一例であり、上記の記録メディア以外の記録メディアを用いて記録を行っても良いことは言うまでもない。
なお、上記の説明では、受信機3700は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データを記録部3708で記録するとしたが、多重化データに含まれるデータのうち一部のデータを抽出して記録しても良い。例えば、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データに映像データや音声データ以外のデータ放送サービスのコンテンツ等が含まれる場合、記録部3708は、復調部3702で復調された多重化データから映像データや音声データを抽出して多重した新しい多重化データを記録しても良い。また、記録部3708は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データに含まれる映像データ及び音声データのうち、どちらか一方のみを多重した新しい多重化データを記録しても良い。そして、上記で述べた多重化データに含まれるデータ放送サービスのコンテンツを記録部3708は、記録してもよい。
また、上記の説明では、記録部3708は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データを記録するとしたが、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データに含まれる映像データを、当該映像データよりもデータサイズまたはビットレートが低くなるよう、当該映像データに施された動画像符号化方法とは異なる動画像符号化方法で符号化された映像データに変換し、変換後の映像データを多重した新しい多重化データを記録してもよい。このとき、元の映像データに施された動画像符号化方法と変換後の映像データに施された動画像符号化方法とは、互いに異なる規格に準拠していてもよいし、同じ規格に準拠して符号化時に使用するパラメータのみが異なっていてもよい。同様に、記録部3708は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データに含まれる音声データを、当該音声データよりもデータサイズまたはビットレートが低くなるよう、当該音声データに施された音声符号化方法とは異なる音声符号化方法で符号化された音声データに変換し、変換後の音声データを多重した新しい多重化データを記録してもよい。
また、上記の説明では、ストリーム出力IF3709は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データを出力するとしたが、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データに含まれる映像データを、当該映像データよりもデータサイズまたはビットレートが低くなるよう、当該映像データに施された動画像符号化方法とは異なる動画像符号化方法で符号化された映像データに変換し、変換後の映像データを多重した新しい多重化データを出力してもよい。このとき、元の映像データに施された動画像符号化方法と変換後の映像データに施された動画像符号化方法とは、互いに異なる規格に準拠していてもよいし、同じ規格に準拠して符号化時に使用するパラメータのみが異なっていてもよい。同様に、ストリーム出力IF3709は、復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データに含まれる音声データを、当該音声データよりもデータサイズまたはビットレートが低くなるよう、当該音声データに施された音声符号化方法とは異なる音声符号化方法で符号化された音声データに変換し、変換後の音声データを多重した新しい多重化データを出力してもよい。
さらに、受信機3700は、ユーザ操作の入力を受け付ける操作入力部3710を備える。受信機3700は、ユーザの操作に応じて操作入力部3710に入力される制御信号に基づいて、電源のON/OFFの切り替えや、受信するチャネルの切り替え、字幕表示の有無や表示する言語の切り替え、音声出力部3706から出力される音量の変更等の様々な動作の切り替えや、受信可能なチャネルの設定等の設定の変更を行う。
なお、上記の説明では受信機3700が、音声出力部3706、映像表示部3707、記録部3708、ストリーム出力IF3709、及びAV出力IF3711を備えている場合を例に挙げて説明したが、これらの構成の全てを備えている必要はない。受信機3700が上記の構成のうち少なくともいずれか一つを備えていれば、ユーザは復調部3702で復調し、誤り訂正の復号を行うことで得られた多重化データを利用することができるため、各受信機はその用途に合わせて上記の構成を任意に組み合わせて備えていれば良い。
(多重化データ)
次に、多重化データの構造の一例について詳細に説明する。放送に用いられるデータ構造としてはMPEG2-トランスポートストリーム(TS)が一般的であり、ここではMPEG2-TSを例に挙げて説明する。しかし、上記各実施の形態で示した送信方法及び受信方法で伝送される多重化データのデータ構造はMPEG2-TSに限られず、他のいかなるデータ構造であっても上記の各実施の形態で説明した効果を得られることは言うまでもない。
図43は、その多重化データ情報ファイルの構成を示す図である。多重化データ情報ファイルは、図43に示すように多重化データの管理情報であり、多重化データと1対1に対応し、多重化データ情報、ストリーム属性情報とエントリマップから構成される。
(その他補足)
本明細書において、送信装置を具備しているのは、例えば、放送局、基地局、アクセスポイント、端末、携帯電話(mobile phone)等の通信・放送機器であることが考えられ、このとき、受信装置を具備しているのは、テレビ、ラジオ、端末、パーソナルコンピュータ、携帯電話、アクセスポイント、基地局等の通信機器であることが考えられる。また、本発明における送信装置、受信装置は、通信機能を有している機器であって、その機器が、テレビ、ラジオ、パーソナルコンピュータ、携帯電話等のアプリケーションを実行するための装置に何らかのインターフェース(例えば、USB)を介して接続できるような形態であることも考えられる。
なお、本発明はすべての実施の形態に限定されず、種々変更して実施することが可能である。例えば、上記実施の形態では、通信装置として行う場合について説明しているが、これに限られるものではなく、この通信方法をソフトウェアとして行うことも可能である。
また、本明細書では、送信方法としてOFDM方式を用いた場合を中心に説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、OFDM方式以外のマルチキャリア方式、シングルキャリア方式を用いた場合にも同様に実施することは可能である。このとき、スペクトル拡散通信方式を用いていてもよい。なお、シングルキャリア方式を用いている場合、位相変更は時間軸方向で位相変更が行われることになる。
また、2ストリームのベースバンド信号s1(i)、s2(i)(ただし、iは、(時間、または、周波数(キャリア)の)順番をあらわす)に対し、規則的な位相変更およびプリコーディングを行い(順番はどちらが先であってもよい)生成された、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z1(i)、z2(i)において、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z1(i)の同相I成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)とし、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z2(i)の同相I成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)とする。このとき、ベースバンド成分の入れ替えを行い、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
とし、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ1、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ2から、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信する、というように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)に相当する変調信号と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)を異なるアンテナから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信するとしてもよい。また、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
としてもよい。また、上述では、2ストリームの信号に対し両者の信号処理を行い、両者の信号処理後の信号の同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えについて説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、2ストリームより多い信号に対し両者の信号処理後を行い、両者の信号処理後の信号の同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えを行うことも可能である。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
図55は、上記の記載を説明するためのベースバンド信号入れ替え部5502を示す図である。図55に示すように、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z1(i)5501_1、z2(i)5501_2において、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z1(i)5501_1の同相I成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)とし、両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号z2(i)5501_2の同相I成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)とする。そして、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)5503_1の同相成分をIr1(i)、直交成分をQr1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)5503_2の同相成分をIr2(i)、直交成分をQr2(i)とすると、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)5503_1の同相成分Ir1(i)、直交成分Qr1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)5503_2の同相成分Ir2(i)、直交成分をQr2(i)は上述で説明したいずれかであらわされるものとする。なお、この例では、同一時刻(同一周波数((サブ)キャリア))の両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号の入れ替えについて説明したが、上述のように、異なる時刻(異なる周波数((サブ)キャリア))の両者の信号処理後のベースバンド信号の入れ替えであってもよい。
本明細書において、「∀」は全称記号(universal quantifier)をあらわしており、「∃」は存在記号(existential quantifier)をあらわしている。
複素平面を利用すると、複素数の極座標による表示として極形式で表示できる。複素数 z = a + jb (a、bはともに実数であり、jは虚数単位である)に、複素平面上の点 (a, b) を対応させたとき、この点が極座標で[r, θ] とあらわされるなら、
a=r×cosθ、
b=r×sinθ
本発明の説明において、ベースバンド信号、s1、s2、z1、z2は複素信号となるが、複素信号とは、同相信号をI、直交信号をQとしたとき、複素信号はI + jQ(jは虚数単位)とあらわされることになる。このとき、Iがゼロとなってもよいし、Qがゼロとなってもよい。
また、実施の形態A1において、図3、図4、図6、図12、図25、図29、図51、図53における位相変更部において、周期Nのための位相変更値(図3、図4、図6、図12、図25、図29、図51、図53では、一方のベースバンド信号にのみ、位相変更を与えることになるので、位相変更値となる。)として、PHASE[i](i=0,1,2,・・・,N-2,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))と表現した。そして、本明細書において、一方のプリコーディング後のベースバンド信号に対し、位相変更を行う場合(つまり、図3、図4、図6、図12、図25、図29、図51、図53)、図3、図4、図6、図12、図25、図29、図51、図53において、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号z2’のみに位相変更を与えている。このとき、PHASE[k]を以下のように与える。
また、本明細書では、2つの変調信号を複数のアンテナで送信する場合における位相変更方法について詳しく説明したが、これに限ったものでは、なく、3つ以上の変調方式のマッピングを行ったベースバンド信号に対し、プリコーディング、位相変更を行い、プリコーディング、位相変更後のベースバンド信号に対し、所定の処理を行い、複数のアンテナから送信する場合についても、同様に実施することができる。
また、上記通信方法を実行するプログラムをコンピュータで読み取り可能な記憶媒体に格納し、記憶媒体に格納されたプログラムをコンピュータのRAM(Random Access Memory)に記録して、コンピュータをそのプログラムにしたがって動作させるようにしても良い。
(実施の形態C1)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態1で、送信パラメータを変更した際、使用するプリコーディング行列を切り替える場合について説明したが、本実施の形態では、その詳細の例について、上述の(その他の補足)で述べたように、送信パラメータとして、ストリームs1(t)、s2(t)において、異なるデータを伝送する場合と同一のデータを伝送する場合で切り替えるときに、使用するプリコーディング行列を切り替える方法、および、これに伴う位相変更方法について説明する。
図56は、前述のように送信方法を切り替える場合の送信装置の構成の一例を示している。図56において、図54と同様に動作するものについては同一符号を付している。図56において、分配部404は、フレーム構成信号313を入力としていることが、図54と異なる点となる。分配部404の動作について、図57を用いて説明する。
なお、分配部404は、入力信号であるフレーム構成信号313により、送信モードが、同一データを送信する場合、異なるデータを送信する場合を判断することになる。
そして、位相変更部5201は、フレーム構成信号313が「同一データを送信する」であることを示している場合、重み付け合成後のベースバンド信号309Aに位相変更を施し、位相変更後のベースバンド信号5202を出力する。そして、位相変更部317Bは、フレーム構成信号313が「同一データを送信する」であることを示している場合、重み付け合成後のベースバンド信号316Bに位相変更を施し、位相変更後のベースバンド信号309Bを出力する。なお、位相変更部5201で施す位相変更をejA(t)(または、ejA(f)または、ejA(t、f))(ただし、tは時間、fは周波数)とし(したがって、ejA(t)(または、ejA(f)または、ejA(t、f))は、入力されたベースバンド信号に乗算する値である。)、位相変更部317Bで施す位相変更をejB(t)(または、ejB(f)または、ejB(t、f))(ただし、tは時間、fは周波数)とすると(したがって、ejB(t)(または、ejB(f)または、ejB(t、f))は、入力されたベースバンド信号に乗算する値である。)、以下の条件を満たすことが重要となる。
なお、図56において、位相変更後のベースバンド信号5202は、OFDMを用いている場合、IFFT、周波数変換等の処理を施し、送信アンテナから送信される。(図13参照)(したがって、位相変更後のベースバンド信号5202は、図13の信号1301Aであると考えればよい。)同様に、位相変更後のベースバンド信号309Bは、OFDMを用いている場合、IFFT、周波数変換等の処理を施し、送信アンテナから送信される。(図13参照)(したがって、位相変更後のベースバンド信号309Bは、図13の信号1301Bであると考えればよい。)
一方、送信モードとして、「異なるデータを送信する」が選択されている場合、実施の形態1で示したように、式(36)、式(39)、式(50)のいずれかであらわされるものとする。このとき、図56の位相変更部5201、317Bは、「同一のデータを送信」する場合とは異なる位相変更方法を行うことが重要となる。特に、この場合、実施の形態1で述べたように、例えば、位相変更部5201は位相変更を行い、位相変更部317Bは位相変更を行わない、または、位相変更部5201は位相変更を行わず、位相変更部317Bは位相変更を行う、というように、2つの位相変更部のうち、いずれか一方のみ位相変更を行う、というようにすれば、LOS環境、NLOS環境の両者で、受信装置は、良好なデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(実施の形態C2)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態C1を応用した基地局の構成方法について説明する。
端末Q(5908)は、基地局A(5902A)のアンテナ5904Aから送信された送信信号5903Aと基地局B(5902B)のアンテナ5904Bから送信された送信信号5903Bを受信し、所定の処理を行い、受信データを得ているものとする。
基地局A(5902A)および基地局B(5902B)いずれも、実施の形態C1で説明したように、図56および図13で構成された送信装置を具備している。そして、基地局A(5902A)は、図60のように送信する場合、周波数帯域Xにおいては、実施の形態C1で説明したように、異なる2つの変調信号を生成し(プリコーディング、位相変更を行う)、2つの変調信号をそれぞれ図59のアンテナ5904Aおよび5906Aから送信する。周波数帯域Yにおいては、基地局A(5902A)は、図56において、インタリーバ304A、マッピング部306A、重み付け合成部308A、位相変更部5201を動作させ、変調信号5202を生成し、変調信号5202に相当する送信信号を図13のアンテナ1310A、つまり、図59のアンテナ5904Aから送信する。同様に、基地局B(5902B)は、図56において、インタリーバ304A、マッピング部306A、重み付け合成部308A、位相変更部5201を動作させ、変調信号5202を生成し、変調信号5202に相当する送信信号を図13のアンテナ1310A、つまり、図59のアンテナ5904Bから送信する。
また、図59において、信号5901は、送信モード(「同一のデータを送信」または「異なるデータを送信」)に関する情報を含んでいることになり、基地局は、この信号を取得することで、各周波数帯域における変調信号の生成方法を切り替えることになる。ここでは、信号5901は、図59のように他の機器あるいはネットワークから入力しているが、例えば、基地局A(5902A)がマスタ局となり、基地局B(5902B)に信号5901に相当する信号をわたすようにしてもよい。
一方、「同一のデータを送信」する場合、2つの基地局がそれぞれ、変調信号を生成し、送信することになる。このとき、各基地局は、一つのアンテナから送信するための変調信号を生成することは、2つの基地局を併せて考えた場合、2つの基地局で、式(52)のプリコーディング行列を設定したことに相当する。なお、位相変更方法については、実施の形態C1で説明したとおりであり、例えば、(数53)の条件を満たすとよい。
本実施の形態のようにすることで、「同一のデータを送信」「異なるデータを送信」いずれの場合についても、受信装置において、データの受信品質を向上させることができるという効果を得ることができるとともに、送信装置において、位相変更部の共有化を行うことができるという利点がある。
(実施の形態C3)
本実施の形態では、実施の形態C1を応用した中継器の構成方法について説明する。なお、中継器は、中継局と呼称されることもある。
中継器A(6203A)は、受信アンテナ6204Aで受信した受信信号6205A、および、受信アンテナ6206Aで受信した受信信号6207Aを復調等の処理を施し、受信データを得る。そして、その受信データを端末に伝送するため、送信処理を施し、変調信号6209Aおよび、6211Aを生成し、それぞれ、アンテナ6210Aおよび6212Aから送信する。
図63は、基地局が送信する送信信号のうち、アンテナ6202Aから送信する変調信号の周波数割り当て、および、アンテナ6202Bから送信する変調信号の周波数割り当て、を示している。図63において、横軸を周波数、縦軸を送信パワーとする。
図64は、中継器A、中継器Bが送信する送信信号のうち、中継器Aのアンテナ6210Aから送信する変調信号6209A、アンテナ6212Aから送信する変調信号6211Aの周波数割り当て、および、中継器Bのアンテナ6210Bから送信する変調信号6209B、アンテナ6212Bから送信する変調信号6211Bの周波数割り当て、を示している。図64において、横軸を周波数、縦軸を送信パワーとする。
図65は、中継器の受信部と送信部の構成の一例を示しており、図56と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付した。受信部6203Xは、受信アンテナ6501aで受信した受信信号6502a、および、受信アンテナ6501bで受信した受信信号6502bを入力とし、周波数帯域Xの成分に対し、信号処理(信号の分離または合成、誤り訂正復号等の処理)を施し、基地局が周波数帯域Xを用いて伝送したデータ6204Xを得て、これを分配部404に出力するとともに、制御情報に含まれる送信方法の情報を得(中継器が送信する際の送信方法の情報も得る)、フレーム構成信号313を出力する。
中継器A(6203A)と中継器B(6203B)は、図64のように送信する場合、周波数帯域Xにおいては、実施の形態C1で説明したように、異なる2つの変調信号を生成し(プリコーディング、位相変更を行う)、2つの変調信号をそれぞれ、中継器A(6203A)は図62のアンテナ6210Aおよび6212Aから、中継器B(6203B)は図62のアンテナ6210Bおよび6212Bから送信する。
一方、「同一のデータを送信」する場合、2つの中継器がそれぞれ、変調信号を生成し、送信することになる。このとき、各中継器は、一つのアンテナから送信するための変調信号を生成することは、2つの中継器を併せて考えた場合、2つの中継器で、式(52)のプリコーディング行列を設定したことに相当する。なお、位相変更方法については、実施の形態C1で説明したとおりであり、例えば、(数53)の条件を満たすとよい。
本実施の形態のようにすることで、「同一のデータを送信」「異なるデータを送信」いずれの場合についても、受信装置において、データの受信品質を向上させることができるという効果を得ることができるとともに、送信装置において、位相変更部の共有化を行うことができるという利点がある。
(実施の形態C4)
本実施の形態では、「実施の形態1」、「その他補足」で説明した位相変更方法とは異なる位相変更方法について説明する。
このようにすると、受信装置において、特に、電波伝搬環境が、LOS環境のとき、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。これは、LOS環境において、位相変更を行わなかった場合、定常的な位相関係であったものが、位相変更を行うことで、位相関係の変更が行われ、これにより、バースト的に伝搬環境が悪い状況が回避されるからである。また、式(54)とは別の方法として、PHASE[k]を以下のように与えてもよい。
また、別の位相変更方法として、PHASE[k]を以下のように与えてもよい。
また、別の位相変更方法として、PHASE[k]を以下のように与えてもよい。
以上のように、本実施の形態のような位相変更を行うことで、受信装置は、良好な受信品質を得ることができる可能性が高くなる、という効果を得ることができる。
本実施の形態の位相変更は、シングルキャリア方式への適用に限ったものではなく、マルチキャリア伝送の場合も適用することができる。したがって、例えば、スペクトル拡散通信方式、OFDM方式、SC-FDMA、SC-OFDM方式、非特許文献7等で示されているウェーブレットOFDM方式等を用いた場合についても同様に実施することができる。前述したように、本実施の形態では、位相変更を行う説明として、時間t軸方向で位相変更を行う場合があるが、実施の形態1と同様に、周波数軸方向に位相変更を行うときと同様に、つまり、本実施の形態において、t方向での位相変更の説明において、tをf(f:周波数((サブ)キャリア))に置き換えて、考えることで、本実施の形態で説明した位相変更変更を、周波数方向に位相変更に適用することができることになる。また、本実施の形態の位相変更方法は、実施の形態1の説明と同様に、時間-周波数方向に対する位相変更に対して、適用することも可能である。また、本実施の形態で説明した位相変更方法は、実施の形態A1で示した内容を満たすと、受信装置において、良好なデータ品質を得ることができる可能性が高い。
(実施の形態C5)
本実施の形態では、「実施の形態1」、「その他補足」、「実施の形態C4」で説明した位相変更方法とは異なる位相変更方法について説明する。
式(59)のn+1個の異なる位相変更値PHASE[0], PHASE[1],・・・, PHASE[i],・・・, PHASE[n-1], PHASE[n]において、PHASE[0]を1回用い、かつ、PHASE[1]~PHASE[n]をそれぞれ2回用いる(PHASE[1]を2回用い、PHASE[2]を2回用い、・・・、PHASE[n-1]を2回用い、PHASE[n]を2回用いる)ことで、周期N=2n+1の規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法とすることで、少ない位相変更値で規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法を実現することができ、受信装置は、良好なデータの受信品質を得ることができる。用意する位相変更値が少ないため、送信装置、受信装置の効果を削減できる効果を得ることができる。
式(60)のn+1個の異なる位相変更値PHASE[0], PHASE[1],・・・, PHASE[i],・・・, PHASE[n-1], PHASE[n]において、PHASE[0]を1回用い、かつ、PHASE[1]~PHASE[n]をそれぞれ2回用いる(PHASE[1]を2回用い、PHASE[2]を2回用い、・・・、PHASE[n-1]を2回用い、PHASE[n]を2回用いる)ことで、周期N=2n+1の規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法とすることで、少ない位相変更値で規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法を実現することができ、受信装置は、良好なデータの受信品質を得ることができる。用意する位相変更値が少ないため、送信装置、受信装置の効果を削減できる効果を得ることができる。
式(61)のn+1個の異なる位相変更値PHASE[0], PHASE[1],・・・, PHASE[i],・・・, PHASE[n-1], PHASE[n]において、PHASE[0]を1回用い、かつ、PHASE[1]~PHASE[n]をそれぞれ2回用いる(PHASE[1]を2回用い、PHASE[2]を2回用い、・・・、PHASE[n-1]を2回用い、PHASE[n]を2回用いる)ことで、周期N=2n+1の規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法とすることで、少ない位相変更値で規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法を実現することができ、受信装置は、良好なデータの受信品質を得ることができる。用意する位相変更値が少ないため、送信装置、受信装置の効果を削減できる効果を得ることができる。
本実施の形態の位相変更は、シングルキャリア方式をへの適用に限ったものではなく、マルチキャリア伝送の場合も適用することができる。したがって、例えば、スペクトル拡散通信方式、OFDM方式、SC-FDMA、SC-OFDM方式、非特許文献7等で示されているウェーブレットOFDM方式等を用いた場合についても同様に実施することができる。前述したように、本実施の形態では、位相変更を行う説明として、時間t軸方向で位相変更を行う場合があるが、実施の形態1と同様に、周波数軸方向に位相変更を行うときと同様に、つまり、本実施の形態において、t方向での位相変更の説明において、tをf(f:周波数((サブ)キャリア))に置き換えて、考えることで、本実施の形態で説明した位相変更変更を、周波数方向に位相変更に適用することができることになる。また、本実施の形態の位相変更方法は、実施の形態1の説明と同様に、時間-周波数方向に対する位相変更に対して、適用することも可能である。
(実施の形態C6)
本実施の形態では、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check)符号(ただし、QC-LDPC符号でないLDPC(ブロック)符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号等のブロック符号、ターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの、特に、実施の形態C5で述べた規則的に位相変更値を切り替える位相変更方法を用いたときについて詳しく説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと位相との関係について説明する。
変調方式がQPSKのとき、1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数6000ビットを送信するための上記で述べた1500スロットにおいて、位相変更値P[0]を使用するスロットが300スロット、位相変更値P[1]を使用するスロットが300スロット、位相変更値P[2]を使用するスロットが300スロット、位相変更値P[3]を使用するスロットが300スロット、位相変更値P[4]を使用するスロットが300スロットである必要がある。これは、使用する位相変更値にかたよりがあると、多くの数を使用した位相変更値の影響が大きいデータの受信品質となるからである。
<条件#C01>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=K2n、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#C02>
2×G0=G1=・・・=Gi=・・・=Gn、つまり、2×G0=Ga、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
そして、通信システムが、複数の変調方式をサポートしており、サポートしている変調方式から選択して使用する場合、サポートしている変調方式において、<条件#C01>(<条件#C02>)が成立するとよいことになる。
<条件#C03>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C03>を別の表現にすると、以下の条件となる。
<条件#C04>
GaとGbの差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga―Gb|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0とGaの差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0―Ga|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図3の送信装置および図12の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと位相との関係について説明する。
<条件#C05>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=K2n、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,2n-1,2n(iは0以上2n以下の整数))、位相変更値P[2n] を使用する回数をK2n,1としたとき、
<条件#C06>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=K2n,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,2n-1,2n(iは0以上2n以下の整数))、位相変更値P[2n] を使用する回数をK2n,2としたとき、
<条件#C07>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=K2n,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
<条件#C08>
2×G0=G1=・・・=Gi=・・・=Gn、つまり、2×G0=Ga、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値PHASE[0]を使用する回数をG0,1, 位相変更値PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相変更値PHASE[i]を使用する回数をGi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,n-1,n(iは0以上n以下の整数))、位相変更値PHASE[n] を使用する回数をGn,1としたとき、
<条件#C09>
2×G0,1=G1,1=・・・=Gi,1=・・・=Gn,1、つまり、2×G0,1=Ga,1、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値PHASE[0]を使用する回数をG0,2, 位相変更値PHASE[1]を使用する回数をG1,2、位相変更値PHASE[i]を使用する回数をGi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,n-1,n(iは0以上n以下の整数))、位相変更値PHASE[n] を使用する回数をGn,2としたとき、
<条件#C10>
2×G0,2=G1,2=・・・=Gi,2=・・・=Gn,2、つまり、2×G0,2=Ga,2、(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数))
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#C05><条件#C06><条件#C07>(<条件#C08><条件#C09><条件#C10>)を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#C05><条件#C06><条件#C07>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#C11>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n((aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数))、a≠b)
<条件#C12>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n((aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数))、a≠b)
<条件#C13>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・, 2n-1,2n(aは0以上2n以下の整数、bは0以上2n以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C11><条件#C12><条件#C13>を別の表現にすると、以下の条件となる。
<条件#C14>
GaとGbの差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga―Gb|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n((aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数))、a≠b)
および
2×G0とGaの差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0―Ga|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは、1以上n以下の整数))
<条件#C15>
Ga,1とGb,1の差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga,1―Gb,1|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0,1とGa,1の差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0,1―Ga,1|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは、1以上n以下の整数))
<条件#C16>
Ga,2とGb,2の差は0または1または2、つまり、|Ga,2―Gb,2|は0または1または2
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは1以上n以下の整数、bは1以上n以下の整数)、a≠b)
および
2×G0,2とGa,2の差は0または1または2、つまり、|2×G0,2―Ga,2|は0または1または2
(for∀a、ただし、a =1,2,・・・, n-1,n(aは、1以上n以下の整数))
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと位相変更値の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相変更値にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
なお、空間多重MIMO伝送方式とは、非特許文献3に示されているように、選択した変調方式でマッピングした信号s1、s2をそれぞれ異なるアンテナから送信する方法であり、プリコーディング行列が固定のMIMO伝送方式とは、プリコーディングのみを行う(位相変更を行わない)方式である。また、時空間ブロック符号化方式とは、非特許文献9、16、17に示されている伝送方式である。1ストリームのみ送信とは、選択した変調方式でマッピングした信号s1の信号を所定の処理を行いアンテナから送信する方法である。
(実施の形態C7)
本実施の形態では、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check)符号(ただし、QC-LDPC符号でないLDPC(ブロック)符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号等のブロック符号、ターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの、実施の形態A1、実施の形態C6を一般化させた場合について説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
そして、図4の送信装置では、2つのストリームを同時に送信することになるため、変調方式がQPSKのとき、前述の3000シンボルは、s1に1500シンボル、s2に1500シンボル割り当てられることになるため、s1で送信する1500シンボルとs2で送信する1500シンボルを送信するために1500スロット(ここでは「スロット」と名付ける。)が必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと位相との関係について説明する。
<条件#C17>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#C17>を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#C17>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#C18>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図3の送信装置および図12の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと位相との関係について説明する。
<条件#C19>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、位相変更値P[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,1としたとき、
<条件#C20>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=KN-1,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相変更値P[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相変更値P[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相変更値P[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、位相変更値P[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,2としたとき、
<条件#C21>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=KN-1,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#C19><条件#C20><条件#C21>を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#C19><条件#C20><条件#C21>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#C22>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C23>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#C24>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと位相変更値の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相変更値にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
なお、空間多重MIMO伝送方式とは、非特許文献3に示されているように、選択した変調方式でマッピングした信号s1、s2をそれぞれ異なるアンテナから送信する方法であり、プリコーディング行列が固定のMIMO伝送方式とは、プリコーディングのみを行う(位相変更を行わない)方式である。また、時空間ブロック符号化方式とは、非特許文献9、16、17に示されている伝送方式である。1ストリームのみ送信とは、選択した変調方式でマッピングした信号s1の信号を所定の処理を行いアンテナから送信する方法である。
(実施の形態D1)
本実施の形態では、まず、実施の形態1の変形例について説明する。図67は、本実施の形態における送信装置の構成の一例であり、図3と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付しており、また、以降では、図3での説明と同様に動作素部部分については、説明を省略する。そして、図67が図3と異なる点は、重み付け合成部の直後にベースバンド信号入れ替え部6702が挿入されている部分である。したがって、以降では、ベースバンド信号入れ替え部6702周辺の動作の動作を中心に説明を行う。
あるいは、上記式(62)において、αは、
また、プリコーディング行列は、式(62)に限ったものではなく、
なお、変調方式、誤り訂正符号、その符号化率のいずれかを変更したときは、使用するプリコーディング行列を設定、変更し、そのプリコーディング行列を固定的に使用してもよい。
このとき、ベースバンド信号入れ替え部6702は、ベースバンド成分の入れ替えを行い、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
とし、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ1、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ2から、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信する、というように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)に相当する変調信号と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)を異なるアンテナから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信するとしてもよい。また、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i)、直交成分をQp2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i)、直交成分をQp1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i)、直交成分をIp1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i)、直交成分をIp2(i)
としてもよい。また、上述では、重み付け合成後の信号309Aおよび重み付け合成後の信号316Bの同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えについて説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、2つの信号より多い信号同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えを行うことも可能である。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をIp1(i+v)、直交成分をQp2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をIp2(i+w)、直交成分をQp1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2(i)の同相成分をQp2(i+w)、直交成分をIp1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1(i)の同相成分をQp1(i+v)、直交成分をIp2(i+w)
重み付け合成後の信号309A(p1(i))の同相I成分Ip1(i)、直交Q成分をQp1(i)とあらわし、重み付け合成後の信号316B(p2(i))の同相I成分Ip2(i)、直交Q成分をQp2(i)とあらわす。そして、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701A(q1(i))の同相I成分Iq1(i)、直交Q成分をQq1(i)とあらわし、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701B(q2(i))の同相I成分Iq2(i)、直交Q成分をQq2(i)とあらわす。
そして、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701A(q1(i))に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ312A、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701B(q2(i))に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ312Bから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信する、というように、入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701A(q1(i))に相当する変調信号と入れ替え後ベースバンド信号6701B(q2(i))相当する変調信号を異なるアンテナから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信することになる。
なお、図67は、図3のように、符号化器が複数ある場合で説明したが、図67に対し、図4のように符号化器と分配部を具備し、分配部が出力する信号をそれぞれ、インタリーバの入力信号とするようにし、それ以降は、図67の構成を踏襲する場合についても、上述と同様に動作させることができる。
シンボル501_1は、送信装置が送信する変調信号z1(t){ただし、tは時間}のチャネル変動を推定するためのシンボルである。シンボル502_1は変調信号z1(t)が(時間軸における)シンボル番号uに送信するデータシンボル、シンボル503_1は変調信号z1(t)がシンボル番号u+1に送信するデータシンボルである。
このとき、z1(t)におけるシンボルとz2(t)におけるシンボルにおいて、同一時刻(同一時間)のシンボルは、同一(共通)の周波数を用いて、送信アンテナから送信されることになる。
図5において、504#1、504#2は送信装置における送信アンテナ、505#1、505#2は受信装置における受信アンテナを示しており、送信装置は、変調信号z1(t)を送信アンテナ504#1、変調信号z2(t)を送信アンテナ504#2から送信する。このとき、変調信号z1(t)および変調信号z2(t)は、同一(共通の)周波数(帯域)を占有しているものとする。送信装置の各送信アンテナと受信装置の各アンテナのチャネル変動をそれぞれh11(t)、h12(t)、h21(t)、h22(t)とし、受信装置の受信アンテナ505#1が受信した受信信号をr1(t)、受信装置の受信アンテナ505#2が受信した受信信号をr2(t)とすると、以下の関係式が成立する。
規則的な位相変更の周期は4に限ったものではない。この周期の数が多くなればその分だけ、受信装置の受信性能(より正確には誤り訂正性能)の向上を促すことができる可能性がある(周期が大きければよいというわけではないが、2のような小さい値は避ける方がよい可能性が高い。)。
LOS環境では、特殊なプリコーディング行列を用いると、受信品質が大きく改善する可能性があるが、直接波の状況により、その特殊なプリコーディング行列は受信した際の直接波の位相、振幅成分により異なる。しかし、LOS環境には、ある規則があり、この規則に従い送信信号の位相を規則的に変更すれば、データの受信品質が大きく改善する。本発明は、LOS環境を改善する信号処理方法を提案している。
送信装置で送信された変調信号z1におけるチャネル変動推定部705_1は、ベースバンド信号704_Xを入力とし、図5におけるチャネル推定用のリファレンスシンボル501_1を抽出し、式(66)のh11に相当する値を推定し、チャネル推定信号706_1を出力する。
無線部703_Yは、アンテナ701_Yで受信された受信信号702_Yを入力とし、周波数変換、直交復調等の処理を施し、ベースバンド信号704_Yを出力する。
送信装置で送信された変調信号z2におけるチャネル変動推定部707_2は、ベースバンド信号704_Yを入力とし、図5におけるチャネル推定用のリファレンスシンボル501_2を抽出し、式(66)のh22に相当する値を推定し、チャネル推定信号708_2を出力する。
信号処理部711は、ベースバンド信号704_X、704_Y、チャネル推定信号706_1、706_2、708_1、708_2、及び、送信装置が通知した送信方法の情報に関する信号710を入力とし、検波、復号を行い、受信データ712_1および712_2を出力する。
INNER MIMO検波部803は、信号処理方法の情報に関する信号820を入力とし、この信号を利用して、反復検波・復号を行うことになるがその動作について説明する。
<初期検波の場合>
INNER MIMO検波部803は、ベースバンド信号801X、チャネル推定信号群802X、ベースバンド信号801Y、チャネル推定信号群802Yを入力とする。ここでは、変調信号(ストリーム)s1、変調信号(ストリーム)s2の変調方式が16QAMとして説明する。
INNER MIMO検波部803は、E(b0,b1,b2,b3,b4,b5,b6,b7)を信号804として出力する。
デインタリーバ(807A)は、対数尤度信号806Aを入力とし、インタリーバ(図67のインタリーバ(304A))に対応するデインタリーブを行い、デインタリーブ後の対数尤度信号808Aを出力する。
対数尤度比算出部809Aは、デインタリーブ後の対数尤度信号808Aを入力とし、図67の符号化器302Aで符号化されたビットの対数尤度比(LLR:Log-Likelihood Ratio)を算出し、対数尤度比信号810Aを出力する。
Soft-in/soft-outデコーダ811Aは、対数尤度比信号810Aを入力とし、復号を行い、復号後の対数尤度比812Aを出力する。
<反復復号(反復検波)の場合、反復回数k>
インタリーバ(813A)は、k-1回目のsoft-in/soft-outデコードで得られた復号後の対数尤度比812Aを入力とし、インタリーブを行い、インタリーブ後の対数尤度比814Aを出力する。このとき、インタリーブ(813A)のインタリーブのパターンは、図67のインタリーバ(304A)のインタリーブパターンと同様である。
なお、図8では、反復検波を行う場合の、信号処理部の構成について示したが、反復検波は必ずしも良好な受信品質を得る上で必須の構成ではなく、反復検波のみに必要とする構成部分、インタリーバ813A、813Bを有していない構成でもよい。このとき、INNER MIMO検波部803は、反復的な検波を行わないことになる。
図9は、図8と異なる信号処理部の構成であり、図67に対し、図4の符号化器、分配部を適用した送信装置が送信した変調信号のための信号処理部である。図8と異なる点は、soft-in/soft-outデコーダの数であり、soft-in/soft-outデコーダ901は、対数尤度比信号810A、810Bを入力とし、復号を行い、復号後の対数尤度比902を出力する。分配部903は、復号後の対数尤度比902を入力とし、分配を行う。それ以外の部分については、図8と同様の動作となる。
また、本実施の形態では、符号化として、特にLDPC符号に限ったものではなく、また、復号方法についても、soft-in/soft-outデコーダとして、sum-product復号を例に限ったものではなく、他のsoft-in/soft-outの復号方法、例えば、BCJRアルゴリズム、SOVAアルゴリズム、Max-log-MAPアルゴリズムなどがある。詳細については、非特許文献6に示されている。
図70は、OFDM方式を用いたときの送信装置の構成を示している。図70において、図3、図12、図67と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付した。
OFDM方式関連処理部1201Aは、重み付け後の信号309Aを入力とし、OFDM方式関連の処理を施し、送信信号1202Aを出力する。同様に、OFDM方式関連処理部1201Bは、位相変更後の信号309Bを入力とし、送信信号1202Bを出力する。
シリアルパラレル変換部1302Aは、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号1301A(図70の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号6701Aに相当する)シリアルパラレル変換を行い、パラレル信号1303Aを出力する。
逆高速フーリエ変換部1306Aは、並び換え後の信号1305Aを入力とし、逆高速フーリエ変換を施し、逆フーリエ変換後の信号1307Aを出力する。
無線部1308Aは、逆フーリエ変換後の信号1307Aを入力とし、周波数変換、増幅等の処理を行い、変調信号1309Aを出力し、変調信号1309Aはアンテナ1310Aから電波として出力される。
並び換え部1304Bは、パラレル信号1303Bを入力とし、並び換えを行い、並び換え後の信号1305Bを出力する。なお、並び換えについては、後で詳しく述べる。
無線部1308Bは、逆フーリエ変換後の信号1307Bを入力とし、周波数変換、増幅等の処理を行い、変調信号1309Bを出力し、変調信号1309Bはアンテナ1310Bから電波として出力される。
同様に、シリアルパラレル変換部1302Bが入力とする位相が変更された後の信号1301Bのシンボルに対し、順番に、#0、#1、#2、#3、・・・と番号をふる。ここでは、周期4の場合を考えているので、#0、#1、#2、#3はそれぞれ異なる位相変更を行っていることになり、#0、#1、#2、#3が一周期分となる。同様に考えると、#4n、#4n+1、#4n+2、#4n+3(nは0以上の整数)はそれぞれ異なる位相変更を行っていることになり、#4n、#4n+1、#4n+2、#4n+3が一周期分となる。
そして、図14(B)に示すシンボル群1402は、図69に示す位相変更方法を用いたときの1周期分のシンボルであり、シンボル#0は図69の時刻uの位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、シンボル#1は図69の時刻u+1の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、シンボル#2は図69の時刻u+2の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、シンボル#3は図69の時刻u+3の位相を用いたときのシンボルである。したがって、シンボル#xにおいて、x mod 4(xを4で割ったときの余り、したがって、mod:modulo)が0のとき、シンボル#xは図69の時刻uの位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、x mod 4が1のとき、シンボル#xは図69の時刻u+1の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、x mod 4が2のとき、シンボル#xは図69の時刻u+2の位相を用いたときのシンボルであり、x mod 4が3のとき、シンボル#xは図69の時刻u+3の位相を用いたときのシンボルである。
このように、OFDM方式などのマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いた場合、シングルキャリア伝送のときとは異なり、シンボルを周波数軸方向に並べることができるという特徴を持つことになる。そして、シンボルの並べ方については、図14のような並べ方に限ったものではない。他の例について、図15、図16を用いて説明する。
周波数軸方向のシンボル群2220についても同様に、#4のシンボルでは時刻uの位相を用いた位相変更、#5では時刻u+1の位相を用いた位相変更、#6では時刻u+2の位相を用いた位相変更、#7では時刻u+3の位相を用いた位相変更を行うものとする。
時間軸方向のシンボル群2201では、#0のシンボルでは時刻uの位相を用いた位相変更、#9では時刻u+1の位相を用いた位相変更、#18では時刻u+2の位相を用いた位相変更、#27では時刻u+3の位相を用いた位相変更を行うものとする。
時間軸方向のシンボル群2203では、#20のシンボルでは時刻uの位相を用いた位相変更、#29では時刻u+1の位相を用いた位相変更、#2では時刻u+2の位相を用いた位相変更、#11では時刻u+3の位相を用いた位相変更を行うものとする。
図22においての特徴は、例えば#11のシンボルに着目した場合、同一時刻の周波数軸方向の両隣のシンボル(#10と#12)は、ともに#11とは異なる位相を用いて位相の変更を行っているとともに、#11のシンボルの同一キャリアの時間軸方向の両隣のシンボル(#2と#20)は、ともに#11とは異なる位相を用いて位相の変更を行っていることである。そして、これは#11のシンボルに限ったものではなく、周波数軸方向および時間軸方向ともに両隣にシンボルが存在するシンボルすべてにおいて#11のシンボルと同様の特徴をもつことになる。これにより、効果的に位相を変更していることになり、直接波の定常的な状況に対する影響を受けづらくなるため、データの受信品質が改善される可能性が高くなる。
図31は、規則的に位相を変更する送信方式において、OFDM方式のようなマルチキャリア方式を用いたときの、時間-周波数軸における信号の一部のシンボルのフレーム構成の一例を示している。
キャリア2において、時刻$2に時間的に最も隣接するシンボル、つまりキャリア2の時刻$1のシンボル3103と時刻$3のシンボル3101のそれぞれのチャネル状態は、キャリア2、時刻$2のシンボル610aのチャネル状態と、非常に相関が高い。
上述したように、シンボル3101、3102、3103、3104のそれぞれのチャネル状態は、シンボル3100のチャネル状態との相関が非常に高い。
この受信側で高いデータの受信品質が得られる条件として、条件#D1-1、条件#D1-2が考えられる。
<条件#D1-1>
図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応する入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYにおけるそれぞれの入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
<条件#D1-2>
図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら3つのデータシンボルに対応する入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、つまり、時間X・キャリアY、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれの入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
そして、<条件#D1-1>を満たすデータシンボルが存在するとよい。同様に、<条件#D1-2>を満たすデータシンボルが存在するとよい。
当該<条件#D1-1><条件#D1-2>が導出される理由は以下の通りである。
送信信号においてあるシンボル(以降、シンボルAと呼称する)があり、当該シンボルAに時間的に隣接したシンボルそれぞれのチャネル状態は、上述したとおり、シンボルAのチャネル状態との相関が高い。
したがって、周波数的に隣接した3シンボルで、異なる位相を用いていると、LOS環境において、シンボルAが劣悪な受信品質(SNRとしては高い受信品質を得ているものの、直接波の位相関係が劣悪な状況であるため受信品質が悪い状態)であっても、残りのシンボルAに隣接する2シンボルでは、良好な受信品質を得ることができる可能性が非常に高く、その結果、誤り訂正復号後は良好な受信品質を得ることができる。
<条件#D1-3>
図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対し、規則的に位相を変更する送信方法において、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送方式を用いている場合、時間X・キャリアYがデータ伝送用のシンボル(以下、データシンボルと呼称する)であり、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYがいずれもデータシンボルであり、かつ、周波数軸方向で隣接するシンボル、即ち、時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1がいずれもデータシンボルである場合、これら5つのデータシンボルに対応する入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、つまり、時間X・キャリアYおよび時間X-1・キャリアYおよび時間X+1・キャリアYおよび時間X・キャリアY-1および時間X・キャリアY+1におけるそれぞれの入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2では、いずれも異なる位相変更が行われる。
ここで、「異なる位相変更」について、補足を行う。位相変更は、0ラジアンから2πラジアンで定義されることになる。例えば、時間X・キャリアYにおいて、図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対して施す位相変更をejθX,Y、時間X-1・キャリアYにおいて、図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対して施す位相変更をejθX-1,Y、時間X+1・キャリアYにおいて、図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対して施す位相変更をejθX+1,Yとすると、0ラジアン≦θX,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX-1,Y<2π、0ラジアン≦θX+1,Y<2πとなる。したがって、<条件#D1-1>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX+1,Y≠θX-1,Yが成立することになる。同様に考えると、<条件#D1-2>では、θX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX-1,Y+1が成立することになり、<条件#D1-3>では、θX,Y≠θX-1,YかつθX,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX-1,Y≠θX+1,YかつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX-1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y-1かつθX+1,Y≠θX,Y+1かつθX,Y-1≠θX,Y+1が成立することになる。
図31は<条件#D1-3>の例であり、シンボルAに該当するシンボル3100に相当する図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に乗じられている位相と、そのシンボル3100に時間的に隣接するシンボル3101に相当する図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、3103に相当する図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に乗じられている位相と、周波数的に隣接するシンボル3102に相当する図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2、3104に相当する図69の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に乗じられている位相が互いに異なるように配されており、これによって、受信側においてシンボル3100の受信品質が劣悪であろうとも、その隣接するシンボルの受信品質は非常に高くなるため、誤り訂正復号後の高い受信品質を確保できる。
図32を見ればわかるように、いずれのデータシンボルにおいても、その位相が周波数軸方向及び時間軸方向の双方において隣接しあうシンボルに対して変更された位相の度合いは互いに異なる位相変更量となっている。このようにすることで、受信装置における誤り訂正能力を更に向上させることができる。
同様に、図32では、周波数方向で隣接するシンボルにデータシンボルが存在していた場合、<条件#D1-2>がすべてのX、すべてのYで成立している。
同様に、図32では、周波数方向で隣接するシンボルにデータシンボルが存在し、かつ、時間軸方向で隣接するシンボルにデータシンボルが存在していた場合、<条件#D1-3>がすべてのX、すべてのYで成立している。
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1、および、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の両者に位相変更を与える場合、位相変更方法について、いくつかの方法がある。その点について、詳しく説明する。
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更は、図33ように、プリコーディング後の入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更は周期10の1周期分の位相変更する値は一定とし、位相変更する値は、1周期分の番号とともに変更するようにする。(上述のように、図33では、第1の1周期分では、ej0とし、第2の1周期分ではejπ/9、・・・としている。)
以上のようにすることで、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更は周期10であるが、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期は10より大きくすることができるという効果を得ることができる。これにより、受信装置のデータの受信品質が向上する可能性がある。
以上のようにすることで、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更は周期10であるが、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期は30となり入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期を10より大きくすることができるという効果を得ることができる。これにより、受信装置のデータの受信品質が向上する可能性がある。方法2の一つの有効な方法としては、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更の周期をNとし、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更の周期をMとしたとき、特に、NとMが互いに素の関係であると、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1の位相変更と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の位相変更の両者を考慮したときの周期はN×Mと容易に大きな周期に設定することができるという利点があるが、NとMが互いに素の関係でも、周期を大きくすることは可能である。
上記で説明したフレーム構成以外にも、データシンボル間にパイロットシンボル(SP(Scattered Pilot))や制御情報を伝送するシンボルなどが挿入されることも考えられる。この場合の位相変更について詳しく説明する。
図48において重要な点は、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1に対する位相変更は、データシンボル、つまり、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号の入れ替えを施したシンボルに対して施している、また、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対する位相変更は、データシンボル、つまり、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号の入れ替えを施したシンボルに対して施している点である。(ここで、シンボルと記載しているが、ここで記載しているシンボルには、プリコーディングが施されているため、s1のシンボルとs2のシンボルの両者を含んでいることになる。)したがって、z1’に挿入されたパイロットシンボルに対しては、位相変更を施さず、また、z2’に挿入されたパイロットシンボルに対しては、位相変更を施さないことになる。
図50において重要な点は、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1に対する位相変更は、データシンボル、つまり、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替えを施したシンボルに対して施している、また、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2に対する位相変更は、データシンボル、つまり、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替えを施したシンボルに対して施している点である。(ここで、シンボルと記載しているが、ここで記載しているシンボルには、プリコーディングが施されているため、s1のシンボルとs2のシンボルの両者を含んでいることになる。)したがって、z1’に挿入されたパイロットシンボルに対しては、位相変更を施さず、また、z2’に挿入されたパイロットシンボルに対しては、位相変更を施さないことになる。
図51のパイロットシンボル(ヌルシンボル生成を兼ねるものとする)生成部5101は、フレーム構成信号313がパイロットシンボル(かつヌルシンボル)であることをしめしていた場合、パイロットシンボルのベースバンド信号5102A、および5102Bを出力する。
図52は、図48、図50のフレーム構成の変調信号を生成し、送信する送信装置の構成の一例を示しており、図4、図51と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付している。図51に対して追加した位相変更部317Aは、フレーム構成信号313がデータシンボルであるタイミングを示しているときのみ動作することになる。その他については、図51と同様の動作となる。なお、図52では、図67や図70で示したベースバンド信号入れ替え部を図示していないが、図52に対し、図67や図70と同様、重み付け合成部と位相変更部の間にベースバンド信号入れ替え部を挿入すればよい。
選択部5301は、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とし、フレーム構成信号313が示したシンボルのベースバンド信号を選択し、出力する。
同様に、位相変更部5201は、図54のように、複数のベースバンド信号を入力とする。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、データシンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、プリコーディング後のベースバンド信号309Aに対し、位相変更を施す。そして、フレーム構成信号313が、パイロットシンボル(またはヌルシンボル)、または、制御情報シンボルであることを示していた場合、位相変更部5201は、位相変更の動作を停止し、各シンボルのベースバンド信号をそのまま出力する。(解釈としては、「ej0」に相当する位相回転を強制的に行っていると考えればよい。)
上述の説明では、パイロットシンボルと制御シンボルとデータシンボルを例に説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、プリコーディングとは異なる伝送方法、例えば、1アンテナ送信、時空間ブロック符号を用いた伝送方式、等を用いて伝送するシンボルであれば、同様に、位相変更を与えない、ということが重要となり、これとは逆に、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替えを行ったシンボルに対しては、位相変更を行うことが本発明では重要なこととなる。
次に、非特許文献12~非特許文献15に示されているように、QC(Quasi Cyclic) LDPC(Low-Density Prity-Check)符号(QC-LDPC符号でない、LDPC符号であってもよい)、LDPC符号とBCH符号(Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem code)の連接符号、テイルバイティングを用いたターボ符号またはDuo-Binary Turbo Code等のブロック符号を用いたときの規則的に位相を変更する方法について詳しく説明する。ここでは、一例として、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信する場合を例に説明する。ただし、ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等が必要でないとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数(ただし、この中に、以下で記載するような制御情報等が含まれていてもよい。)と一致する。ブロック符号を用いて符号化を行った際、制御情報等(例えば、CRC(cyclic redundancy check)、伝送パラメータ等)が必要であるとき、符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数は、ブロック符号を構成するビット数と制御情報等のビット数の和であることもある。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと乗じる位相との関係について説明する。
ここでは、規則的に位相を変更する方法のために用意する位相変更値(または、位相変更セット)の数を5とする。つまり、上述の送信装置の位相変更部のために、5つの位相変更値(または、位相変更セット)を用意するものとする。(図69のように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2のみに位相変更を行う場合、周期5の位相変更を行うためには、5つの位相変更値を用意すればよい。また、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q1および入れ替え後のベースバンド信号q2の両者に対し位相変更を行う場合、1スロットのために、2つの位相変更値が必要となる。この2つの位相変更値を位相変更セットとよぶ。したがって、この場合、周期5の位相変更を行うためには、5つの位相変更セットを用意すればよい)この5つの位相変更値(または、位相変更セット)をPHASE[0], PHASE[1], PHASE[2],PHASE[3], PHASE[4]とあらわすものとする。
<条件#D1-4>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#D1-4>を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#D1-4>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#D1-5>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
図35は、ブロック符号を用いたとき、2つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図である。図35は、図67の送信装置および図70の送信装置に示したように、s1、s2の2つのストリームを送信し、かつ、送信装置が、2つの符号化器を有している場合の「ブロック符号を用いたとき、1つの符号化後のブロックに必要なシンボル数、スロット数の変化を示した図」である。(このとき、伝送方式としては、シングルキャリア伝送、OFDMのようなマルチキャリア伝送、いずれを用いてもよい。)
図35に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、規則的に位相を変更する方法において、上述で定義したスロットと乗じる位相との関係について説明する。
<条件#D1-6>
K0=K1=・・・=Ki=・・・=KN-1、つまり、Ka=Kb、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第1の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,1, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,1、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,1(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,1としたとき、
<条件#D1-7>
K0,1=K1,1=・・・=Ki,1=・・・=KN-1,1、つまり、Ka,1=Kb,1、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であり、第2の符号化後のブロックを構成するビットをすべて送信する際に、位相PHASE[0]を使用する回数をK0,2, 位相PHASE[1]を使用する回数をK1,2、位相PHASE[i]を使用する回数をKi,2(i=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(iは0以上N-1以下の整数))、 位相PHASE[N-1] を使用する回数をKN-1,2としたとき、
<条件#D1-8>
K0,2=K1,2=・・・=Ki,2=・・・=KN-1,2、つまり、Ka,2=Kb,2、(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
であるとよい。
しかし、複数の変調方式をサポートしている場合、各変調方式により1シンボルで送信することができるビット数が異なるのが一般的であり(場合によっては、同一となることもあり得る。)、場合によっては、<条件#D1-6><条件#D1-7><条件#D1-8>を満たすことができない変調方式が存在することもある。この場合、<条件#D1-6><条件#D1-7><条件#D1-8>にかわり、以下の条件を満たすとよい。
<条件#D1-9>
KaとKbの差は0または1、つまり、|Ka―Kb|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#D1-10>
Ka,1とKb,1の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,1―Kb,1|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
<条件#D1-11>
Ka,2とKb,2の差は0または1、つまり、|Ka,2―Kb,2|は0または1
(for∀a、∀b、ただし、a, b=0,1,2,・・・,N-1(aは0以上N-1以下の整数、bは0以上N-1以下の整数)、a≠b)
以上のように、符号化後のブロックと乗じる位相の関係付けを行うことで、符号化ブロックを伝送するために使用する位相にかたよりがなくなるため、受信装置において、データの受信品質が向上するという効果を得ることができる。
なお、空間多重MIMO伝送方式とは、非特許文献3に示されているように、選択した変調方式でマッピングした信号s1、s2をそれぞれ異なるアンテナから送信する方法であり、プリコーディング行列が固定のMIMO伝送方式とは、プリコーディングのみを行う(位相変更を行わない)方式である。また、時空間ブロック符号化方式とは、非特許文献9、16、17に示されている伝送方式である。1ストリームのみ送信とは、選択した変調方式でマッピングした信号s1の信号を所定の処理を行いアンテナから送信する方法である。
(実施の形態D2)
本実施の形態では、図4の送信装置の場合、図4の送信装置に対しOFDM方式のようなマルチキャリア方式に対応した場合、図67、図70の送信装置に対し図4のように、一つの符号化器と分配部を適用した場合において、本明細書の中で説明した規則的に位相変更を行った場合の位相変更のイニシャライズ方法について説明する。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、図71のようなフレーム構成で、送信装置が、変調信号を送信する場合を考える。図71(a)は、変調信号z1’またはz1(アンテナ312Aで送信)の時間および周波数軸におけるフレーム構成を示している。また、図71(b)は、変調信号z2(アンテナ312Bで送信)の時間および周波数軸におけるフレーム構成を示している。このとき、変調信号z1’またはz1が用いている周波数(帯)と変調信号z2が用いている周波数(帯)は同一であるものとし、同一時刻に変調信号z1’またはz1、と、変調信号z2が存在することになる。
同様に、第2符号化ブロックでは、変調方式としてQPSKを用いた場合に使用するスロット数を示しており、第2符号化ブロックを伝送するためには、1500スロットが必要となる。
そして、本明細書で説明したように、変調信号z1、つまり、アンテナ312Aで送信する変調信号に対しては、位相変更を行わず、変調信号z2、つまり、アンテナ312Bで送信する変調信号に対しては、位相変更を行う場合を考える。このとき、図72、図73では、位相変更を行う方法について示している。
次に、第2符号化ブロックの各スロットに対し、位相変更を適用することになる。本明細書では、マルチキャスト通信、放送に適用する場合を想定しているので、ある受信端末は、第1符号化ブロックを必要とせず、第2符号化ブロックのみ抽出する場合が考えられる。この場合、第1符号化ブロックの最後のスロットを送信するために位相変更値#0を用いたからといって、第2符号化ブロックを伝送するために、最初に位相変更値#1を用いたものとする。すると、
(a):前述の端末は、第1符号化ブロックがどのように送信されたかを監視、つまり、第1符号化ブロックの最後のスロットの送信に位相変更値がどのパターンであるかを監視し、第2符号化ブロックの最初のスロットに使用する位相変更値を推定する、
(b):(a)を行わないために、送信装置は、第2符号化ブロックの最初のスロットに使用する位相変更値の情報を伝送する
という方法が考えられる。(a)の場合、端末は第1符号化ブロックの伝送を監視する必要があるため消費電力が増大してしまい、(b)の場合、データの伝送効率の低下を招くことになる。
以上のようにすることで、(a)、(b)で発生する課題を抑制することができるという効果を得ることができる。
(実施の形態D3)
なお、上述の各実施の形態では、重み付け合成部がプリコーディングに使用するプリコーディング行列を複素数で表現しているが、プリコーディング行列を実数で表現することもできる。
(実施の形態E1)
本実施の形態では、(1)図4の送信装置の場合、(2)図4の送信装置に対してOFDM方式のようなマルチキャリア方式に対応した場合、(3)図67、図70の送信装置に対して図4のように一つの符号化器と分配部を適用した場合にの3つの場合のどれにも適用できる、本明細書の中で説明した規則的に位相変更を行った場合の位相変更のイニシャライズ方法について説明する。
図34に示すように、ブロック符号における1つの符号化後のブロックを構成するビット数を6000ビットであるとする。この6000ビットを送信するためには、変調方式がQPSKのとき3000シンボル、16QAMのとき1500シンボル、64QAMのとき1000シンボルが必要となる。
次に、図71のようなフレーム構成で、送信装置が、変調信号を送信する場合を考える。図71(a)は、変調信号z1’またはz1(アンテナ312Aで送信)の時間および周波数軸におけるフレーム構成を示している。また、図71(b)は、変調信号z2(アンテナ312Bで送信)の時間および周波数軸におけるフレーム構成を示している。このとき、変調信号z1’またはz1が用いている周波数(帯)と変調信号z2が用いている周波数(帯)は同一であるものとし、同一時刻に変調信号z1’またはz1、と、変調信号z2が存在することになる。
同様に、第2符号化ブロックでは、変調方式としてQPSKを用いた場合に使用するスロット数を示しており、第2符号化ブロックを伝送するためには、1500スロットが必要となる。
そして、本明細書で説明したように、変調信号z1、つまり、アンテナ312Aで送信する変調信号に対しては、位相変更を行わず、変調信号z2、つまり、アンテナ312Bで送信する変調信号に対しては、位相変更を行う場合を考える。このとき、図72、図73では、位相変更を行う方法について示している。
次に、第2符号化ブロックの各スロットに対し、位相変更を適用することになる。本明細書では、マルチキャスト通信、放送に適用する場合を想定しているので、ある受信端末は、第1符号化ブロックを必要とせず、第2符号化ブロックのみ抽出する場合が考えられる。この場合、第1符号化ブロックの最後のスロットを送信するために位相変更値#0を用いたからといって、第2符号化ブロックを伝送するために、最初に位相変更値#1を用いたものとする。すると、
(a)前述の端末は、第1符号化ブロックがどのように送信されたかを監視、つまり、第1符号化ブロックの最後のスロットの送信に位相変更値がどのパターンであるかを監視し、第2符号化ブロックの最初のスロットに使用する位相変更値を推定する、
(b)(a)を行わないために、送信装置は、第2符号化ブロックの最初のスロットに使用する位相変更値の情報を伝送する
という方法が考えられる。(a)の場合、端末は第1符号化ブロックの伝送を監視する必要があるため消費電力が増大してしまい、(b)の場合、データの伝送効率の低下を招くことになる。
以上のようにすることで、上述の(a)、(b)で発生する課題を抑制することができるという効果を得ることができる。
図74は、DVB-T2規格における、放送局が送信する信号のフレーム構成の概要を示している。DVB-T2規格では、OFDM方式を用いているため、時間―周波数軸にフレームが構成されている。図74は、時間-周波数軸におけるフレーム構成を示しており、フレームは、P1 Signalling data(7401)、L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)、L1 Post-Signalling data(7403)、Common PLP(7404)、PLP#1~#N(7405_1~7405_N)で構成されている(PLP:Physical Layer Pipe)。 (ここで、L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)、L1 Post-Signalling data(7403)をP2シンボルと呼ぶ。)このように、P1 Signalling data(7401)、L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)、L1 Post-Signalling data(7403)、Common PLP(7404)、PLP#1~#N(7405_1~7405_N)で構成されているフレームをT2フレームと名付けており、フレーム構成の一つの単位となっている。
L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)により、送信フレームで使用するガードインターバルの情報、PAPR(Peak to Average Power Ratio)を削減するために行う信号処理方法に関する情報、L1 Post-Signalling dataを伝送する際の変調方式、誤り訂正方式(FEC: Forward Error Correction)、誤り訂正方式の符号化率の情報、L1 Post-Signalling dataのサイズおよび情報サイズの情報、パイロットパターンの情報、セル(周波数領域)固有番号の情報、ノーマルモードおよび拡張モード(ノーマルモードと拡張モードでは、データ伝送に用いるサブキャリア数が異なる。)のいずれの方式を用いているかの情報等を伝送する。
図74のフレーム構成では、P1 Signalling data(7401)、L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)、L1 Post-Signalling data(7403)、Common PLP(7404)、PLP#1~#N(7405_1~6105_N)は時分割で送信されているように記載しているが、実際は、同一時刻に2種類以上の信号が存在している。その例を図75に示す。図75に示すように、同一時刻に、L1 Pre-Signalling data、L1 Post-Signalling data、Common PLPが存在していたり、同一時刻に、PLP#1、PLP#2が存在したりすることもある。つまり、各信号は、時分割および周波数分割を併用し、フレームが構成されている。
PLP信号生成部7602は、PLP用の送信データ7601(複数PLP用のデータ)、制御信号7609を入力とし、制御信号7609に含まれる各PLPの誤り訂正符号化の情報、変調方式の情報等の情報に基づき、誤り訂正符号化、変調方式に基づくマッピングを行い、PLPの(直交)ベースバンド信号7603を出力する。
制御信号生成部7608は、P1シンボル用の送信データ7607、P2シンボル用送信データ7604を入力とし、図74における各シンボル群(P1 Signalling data(7401)、L1 Pre-Signalling data(7402)、L1 Post-Signalling data(7403)、Common PLP(7404)、PLP#1~#N(7405_1~7405_N))の送信方法(誤り訂正符号、誤り訂正符号の符号化率、変調方式、ブロック長、フレーム構成、規則的にプリコーディング行列を切り替える送信方法を含む選択した送信方法、パイロットシンボル挿入方法、IFFT(Inverse Fast Fourier Transform)/FFTの情報等、PAPR削減方法の情報、ガードインターバル挿入方法の情報)の情報を制御信号7609として出力する。
ここで特徴的な点は、送信方法として、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う送信方法が選択されたとき、信号処理部は、図6、図25、図26、図27、図28、図29、図69と同様に、プリコーディング後(またはプリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に位相変更を行う処理を行い、この信号処理を行われた信号が、信号処理後の変調信号1(7613_1)および信号処理後の変調信号2(7613_2)となる。
パイロット挿入部7614_2は、信号処理後の変調信号2(7613_2)、制御信号7609を入力とし、制御信号7609に含まれるパイロットシンボルの挿入方法に関する情報に基づき、信号処理後の変調信号2(7613_2)にパイロットシンボルを挿入し、パイロットシンボル挿入後の変調信号7615_2を出力する。
IFFT部7616_2は、パイロットシンボル挿入後の変調信号7615_2、制御信号7609を入力とし、制御信号7609に含まれるIFFTの方法の情報に基づき、IFFTを施し、IFFT後の信号7617_2を出力する。
PAPR削減部7618_2は、IFFT後の信号7617_2、制御信号7609を入力とし、制御信号7609に含まれるPAPR削減に関する情報に基づき、IFFT後の信号7617_2にPAPR削減のための処理を施し、PAPR削減後の信号7619_2を出力する。
ガードインターバル挿入部7620_2は、PAPR削減後の信号7619_2、制御信号7609を入力とし、制御信号7609に含まれるガードインターバルの挿入方法に関する情報に基づき、PAPR削減後の信号7619_2にガードインターバルを挿入し、ガードインターバル挿入後の信号7621_2を出力する。
無線処理部7624_2は、P1シンボル用処理後の信号7623_2、制御信号7609を入力とし、周波数変換、増幅等の処理が施され、送信信号7625_2を出力する。そして、送信信号7625_2は、アンテナ7626_2から電波として出力される。
つまり、PLP$1にとって、時刻T、キャリア3は第1番目のスロットであり、第2番目のスロットは時刻T、キャリア4であり、第3番目のスロットは時刻T、キャリア5であり、・・・、第7番目のスロットは時刻T+1、キャリア1であり、第8番目のスロットは時刻T+1、キャリア2であり、第9番目のスロットは時刻T+1、キャリア3であり、・・・、第14番目のスロットは時刻T+1、キャリア8であり、第15番目のスロットは時刻T+2、キャリア1であり、・・・、となる。
つまり、PLP$Kにとって、時刻S、キャリア4は第1番目のスロットであり、第2番目のスロットは時刻S、キャリア5であり、第3番目のスロットは時刻S、キャリア6であり、・・・、第5番目のスロットは時刻S、キャリア8であり、第9番目のスロットは時刻S+1、キャリア1であり、第10番目のスロットは時刻S+1、キャリア2であり、・・・、第16番目のスロットは時刻S+1、キャリア8であり、第17番目のスロットは時刻S+2、キャリア1であり、・・・、となる。
このとき、図71~図73を用いて説明したときと同様に、PLP$1の先頭のスロットである、時刻T、キャリア3(図77の7701)のスロットは、位相変更値#0を用いて位相変更を行うものとする。同様に、PLP$K-1の最後のスロットである、時刻S、キャリア3(図77の7705)をスロットで用いている、位相変更値の番号にかかわらず、PLP$Kの先頭のスロットである、時刻S、キャリア4(図77の7703)のスロットは、プリコーディング行列#0を用いて位相変更を行うものとする。(ただし、これまで説明したように、位相変更を行う前に、プリコーディング(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え)が行われているものとする。)
また、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に、規則的に位相変更を行う送信方法を用いて送信する他のPLPの先頭のスロットは、プリコーディング行列#0を用いてプリコーディングを行うものとする。
当然であるが、受信装置は、P1シンボル、P2シンボル、制御シンボル群等の制御シンボルに含む各PLPが使用しているスロットの情報から必要としているPLPを抽出して復調(信号分離、信号検波を含む)、誤り訂正復号を行うことになる。また、受信装置は、プリコーディング後(または、プリコーディングおよびベースバンド信号入れ替え後)の信号に、規則的に位相変更を行う送信方法の位相変更規則について、予め知っており、(複数の規則がある場合は、送信装置が、使用する規則の情報を伝送し、受信装置はその情報を得て、使用している規則を知ることになる。)各PLPの先頭のスロットの番号に基づいて、位相変更の切り替え規則のタイミングを合わせることで、情報シンボルの復調(信号分離、信号検波を含む)が可能となる。
同様に、第Yのメインフレームの複数の変調信号を送信するサブフレームの最初のPLPであるPLP$1’の先頭のスロット(図79の7901(時刻T’、キャリア7のスロット))は、位相変更値#0を用いて位相変更を行うものとする。
このようにすることも、実施の形態D2で説明した(a)および(b)の課題を抑制するためには重要となる。
(実施の形態F1)
実施の形態1-4、実施の形態A1、実施の形態C1-C7、実施の形態D1-D3及び実施の形態E1で説明したプリコーディング後の変調信号に対し、規則的に位相を変更する方法は、I-Q平面にマッピングされた任意のベースバンド信号s1とs2に対して適用可能である。そのため、実施の形態1-4、実施の形態A1、実施の形態C1-C7、実施の形態D1-D3及び実施の形態E1では、ベースバンド信号s1とs2について詳細に説明していない。一方、例えば、プリコーディング後の変調信号に対し、規則的に位相を変更する方法を、誤り訂正符号化されたデータから生成されたベースバンド信号s1とs2に対して適用する場合、s1とs2の平均電力(平均値)を制御することによりさらに良好な受信品質を得られる可能性がある。本実施の形態では、誤り訂正符号化されたデータから生成されたベースバンド信号s1とs2に対して、プリコーディング後の変調信号に対し、規則的に位相を変更する方法を適用する場合の、s1とs2の平均電力(平均値)の設定方法について述べる。
s1の変調方式がQPSKであるので、s1は1シンボルあたり2ビットのデータを伝送することになる。この伝送する2ビットをb0、b1と名付ける。これに対して、s2の変調方式は16QAMであるので、s2は1シンボルあたり4ビットのデータを伝送することになる。この伝送する4ビットをb2、b3、b4、b5と名付ける。送信装置は、s1の1シンボルとs2の1シンボルで構成される1スロットを送信するので、1スロットあたり、b0、b1、b2、b3、b4、b5の6ビットのデータを伝送することになる。
受信装置がこの状況で誤り訂正復号(例えば、通信システムがLDPC符号を用いている場合、sum-product復号等の信頼度伝播復号)を行った場合、「b0およびb1の対数尤度比の絶対値が、b2からb5の対数尤度比の絶対値より大きい」という信頼度の差により、b2からb5の対数尤度比の絶対値の影響を受け、受信装置のデータの受信品質が劣化するという課題が発生する。
そこで、「s1の平均電力(平均値)とs2の平均電力(平均値)を異なるようにする」ことを考える。図84、図85に、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)、および、重み付け合成(プリコーディング)部に関連する信号処理部の構成の例を示している。なお、図84において、図3、図6と同様に動作するものについては同一符号を付した。また、図85において、図3、図6、図84と同様に動作するものについては同一符号を付した。
(例1)
まず、図84を用いて、動作の一例を説明する。なお、s1(t)は、変調方式QPSKのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図81のとおりであり、hは式(78)のとおりである。また、s2(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図80のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。なお、tは時間であり、本実施の形態では、時間軸方向を例として説明する。
例えば、QPSKの平均電力と16QAMの平均電力の比1:u2についてuを、
ただし、2つの異なる変調方式のI-Q平面における信号点の最小ユークリッド距離を等しくするという条件は、あくまで、QPSKの平均電力と16QAMの平均電力との比を設定する方法の一例である。例えば、誤り訂正符号化に用いる誤り訂正符号の符号長や符号化率等のその他の条件によっては、パワー変更のための値uの値を2つの異なる変調方式のI-Q平面における信号点の最小ユークリッド距離が等しくなる値とは、異なる値(大きな値や小さな値)に設定する方が、良好な受信品質を得られる可能性がある。また、受信時に得られる候補信号点の最初距離を大きくすること、を考えると、例えば、
従来、送信電力制御は、一般的に、通信相手からのフィードバック情報に基づいて、送信電力の制御を行っている。本実施の形態では、通信相手からのフィードバック情報とは関係なく、送信電力を制御している点が、本発明の特徴となり、この点について、詳しく説明する。
(例1-1)
送信装置が複数のブロック長(符号化後の1ブロックを構成しているビット数であり、符号長とも呼ばれる)の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号のブロック長に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択されたブロック長に応じてパワー変更のための値uを設定することである。ここでは、ブロック長Xに応じたパワー変更のための値をuLXという形で記載することとする。
上述では、3つの符号長の場合を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、送信装置において、符号長が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値が2つ以上存在し、符号長を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値の中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることが重要な点である。
(例1-2)
送信装置が複数の符号化率の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号の符号化率に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択された符号化率に応じてパワー変更のための値uを設定することである。ここでは、符号化率rxに応じたパワー変更のための値をurXという形で記載することとする。
なお、上記r1、r2、r3の一例としては、誤り訂正符号がLDPC符号の場合には、それぞれ1/2、2/3、3/4といった符号化率であることが考えられる。
(例1-3)
受信装置がよりよいデータの受信品質を得るためには以下を実施することが重要となる。
ここでは、例として、s1の変調方式をQPSKに固定するものとし、制御信号により、s2の変調方式を16QAMから64QAMに変更する(または、16QAM、64QAMのいずれかの設定が可能な)場合について考える。なお、s2(t)の変調方式を64QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図86のとおりであり、図86においてkは
また、(s1の変調方式、s2の変調方式)のセットを、(QPSK、16QAM)または(16QAM、QPSK)または(QPSK、64QAM)または(64QAM、QPSK)のいずれかの設定が可能な場合、u16<u64の関係を満たすとよい。
s1の変調方式を固定とし、I-Q平面における信号点の数がc個の変調方式Cとする。また、s2の変調方式として、I-Q平面における信号点の数がa個の変調方式AとI-Q平面における信号点の数がb個の変調方式B(a>b>c)のいずれかの設定が可能であるとする。(ただし、変調方式Aのs2時点の平均電力値(平均値)と変調方式Bのs2時点の平均電力値(平均値)とは等しいものとする。)
このとき、s2の変調方式として、変調方式Aを設定したときに、設定するパワー変更のための値をuaとする。また、s2の変調方式として、変調方式Bを設定したときに、設定するパワー変更のための値をubとする。このとき、ub<uaとすると、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(例2)
図84を用いて、例1とは異なる動作の例を説明する。なお、s1(t)は、変調方式64QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図86のとおりであり、kは式(85)のとおりである。また、s2(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図80のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。なお、tは時間であり、本実施の形態では、時間軸方向を例として説明する。
従来、送信電力制御は、一般的には、通信相手からのフィードバック情報に基づいて、送信電力の制御を行っている。本実施の形態では、通信相手からのフィードバック情報とは関係なく、送信電力を制御している点が、本発明の特徴となり、この点について、詳しく説明する。
(例2-1)
送信装置が複数のブロック長(符号化後の1ブロックを構成しているビット数であり、符号長とも呼ばれる)の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号のブロック長に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択されたブロック長に応じてパワー変更のための値uを設定することである。ここでは、ブロック長Xに応じたパワー変更のための値をuLXという形で記載することとする。
上述では、3つの符号長の場合を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、送信装置において、符号長が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値が2つ以上存在し、符号長を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値の中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることが重要な点である。
(例2-2)
送信装置が複数の符号化率の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号の符号化率に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択された符号化率に応じてパワー変更のための値uを設定することである。ここでは、符号化率rxに応じたパワー変更のための値をurxという形で記載することとする。
なお、上記r1、r2、r3の一例としては、誤り訂正符号がLDPC符号の場合には、それぞれ1/2、2/3、3/4といった符号化率であることが考えられる。
(例2-3)
受信装置がよりよいデータの受信品質を得るためには以下を実施することが重要となる。
ここでは、例として、s1の変調方式を64QAMに固定するものとし、制御信号により、s2の変調方式を16QAMからQPSKに変更する(または、16QAM、QPSKのいずれかの設定が可能な)場合について考える。s1の変調方式を64QAMとする場合、s1(t)のマッピング方法としては、図86のとおりであり、図86においてkは式(85)である。s2の変調方式を16QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図80のとおりであり、図80においてgは式(79)であり、また、s2(t)の変調方式をQPSKとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図81のとおりであり、図81においてhは式(78)であるとする。
図84において、s2の変調方式が16QAMのときパワー変更部8401Bは、u=u16と設定し、s2の変調方式がQPSKのときu=u4と設定するものとする。このとき、最小ユークリッド距離の関係から、u4<u16とすると、s2の変調方式が16QAM、QPSKのうちいずれの場合であっても、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
s1の変調方式を固定とし、I-Q平面における信号点の数がc個の変調方式Cとする。また、s2の変調方式として、I-Q平面における信号点の数がa個の変調方式AとI-Q平面における信号点の数がb個の変調方式B(c>b>a)のいずれかの設定が可能であるとする。(ただし、変調方式Aのs2時点の平均電力値(平均値)と変調方式Bのs2時点の平均電力値(平均値)とは等しいものとする。)
このとき、s2の変調方式として、変調方式Aを設定したときに、設定するパワー変更のための値をuaとする。また、s2の変調方式として、変調方式Bを設定したときに、設定するパワー変更のための値をubとする。このとき、ua<ubとすると、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(例3)
図84を用いて、例1とは異なる動作の例を説明する。なお、s1(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図80のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。また、s2(t)は、変調方式64QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図86のとおりであり、kは式(85)のとおりである。なお、tは時間であり、本実施の形態では、時間軸方向を例として説明する。
従来、送信電力制御は、一般的には、通信相手からのフィードバック情報に基づいて、送信電力の制御を行っている。本実施の形態では、通信相手からのフィードバック情報とは関係なく、送信電力を制御している点が、本発明の特徴となり、この点について、詳しく説明する。
(例3-1)
送信装置が複数のブロック長(符号化後の1ブロックを構成しているビット数であり、符号長とも呼ばれる)の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号のブロック長に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択されたブロック長に応じてパワー変更のための値uを設定することである。ここでは、ブロック長Xに応じたパワー変更のための値をuLXという形で記載することとする。
上述では、3つの符号長の場合を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、送信装置において、符号長が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値が2つ以上存在し、符号長を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値の中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることが重要な点である。
(例3-2)
送信装置が複数の符号化率の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号の符号化率に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択された符号化率に応じてパワー変更のための値uを設定することである。ここでは、符号化率rxに応じたパワー変更のための値をurxという形で記載することとする。
なお、上記r1、r2、r3の一例としては、誤り訂正符号がLDPC符号の場合には、それぞれ1/2、2/3、3/4といった符号化率であることが考えられる。
(例3-3)
受信装置がよりよいデータの受信品質を得るためには以下を実施することが重要となる。
ここでは、例として、s1の変調方式を16QAMに固定するものとし、制御信号により、s2の変調方式を64QAMからQPSKに変更する(または、64QAM、QPSKのいずれかの設定が可能な)場合について考える。s1の変調方式を16QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図80のとおりであり、図80においてgは式(79)である。s2の変調方式を64QAMとする場合、s1(t)のマッピング方法としては、図86のとおりであり、図86においてkは式(85)であり、また、s2(t)の変調方式をQPSKとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図81のとおりであり、図81においてhは式(78)であるとする。
図84において、s2の変調方式が64QAMのときu=u64設定し、s2の変調方式がQPSKのときu=u4と設定するものとする。このとき、最小ユークリッド距離の関係から、u4<u64とすると、s2の変調方式が16QAM、64QAMいずれのときも、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
s1の変調方式を固定とし、I-Q平面における信号点の数がc個の変調方式Cとする。また、s2の変調方式として、I-Q平面における信号点の数がa個の変調方式AとI-Q平面における信号点の数がb個の変調方式B(c>b>a)のいずれかの設定が可能であるとする。(ただし、変調方式Aのs2時点の平均電力値(平均値)と変調方式Bのs2時点の平均電力値(平均値)とは等しいものとする。)
このとき、s2の変調方式として、変調方式Aを設定したときに、設定するパワー変更のための値をuaとする。また、s2の変調方式として、変調方式Bを設定したときに、設定するパワー変更のための値をubとする。このとき、ua<ubとすると、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(例4)
上述では、s1、s2のうち、一方のパワーを変更する場合について述べたが、ここでは、s1、s2の両者のパワーを変更する場合について説明する。
パワー変更部(8401B)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307B、制御信号(8400)を入力とし、制御信号(8400)に基づき、設定したパワー変更のための値をuとすると、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Bをu倍した信号(8402B)を出力する。そして、u=v×w(w>1.0)とする。
プリコーディング後の変調信号に対し、規則的に位相を変更する方法におけるプリコーディング行列をF、規則的に位相変更を行うための位相変更値をy(t)(y(t)は絶対値が1の虚数(実数を含む)、つまりejθ(t)と表すことができる)とすると、次式(87)が成立する。
なお、式(83)、式(84)を考慮すると、QPSKの平均電力と16QAMの平均電力の比はv2:u2=v2:v2×w2=1:w2=1:5あるいはQPSKの平均電力と16QAMの平均電力の比はv2:u2=v2:v2×w2=1:w2=1:2が有効な例として考えられるが、システムとして求められる要求条件によって、適宜設定することが可能である。
上述で、「制御信号(8400)により、パワー変更のための値v、uを設定する」ことを述べたが、以下では、さらに受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を向上させるための、制御信号(8400)によるパワー変更のための値v、uを設定について詳しく説明する。
(例4-1)
送信装置が複数のブロック長(符号化後の1ブロックを構成しているビット数であり、符号長とも呼ばれる)の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号のブロック長に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401A、8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択されたブロック長に応じてパワー変更のための値v、uを設定することである。ここでは、ブロック長Xに応じたパワー変更のための値をそれぞれ、vLX、uLXという形で記載することとする。
(例4-2)
送信装置が複数の符号化率の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号の符号化率に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401A、8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択された符号化率に応じてパワー変更のための値v、uを設定することである。ここでは、符号化率rxに応じたパワー変更のための値をそれぞれ、vrx、urxという形で記載することとする。
また、符号化率としてr1が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur1を設定し、符号化率としてr2が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur2を設定し、符号化率としてr3が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur3を設定する。
上述では、3つの符号化率の場合を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、送信装置において、符号化率が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値urxが2つ以上の存在し、符号化率を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値urxの中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることが重要な点であり、また、送信装置において、符号化率が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値vrXが2つ以上の存在し、符号化率を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値vrXの中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることも重要な点である。
(例4-3)
受信装置がよりよいデータの受信品質を得るためには以下を実施することが重要となる。
ここでは、例として、s1の変調方式をQPSKに固定とし、制御信号により、s2の変調方式を16QAMから64QAMに変更する(または、16QAM、64QAMのいずれかの設定が可能な)場合について考える。s1の変調方式をQPSKとする場合、s1(t)のマッピング方法としては、図81のとおりであり、図81においてhは式(78)である。s2の変調方式を16QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図80のとおりであり、図80においてgは式(79)であり、また、s2(t)の変調方式を64QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図86のとおりであり、図86においてkは式(85)であるとする。
そして、図85において、s1の変調方式をQPSKとしs2の変調方式が64QAMとしたとき、v=βとし、u=β×w64設定するものとする。このとき、QPSKの平均電力と64QAMの平均電力の比はv:u=β2:β2×w64 2=1:w64 2となる。このとき、最小ユークリッド距離の関係から、1.0<w16<w64とすると、s2の変調方式が16QAM、64QAMいずれのときも、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
一般化した場合、s1の変調方式を固定とし、I-Q平面における信号点の数がc個の変調方式Cとする。s2の変調方式として、I-Q平面における信号点の数がa個の変調方式AとI-Q平面における信号点の数がb個の変調方式B(a>b>c)のいずれかの設定が可能であるとする。このとき、s1の変調方式が変調方式Cでその平均電力とs2の変調方式として、変調方式Aを設定したときの、その平均電力の比を1:wa 2とする。s1の変調方式が変調方式Cでその平均電力とs2の変調方式として、変調方式Bを設定したときの、その平均電力の比を1:wb 2とする。このとき、wb<waとすると、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(例5)
図85を用いて、例4とは異なる動作の例を説明する。なお、s1(t)は、変調方式64QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図86のとおりであり、kは式(85)のとおりである。また、s2(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図80のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。なお、tは時間であり、本実施の形態では、時間軸方向を例として説明する。
パワー変更部(8401B)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307B、制御信号(8400)を入力とし、制御信号(8400)に基づき、設定したパワー変更のための値をuとすると、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Bをu倍した信号(8402B)を出力する。そして、u=v×w(w<1.0)とする。
したがって、64QAMの平均電力と16QAMの平均電力の比はv2:u2=v2:v2×w2=1:w2と設定することになる。これにより、図83のような受信状態となるので、受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を向上させることができる。
上述で、「制御信号(8400)により、パワー変更のための値v、uを設定する」ことを述べたが、以下では、さらに受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を向上させるための、制御信号(8400)によるパワー変更のための値v、uを設定について詳しく説明する。
(例5-1)
送信装置が複数のブロック長(符号化後の1ブロックを構成しているビット数であり、符号長とも呼ばれる)の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号のブロック長に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401A、8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択されたブロック長に応じてパワー変更のための値v、uを設定することである。ここでは、ブロック長Xに応じたパワー変更のための値をそれぞれ、vLX、uLXという形で記載することとする。
(例5-2)
送信装置が複数の符号化率の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号の符号化率に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401A、8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択された符号化率に応じてパワー変更のための値v、uを設定することである。ここでは、符号化率rxに応じたパワー変更のための値をそれぞれ、vrx、urxという形で記載することとする。
また、符号化率としてr1が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur1を設定し、符号化率としてr2が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur2を設定し、符号化率としてr3が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur3を設定する。
上述では、3つの符号化率の場合を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、送信装置において、符号化率が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値urxが2つ以上の存在し、符号化率を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値urxの中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることが重要な点であり、また、送信装置において、符号化率が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値vrXが2つ以上の存在し、符号化率を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値vrXの中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることも重要な点である。
(例5-3)
受信装置がよりよいデータの受信品質を得るためには以下を実施することが重要となる。
ここでは、例として、s1の変調方式を64QAMに固定とし、制御信号により、s2の変調方式を16QAMからQPSKに変更する(または、16QAM、QPSKのいずれかの設定が可能な)場合について考える。s1の変調方式を64QAMとする場合、s1(t)のマッピング方法としては、図86のとおりであり、図86においてkは式(85)である。s2の変調方式を16QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図80のとおりであり、図80においてgは式(79)であり、また、s2(t)の変調方式をQPSKとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図81のとおりであり、図81においてhは式(78)であるとする。
そして、図85において、s1の変調方式を64QAMとしs2の変調方式がQPSKとしたとき、v=βとし、u=β×w4設定するものとする。このとき、64QAMの平均電力とQPSKの平均電力の比はv2:u2=β2:β2×w4 2=1:w4 2となる。このとき、最小ユークリッド距離の関係から、w4<w16<1.0とすると、s2の変調方式が16QAM、QPSKいずれのときも、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
一般化した場合、s1の変調方式を固定とし、I-Q平面における信号点の数がc個の変調方式Cとする。s2の変調方式として、I-Q平面における信号点の数がa個の変調方式AとI-Q平面における信号点の数がb個の変調方式B(c>b>a)のいずれかの設定が可能であるとする。このとき、s1の変調方式が変調方式Cでその平均電力とs2の変調方式として、変調方式Aを設定したときの、その平均電力の比を1:wa 2とする。s1の変調方式が変調方式Cでその平均電力とs2の変調方式として、変調方式Bを設定したときの、その平均電力の比を1:wb 2とする。このとき、wa<wbとすると、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(例6)
図85を用いて、例4とは異なる動作の例を説明する。なお、s1(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図86のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。また、s2(t)は、変調方式64QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図86のとおりであり、kは式(85)のとおりである。なお、tは時間であり、本実施の形態では、時間軸方向を例として説明する。
パワー変更部(8401B)は、変調方式64QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307B、制御信号(8400)を入力とし、制御信号(8400)に基づき、設定したパワー変更のための値をuとすると、変調方式64QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Bをu倍した信号(8402B)を出力する。そして、u=v×w(w<1.0)とする。
したがって、64QAMの平均電力と16QAMの平均電力の比はv2:u2=v2:v2×w2=1:w2と設定することになる。これにより、図83のような受信状態となるので、受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を向上させることができる。
上述で、「制御信号(8400)により、パワー変更のための値v、uを設定する」ことを述べたが、以下では、さらに受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を向上させるための、制御信号(8400)によるパワー変更のための値v、uを設定について詳しく説明する。
(例6-1)
送信装置が複数のブロック長(符号化後の1ブロックを構成しているビット数であり、符号長とも呼ばれる)の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号のブロック長に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力(平均値)を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401A、8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択されたブロック長に応じてパワー変更のための値v、uを設定することである。ここでは、ブロック長Xに応じたパワー変更のための値をそれぞれ、vLX、uLXという形で記載することとする。
(例6-2)
送信装置が複数の符号化率の誤り訂正符号をサポートしている場合に、s1及びs2の生成に用いられるデータに施された誤り訂正符号の符号化率に応じて、s1およびs2の平均電力を設定する方法について説明する。
本発明の特徴は、パワー変更部(8401A、8401B)が、制御信号(8400)が示す選択された符号化率に応じてパワー変更のための値v、uを設定することである。ここでは、符号化率rxに応じたパワー変更のための値をそれぞれ、vrx、urxという形で記載することとする。
また、符号化率としてr1が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur1を設定し、符号化率としてr2が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur2を設定し、符号化率としてr3が選択された場合、パワー変更部(8401B)はパワー変更のための値ur3を設定する。
上述では、3つの符号化率の場合を例に説明したがこれに限ったものではなく、送信装置において、符号化率が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値urxが2つ以上の存在し、符号化率を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値urxの中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることが重要な点であり、また、送信装置において、符号化率が2つ以上設定可能な際に、設定可能なパワー変更のための値vrXが2つ以上の存在し、符号化率を設定した際、送信装置は、複数の設定可能なパワー変更のための値vrXの中からいずれかのパワー変更のための値を選択し、パワー変更を行うことができることも重要な点である。
(例6-3)
受信装置がよりよいデータの受信品質を得るためには以下を実施することが重要となる。
ここでは、例として、s1の変調方式を16QAMに固定とし、制御信号により、s2の変調方式を64QAMからQPSKに変更する(または、16QAM、QPSKのいずれかの設定が可能な)場合について考える。s1の変調方式を16QAMとする場合、s1(t)のマッピング方法としては、図80のとおりであり、図80においてgは式(79)である。s2の変調方式を64QAMとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図86のとおりであり、図86においてkは式(85)であり、また、s2(t)の変調方式をQPSKとする場合、s2(t)のマッピング方法としては、図81のとおりであり、図81においてhは式(78)であるとする。
そして、図85において、s1の変調方式を16QAMとしs2の変調方式がQPSKとしたとき、v=βとし、u=β×w4設定するものとする。このとき、64QAMの平均電力とQPSKの平均電力の比はv2:u2=β2:β2×w4 2=1:w4 2となる。このとき、最小ユークリッド距離の関係から、w4<w64とすると、s2の変調方式が64QAM、QPSKのいずれのときも、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
一般化した場合、s1の変調方式を固定とし、I-Q平面における信号点の数がc個の変調方式Cとする。s2の変調方式として、I-Q平面における信号点の数がa個の変調方式AとI-Q平面における信号点の数がb個の変調方式B(c>b>a)のいずれかの設定が可能であるとする。このとき、s1の変調方式が変調方式Cでその平均電力とs2の変調方式として、変調方式Aを設定したときの、その平均電力の比を1:wa 2とする。s1の変調方式が変調方式Cでその平均電力とs2の変調方式として、変調方式Bを設定したときの、その平均電力の比を1:wb 2とする。このとき、wa<wbとすると、受信装置が高いデータの受信品質を得ることができる。
(受信装置の動作)
次に、受信装置の動作について、説明する。受信装置の動作については、実施の形態1等で説明したとおりであり、例えば、受信装置の構成は、図7、図8、図9に示されている。
例1、例2、例3の場合、図5から、以下の式(89)に示す関係を導くことができる。
一方、例4、例5、例6の場合、図5から、以下の式(91)に示す関係を導くことができる。
なお、例1~例6では、パワー変更部を送信装置に追加する構成を示したが、マッピングの段階において、パワー変更を行ってもよい。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
とし、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ1、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)に相当する変調信号を送信アンテナ2から、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信する、というように、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)に相当する変調信号と入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)を異なるアンテナから、同一時刻に同一周波数を用いて送信するとしてもよい。また、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i)、直交成分をI1(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i)、直交成分をI2(i)
としてもよい。また、上述では、2ストリームの信号に対し両者の信号処理を行い、両者の信号処理後の信号の同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えについて説明したが、これに限ったものではなく、2ストリームより多い信号に対し両者の信号処理後を行い、両者の信号処理後の信号の同相成分と直交成分の入れ替えを行うことも可能である。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i)、直交成分をQ2(i)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i)、直交成分をQ1(i)
なお、この入れ替えについては、図55の構成により、実現することができる。
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をQ2(i+w)、直交成分をI1(i+v)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をQ1(i+v)、直交成分をI2(i+w)
加えて、以下のような信号の入れ替えを行ってもよい。例えば、
・入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(i)の同相成分をI2(i+w)、直交成分をQ2(i+w)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(i)の同相成分をI1(i+v)、直交成分をQ1(i+v)
なお、これについても、図55の構成により、実現することができる。
例えば、
時間0において、
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(0)の同相成分をI1(0)、直交成分をQ1(0)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(0)の同相成分をI2(0)、直交成分をQ2(0)
時間1において、
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(1)の同相成分をI2(1)、直交成分をQ2(1)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(1)の同相成分をI1(1)、直交成分をQ1(1)
・・・
としてもよい、つまり、
時間2kのとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k)の同相成分をI1(2k)、直交成分をQ1(2k)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k)の同相成分をI2(2k)、直交成分をQ2(2k)
とし、
時間2k+1のとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k+1)の同相成分をI2(2k+1)、直交成分をQ2(2k+1)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k+1)の同相成分をI1(2k+1)、直交成分をQ1(2k+1)
としてもよい。
また、
時間2kのとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k)の同相成分をI2(2k)、直交成分をQ2(2k)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k)の同相成分をI1(2k)、直交成分をQ1(2k)
とし、
時間2k+1のとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k+1)の同相成分をI1(2k+1)、直交成分をQ1(2k+1)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k+1)の同相成分をI2(2k+1)、直交成分をQ2(2k+1)
としてもよい。
周波数((サブ)キャリア)2kのとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k)の同相成分をI1(2k)、直交成分をQ1(2k)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k)の同相成分をI2(2k)、直交成分をQ2(2k)
とし、
周波数((サブ)キャリア)2k+1のとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k+1)の同相成分をI2(2k+1)、直交成分をQ2(2k+1)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k+1)の同相成分をI1(2k+1)、直交成分をQ1(2k+1)
としてもよい。
また、
周波数((サブ)キャリア)2kのとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k)の同相成分をI2(2k)、直交成分をQ2(2k)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k)の同相成分をI1(2k)、直交成分をQ1(2k)
とし、
周波数((サブ)キャリア)2k+1のとき(kは整数)
入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r1(2k+1)の同相成分をI1(2k+1)、直交成分をQ1(2k+1)、入れ替え後のベースバンド信号r2(2k+1)の同相成分をI2(2k+1)、直交成分をQ2(2k+1)
としてもよい。
(実施の形態G1)
本実施の形態では、一例として、QPSKのマッピングを施した変調信号と16QAMのマッピングを施した変調信号を送信する場合に、QPSKのマッピングを施した変調信号の平均電力と16QAMのマッピングを施した変調信号の平均電力を異なるように設定する方法の実施の形態F1と異なる方法について説明する。
本実施の形態では、一例として、s1、s2の変調方式がQPSK、16QAMのいずれかであるときに関して説明を行う。
まず、16QAMのマッピングについて、図80を用いて説明する。図80は、同相I-直交Q平面における16QAMの信号点配置の例を示している。図80の信号点8000は、送信するビット(入力ビット)をb0~b3とすると、例えば、送信するビットが(b0、b1、b2、b3)=(1、0、0、0)(この値は、図80に記載されている値である。)のとき、同相I-直交Q平面における座標は、(I,Q)=(-3×g、3×g)であり、このI,Qの値が、マッピング後の信号となる。なお、送信するビット(b0、b1、b2、b3)が他の値のときも、(b0、b1、b2、b3)にもとづき、図80から、(I,Q)のセットが決定し、I,Qの値が、マッピング後の信号(s1およびs2)となる。
図85に示したプリコーディング関連の信号処理部を用いた時、変調方式、パワー変更値、位相変更値の、時間軸(または、周波数軸、時間および周波数軸)における変更方法の例を図87、図88に示す。
図87に示すように、変調方式がQPSKのとき、QPSKの変調信号に対しては、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)では、aを乗算することになる(aは実数)。そして、変調方式が16QAMのとき、16QAMの変調信号に対しては、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)では、bを乗算することになる(bは実数)。
「y[0]で位相変更を行う際の(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在している点であり、同様に、y[1]で位相変更を行う際の(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在しており、また、同様に、y[2]で位相変更を行う際の(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する。」
ことである。
パワー変更部(8501B)は、s2(t)の変調方式がQPSKのとき、s2(t)にaを乗算し、a×s2(t)を出力することになり、s2(t)の変調方式が16QAMのとき、s2(t)にbを乗算し、b×s2(t)を出力することになる。
したがって、(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットを考慮すると、図87に示すように、位相変更と変調方式切り替えを考慮したときの周期は6=3×2、(3:プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法で用いる位相変更値として用意した位相変更値の数、2:各位相変更値において、(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する)となる。
そして、s1(t)の変調方式は、時間軸において、QPSKと16QAMが交互に設定されるようになっており、また、この点については、s2(t)についても同様である。そして、(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットは、(QPSK、16QAM)または(16QAM、QPSK)となっている。
「y[0]で位相変更を行う際の(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在している点であり、同様に、y[1]で位相変更を行う際の(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在しており、また、同様に、y[2]で位相変更を行う際の(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する。」
である。
パワー変更部(8501B)は、s2(t)の変調方式がQPSKのとき、s2(t)にaを乗算し、a×s2(t)を出力することになり、s2(t)の変調方式が16QAMのとき、s2(t)にbを乗算し、b×s2(t)を出力することになる。
以上をまとめると、以下の点が重要となる。
(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(変調方式A、変調方式B)、(変調方式B、変調方式A)が存在するようにし、変調方式Aの平均電力と変調方式Bの平均電力が異なるように設定する。
そして、パワー変更部(8501A)は、s1(t)の変調方式が変調方式Aのとき、s1(t)にaを乗算し、a×s1(t)を出力することになり、s1(t)の変調方式が変調方式Bのとき、s1(t)にbを乗算し、b×s1(t)を出力する。同様に、パワー変更部(8501B)は、s2(t)の変調方式が変調方式Aのとき、s2(t)にaを乗算し、a×s2(t)を出力することになり、s2(t)の変調方式が変調方式Bのとき、s2(t)にbを乗算し、b×s2(t)を出力する。
以上のように、(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(変調方式A、変調方式B)、(変調方式B、変調方式A)が存在するようにし、かつ、プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法で用いる位相変更値として用意した位相変更値の各位相変更値において、(s1(t)の変調方式、s2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(変調方式A、変調方式B)、(変調方式B、変調方式A)の両者が存在するようにすることで、変調方式Aの平均電力と変調方式Bの平均電力が異なるよう設定しても、送信装置が具備する送信電力増幅器のPAPRに与える影響を少なくすることができ、送信装置の消費電力に与える影響を少なくできるとともに、本明細書で説明したように、LOS環境での受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を改善することができるという効果を得ることができる。
図91に示すように、変調方式がQPSKのとき、QPSKの変調信号に対しては、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)では、aを乗算することになる(aは実数)。そして、変調方式が16QAMのとき、16QAMの変調信号に対しては、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)では、bを乗算することになる(bは実数)。
そして、s1(t)の変調方式は、QPSKで固定となっており、s2(t)の変調方式は、16QAMで固定となっている。そして、図90の信号入れ替え部(9001)は、マッピング後の信号307A、307B、および、制御信号(8500)を入力とし、制御信号(8500)に基づき、マッピング後の信号307A、307Bに対し、入れ替え(入れ替えを行わない場合もある)を行い、入れ替え後の信号(9002A:Ω1(t))、および、入れ替え後の信号(9002B:Ω2(t))を出力する。
「y[0]で位相変更を行う際の(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在している点であり、同様に、y[1]で位相変更を行う際の(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在しており、また、同様に、y[2]で位相変更を行う際の(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する。」
ことである。
パワー変更部(8501B)は、Ω2(t)の変調方式がQPSKのとき、Ω2(t)にaを乗算し、a×Ω2(t)を出力することになり、Ω2(t)の変調方式が16QAMのとき、Ω2(t)にbを乗算し、b×Ω2(t)を出力することになる。
したがって、(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットを考慮すると、図91に示すように、位相変更と変調方式切り替えを考慮したときの周期は6=3×2、(3:プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法で用いる位相変更値として用意した位相変更値の数、2:各位相変更値において、(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する)となる。
図92に示すように、変調方式がQPSKのとき、QPSKの変調信号に対しては、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)では、aを乗算することになる(aは実数)。そして、変調方式が16QAMのとき、16QAMの変調信号に対しては、パワー変更部(ここでは、パワー変更部と呼んでいるが、振幅変更部、重み付け部と呼んでもよい。)では、bを乗算することになる(bは実数)。
そして、s1(t)の変調方式は、QPSKで固定となっており、s2(t)の変調方式は、16QAMで固定となっている。そして、図90の信号入れ替え部(9001)は、マッピング後の信号307A、307B、および、制御信号(8500)を入力とし、制御信号(8500)に基づき、マッピング後の信号307A、307Bに対し、入れ替え(入れ替えを行わない場合もある)を行い、入れ替え後の信号(9002A:Ω1(t))、および、入れ替え後の信号(9002B:Ω2(t))を出力する。
「y[0]で位相変更を行う際の(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在している点であり、同様に、y[1]で位相変更を行う際の(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在しており、また、同様に、y[2]で位相変更を行う際の(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する。」
ことである。
パワー変更部(8501B)は、Ω2(t)の変調方式がQPSKのとき、Ω2(t)にaを乗算し、a×Ω2(t)を出力することになり、Ω2(t)の変調方式が16QAMのとき、Ω2(t)にbを乗算し、b×Ω2(t)を出力することになる。
したがって、(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットを考慮すると、図92に示すように、位相変更と変調方式切り替えを考慮したときの周期は6=3×2、(3:プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法で用いる位相変更値として用意した位相変更値の数、2:各位相変更値において、(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、QPSK)の両者が存在する)となる。
以上をまとめると、以下の点が重要となる。
(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(変調方式A、変調方式B)、(変調方式B、変調方式A)が存在するようにし、変調方式Aの平均電力と変調方式Bの平均電力が異なるように設定する。
以上のように、(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(変調方式A、変調方式B)、(変調方式B、変調方式A)が存在するようにし、かつ、プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法で用いる位相変更値として用意した位相変更値の各位相変更値において、(Ω1(t)の変調方式、Ω2(t)の変調方式)のセットが(変調方式A、変調方式B)、(変調方式B、変調方式A)の両者が存在するようにすることで、変調方式Aの平均電力と変調方式Bの平均電力が異なるよう設定しても、送信装置が具備する送信電力増幅器のPAPRに与える影響を少なくすることができ、送信装置の消費電力に与える影響を少なくできるとともに、本明細書で説明したように、LOS環境での受信装置におけるデータの受信品質を改善することができるという効果を得ることができる。
図5の関係から、受信信号r1(t)、r2(t)は、チャネル変動値、h11(t)、h12(t)、h21(t)、h22(t)を用いると、図87、図88、図91、図92のように送信装置が変調信号を送信した場合、以下の2つの式のいずれかの関係が成立する。
(実施の形態G2)
本実施の形態では、放送(または、通信)システムが、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合とs1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合をサポートしている場合、回路規模を削減することができる、プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法について説明する。
s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合のプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法に用いるプリコーディング行列の例を実施の形態1で示している。プリコーディング行列Fは次式であれわされる。
本実施の形態における、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合とs1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合をサポートしている場合の重み付け合成(プリコーディング)部周辺の構成を図93に示す。図93において、図3、図6、図85と同様に動作するものについては、同一符号を付し、ここでは説明を省略する。
時間2kのとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k))として、プリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k))を出力する
とし、
時間2k+1のとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k+1))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k+1))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k+1))としてプリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k+1))を出力する。
また、
時間2kのとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k))としてプリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k))を出力する
とし、
時間2k+1のとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k+1))として、プリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k+1))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k+1))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k+1))を出力する。(ただし、上述の信号の入れ替えは、一つの例であり、これに限ったものではなく、「信号の入れ替えを行う」となった場合、信号の入れ替えを行うことがある、ということが重要となる。)
そして、図3、図4、図5、図12、図13等で説明したように、信号9302A(r1(t))は、z1(t)のかわりに、アンテナから送信される(ただし、図3、図4、図5、図12、図13等で示したように、所定の処理が行われる。)。また、信号9302B(r2(t))は、z2(t)のかわりに、アンテナから送信される(ただし、図3、図4、図5、図12、図13等で示したように、所定の処理が行われる。)。このとき、信号9302A(r1(t))と信号9302B(r2(t))は異なるアンテナから送信されることになる。
s1(t)およびs2(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)であるため、マッピング方法は、図80のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。
重み付け合成部600は、パワー変更後の信号8502A(変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Aをv倍した信号)およびパワー変更後の信号8502B(変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Bをu倍した信号)、信号処理方法に関する情報315を入力とし、重み付け合成方法に関する情報315の情報に基づいて、プリコーディング行列を決定し、プリコーディングが行われ、プリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(t))および、プリコーディング後の信号316B(z2’(t))を出力する。
このとき、プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法におけるプリコーディング行列をF、位相変更値をy(t)とすると、以下の関係式が成立する。
s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMのとき、プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法を適用したときのプリコーディング行列Fが、式(G3)であらわされたとき、実施の形態1で示したように、αとして、式(37)が適した値となる。αが式(37)であらわされたとき、z1(t)、z2(t)いずれも、図94のように、I-Q平面において、256点のいずれかの信号点に相当するベースバンド信号となる。なお、図94は一例であり、原点を中心に、位相を回転させた形の256点の信号点配置となることもある。
s1(t)は、変調方式QPSKのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)とし、マッピング方法は、図81のとおりであり、hは式(78)のとおりである。s2(t)は、変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)であるため、マッピング方法は、図80のとおりであり、gは式(79)のとおりである。
重み付け合成部600は、パワー変更後の信号8502A(変調方式QPSKのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Aをv倍した信号)およびパワー変更後の信号8502B(変調方式16QAMのベースバンド信号(マッピング後の信号)307Bをu倍した信号)、信号処理方法に関する情報315を入力とし、信号処理方法に関する情報315の情報に基づいて、プリコーディングが行われ、プリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(t))および、プリコーディング後の信号316B(z2’(t))を出力する。
s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMのとき、プリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法を適用したときのプリコーディング行列Fが、式(G3)であらわさたとき、s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMのときと同様、αとして、式(37)が適した値となる。その理由について説明する。
時間2kのとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k))として、プリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k))を出力する
とし、
時間2k+1のとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k+1))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k+1))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k+1))としてプリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k+1))を出力する。
また、
時間2kのとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k))としてプリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k))を出力する
とし、
時間2k+1のとき(kは整数)
信号9302A(r1(2k+1))として、プリコーディング後の信号309A(z1(2k+1))を出力し、信号9302B(r2(2k+1))としてプリコーディング・位相変更後の信号309B(z2(2k+1))を出力する。
本発明とポイントとなる点は、以下のようになる。
・s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合とs1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合をサポートしている場合、両者の場合で使用するプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法を同一とする。
・s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、v2<u2の条件を満たす
ということになる。
例1(以下の2つの項目を満たす。):
・s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、v2:u2=1:5の条件を満たす。
・s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、いずれの場合も、同一のプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法を用いる。
例2(以下の2つの項目を満たす。):
・s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、v2<u2の条件を満たす。
・s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合とs1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合をサポートしている場合、両者の場合で使用するプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法は同一であり、プリコーディング行列は式(G3)であらわされる。
例3(以下の2つの項目を満たす。):
・s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、v2<u2の条件を満たす。
・s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合とs1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合をサポートしている場合、両者の場合で使用するプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法は同一であり、プリコーディング行列は式(G3)であらわされ、αは式(37)であらわされる。
例4(以下の2つの項目を満たす。):
・s1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合、v2:u2=1:5の条件を満たす。
・s1の変調方式がQPSK、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合とs1の変調方式が16QAM、s2の変調方式が16QAMの場合をサポートしている場合、両者の場合で使用するプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法は同一であり、プリコーディング行列は式(G3)であらわされ、αは式(37)であらわされる。
・s1の変調方式が変調方式A、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合とs1の変調方式が変調方式B、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合をサポートしている場合、両者の場合で使用するプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法を同一とする。
・s1の変調方式が変調方式B、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式が変調方式A、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合、v2<u2の条件を満たす。
または、以下の2つの項目を満たす。
・s1の変調方式が変調方式A、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合とs1の変調方式が変調方式B、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合をサポートしている場合、両者の場合でプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法は同一であり、プリコーディング行列は式(G3)であらわされる。
・s1の変調方式が変調方式B、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合v2=u2であり、s1の変調方式が変調方式A、s2の変調方式が変調方式Bの場合、v2<u2の条件を満たす。
変調方式Aと変調方式Bのセットとしては、(変調方式A、変調方式B)が(QPSK、16QAM)、(16QAM、64QAM)、(64QAM、128QAM)、(64QAM、256QAM)等がある。
本実施の形態では、時間軸方向に位相変更値を切り替える場合を例として説明するが、他の実施の形態の説明と同様に、OFDM方式のようなマルチキャリア伝送を用いている場合、周波数軸方向に位相変更値を切り替える場合についても、同様に実施することができる。このとき、本実施の形態で用いているtをf(周波数((サブ)キャリア))に置き換えることになる。また、時間―周波数軸方向で、位相変更値を切り替える場合についても同様に実施することが可能である。なお、本実施の形態におけるプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法は、本明細書で説明したプリコーディング後に規則的に位相変更を行う方法に限定されるものではない。
304A,304B インタリーバ
306A,306B マッピング部
314 信号処理方法情報生成部
308A,308B 重み付け合成部
310A,310B 無線部
312A,312B アンテナ
317A,317B 位相変更部
402 符号化器
404 分配部
504#1,504#2 送信アンテナ
505#1,505#2 受信アンテナ
600 重み付け合成部
701_X,701_Y アンテナ
703_X,703_Y 無線部
705_1 チャネル変動推定部
705_2 チャネル変動推定部
707_1 チャネル変動推定部
707_2 チャネル変動推定部
709 制御情報復号部
711 信号処理部
803 INNER MIMO検波部
805A,805B 対数尤度算出部
807A,807B デインタリーバ
809A,809B 対数尤度比算出部
811A,811B Soft-in/soft-outデコーダ
813A,813B インタリーバ
815 記憶部
819 係数生成部
901 Soft-in/soft-outデコーダ
903 分配部
1201A,1201B OFDM方式関連処理部
1302A,1302A シリアルパラレル変換部
1304A,1304B 並び換え部
1306A,1306B 逆高速フーリエ変換部
1308A,1308B 無線部
Claims (2)
- 複数のベースバンド信号から同一の周波数帯域かつ同一の時刻に送信される複数の信号を生成する信号生成方法であって、
第1の複数ビットから生成された第1のベースバンド信号s1をu倍し、第2の複数ビットから生成された第2のベースバンド信号s2をv倍し、前記uと前記vとは互いに異なる実数であり、
前記u倍された第1のベースバンド信号s1及び前記v倍された第2のベースバンド信号s2の両方に対して位相変更を行い、位相変更後の信号u×s1’及び位相変更後の信号v×s2’を生成し、
前記位相変更後の信号u×s1’と、前記位相変更後の信号v×s2’とに対して、所定の行列Fに応じた重み付け合成を行い、第1の重み付け合成信号z1と第2の重み付け合成信号z2を、前記同一の周波数帯域かつ同一の時刻に送信される複数の信号として生成し、
前記第1の重み付け合成信号z1及び前記第2の重み付け合成信号z2は、(z1、z2)T=F(u×s1’、v×s2’)Tを満たし、
前記u倍された第1のベースバンド信号s1及び前記v倍された第2のベースバンド信号s2に対して施される位相変更量は、それぞれN個の位相変更量の候補を切り替えながら選択された一つの位相変更量であり、前記N個の位相変更量のそれぞれは、所定の期間内で少なくとも一回選択される、信号生成方法。 - 複数のベースバンド信号から同一の周波数帯域かつ同一の時刻に送信される複数の信号を生成する信号生成装置であって、
第1の複数ビットから生成された第1のベースバンド信号s1をu倍し、第2の複数ビットから生成された第2のベースバンド信号s2をv倍し、前記uと前記vとは互いに異なる実数であるパワー変更部と、
前記u倍された第1のベースバンド信号s1及び前記v倍された第2のベースバンド信号s2の両方に対して位相変更を行い、位相変更後の信号u×s1’及び位相変更後の信号v×s2’を生成する位相変更部と、
前記位相変更後の信号u×s1’と、前記位相変更後の信号v×s2’とに対して、所定の行列Fに応じた重み付け合成を行い、第1の重み付け合成信号z1と第2の重み付け合成信号z2を、前記同一の周波数帯域かつ同一の時刻に送信される複数の信号として生成する重み付け合成部とを備え、
前記第1の重み付け合成信号z1及び前記第2の重み付け合成信号z2は、(z1、z2)T=F(u×s1’、v×s2’)Tを満たし、
前記u倍された第1のベースバンド信号s1及び前記v倍された第2のベースバンド信号s2に対して施される位相変更量は、それぞれN個の位相変更量の候補を切り替えながら選択された一つの位相変更量であり、前記N個の位相変更量の候補のそれぞれは、所定の期間内で少なくとも一回選択される、信号生成装置。
Priority Applications (34)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
MX2013000953A MX2013000953A (es) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Metodo de generacion de señales y dispositivo de generacion de señales. |
MX2015003256A MX336169B (es) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Metodo de generacion de señales y dispositivo de generacion de señales. |
EP12747257.9A EP2677676A4 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
AU2012218953A AU2012218953B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
SG2013002217A SG187030A1 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
RU2013104166/07A RU2593381C2 (ru) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Способ формирования сигналов и устройство формирования сигналов |
KR1020227025902A KR102534519B1 (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
JP2012557809A JP5984062B2 (ja) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
CN2012800020663A CN103109482A (zh) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 信号生成方法及信号生成装置 |
KR1020197027755A KR102133354B1 (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
KR1020227010732A KR102427003B1 (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
KR1020217008224A KR102382798B1 (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
MX2016012433A MX368299B (es) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Metodo de generacion de señales y dispositivo de generacion de señales. |
US13/811,064 US8885596B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
CA2802654A CA2802654C (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
MX2016000042A MX342312B (es) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Metodo de generacion de señales y dispositivo de generacion de señales. |
BR112013002605-7A BR112013002605B1 (pt) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Método de transmissão, aparelho de transmissão, método de recepção e aparelho de recepção |
KR1020137001013A KR102026652B1 (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
KR1020237016525A KR20230074299A (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
KR1020207019572A KR20200085931A (ko) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 신호생성방법 및 신호생성장치 |
IL223918A IL223918A (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-12-27 | A method for generating a signal and a device for generating a signal |
US14/501,780 US9667333B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2014-09-30 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
AU2017200598A AU2017200598B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2017-01-30 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US15/496,406 US10009207B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2017-04-25 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
PH12017501410A PH12017501410A1 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2017-08-07 | Method of signal generation and signal generation device |
US15/987,016 US10225123B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2018-05-23 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US16/239,145 US10476720B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2019-01-03 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
AU2019201897A AU2019201897A1 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2019-03-19 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US16/582,644 US11063805B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2019-09-25 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
AU2021200843A AU2021200843B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2021-02-10 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US17/338,092 US11240084B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2021-06-03 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US17/551,984 US20220109599A1 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2021-12-15 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
AU2022252818A AU2022252818A1 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2022-10-14 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US18/102,338 US11943032B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2023-01-27 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
Applications Claiming Priority (8)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2011-033771 | 2011-02-18 | ||
JP2011033771 | 2011-02-18 | ||
JP2011-051842 | 2011-03-09 | ||
JP2011051842 | 2011-03-09 | ||
JP2011-093544 | 2011-04-19 | ||
JP2011093544 | 2011-04-19 | ||
JP2011102101 | 2011-04-28 | ||
JP2011-102101 | 2011-04-28 |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/811,064 A-371-Of-International US8885596B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
US14/501,780 Continuation US9667333B2 (en) | 2011-02-18 | 2014-09-30 | Method of signal generation and signal generating device |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2012111256A1 true WO2012111256A1 (ja) | 2012-08-23 |
Family
ID=46672205
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2012/000352 WO2012111256A1 (ja) | 2011-02-18 | 2012-01-20 | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
Country Status (19)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (9) | US8885596B2 (ja) |
EP (1) | EP2677676A4 (ja) |
JP (5) | JP5984062B2 (ja) |
KR (7) | KR102534519B1 (ja) |
CN (5) | CN107566023B (ja) |
AR (1) | AR090008A1 (ja) |
AU (5) | AU2012218953B2 (ja) |
BR (1) | BR112013002605B1 (ja) |
CA (3) | CA3168049A1 (ja) |
CL (1) | CL2013000508A1 (ja) |
IL (1) | IL223918A (ja) |
MX (5) | MX2013000953A (ja) |
MY (1) | MY168825A (ja) |
PE (1) | PE20131092A1 (ja) |
PH (1) | PH12017501410A1 (ja) |
RU (1) | RU2593381C2 (ja) |
SG (1) | SG187030A1 (ja) |
TW (1) | TWI578732B (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2012111256A1 (ja) |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN102916923A (zh) * | 2012-10-11 | 2013-02-06 | 华中科技大学 | 一种降低多载波系统峰均功率比的信息传输方法 |
WO2015064081A1 (ja) * | 2013-10-31 | 2015-05-07 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法 |
JP2017229080A (ja) * | 2011-04-19 | 2017-12-28 | サン パテント トラスト | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
WO2018110442A1 (ja) * | 2016-12-12 | 2018-06-21 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および送信方法 |
JP2022141788A (ja) * | 2013-01-11 | 2022-09-29 | サン パテント トラスト | 受信方法 |
Families Citing this family (15)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP5578619B2 (ja) | 2010-12-10 | 2014-08-27 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および受信装置 |
US9374141B2 (en) | 2012-12-07 | 2016-06-21 | Sun Patent Trust | Signal generation method, transmission device, reception method, and reception device |
US20150020143A1 (en) * | 2013-07-10 | 2015-01-15 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Apparatus for transmitting broadcast signals, apparatus for receiving broadcast signals, method for transmitting broadcast signals and method for receiving broadcast signals |
KR102121947B1 (ko) * | 2013-09-27 | 2020-06-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 신호 처리 장치 및 그의 신호 처리 방법 |
CN105634696B (zh) * | 2014-10-31 | 2019-02-22 | 富士通株式会社 | 多载波调制信号的比特分配方法、装置和系统 |
JP6643626B2 (ja) * | 2015-02-09 | 2020-02-12 | サン パテント トラスト | 送信装置および受信装置 |
JP7002185B2 (ja) * | 2015-07-30 | 2022-01-20 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法、送信装置、受信方法、受信装置 |
CN105450273B (zh) * | 2015-08-24 | 2016-11-23 | 电信科学技术研究院 | 一种传输编码指示信息和确定预编码矩阵的方法和装置 |
WO2018012520A1 (ja) * | 2016-07-14 | 2018-01-18 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法、送信装置、受信方法、および受信装置 |
EP3537623B1 (en) * | 2016-11-04 | 2021-12-22 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | Transmitting device, transmitting method, receiving device and receiving method |
CN108023632B (zh) * | 2016-11-04 | 2022-06-28 | 华为技术有限公司 | 数据处理方法和发送设备 |
RU178755U1 (ru) * | 2017-07-04 | 2018-04-18 | Федеральное государственное бюджетное образовательное учреждение высшего образования "Рязанский государственный радиотехнический университет" | Устройство декодирования ldpc-кодов |
WO2021181278A1 (en) * | 2020-03-10 | 2021-09-16 | Ntwine, Llc | Bandwidth constrained communication systems with frequency domain information processing |
CN111970027B (zh) * | 2020-07-09 | 2021-06-08 | 珠海中慧微电子有限公司 | 一种宽带载波通信网络的信标信号的发送方法 |
CN112468423B (zh) * | 2021-02-04 | 2021-05-18 | 北京紫光青藤微系统有限公司 | 信号解码方法、装置、电子设备及存储介质 |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2005050885A1 (ja) | 2003-11-21 | 2005-06-02 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | マルチアンテナ受信装置、マルチアンテナ受信方法、マルチアンテナ送信装置及びマルチアンテナ通信システム |
WO2005099211A1 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2005-10-20 | Intel Corporation | Ofdm system with per subcarrier phase rotation |
JP2005354665A (ja) * | 2004-05-10 | 2005-12-22 | Sony Corp | 無線通信システム、無線通信装置及び無線通信方法、並びにコンピュータ・プログラム |
WO2010016183A1 (ja) * | 2008-08-05 | 2010-02-11 | パナソニック株式会社 | 無線通信装置及び無線通信方法 |
Family Cites Families (206)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3750175A (en) * | 1967-12-14 | 1973-07-31 | Texas Instruments Inc | Modular electronics communication system |
US3647945A (en) * | 1969-09-30 | 1972-03-07 | Rca Corp | Color encoding system utilizing two filters alternately for minimizing effects of image misregistration and image pickup device lag |
US3747098A (en) * | 1970-07-23 | 1973-07-17 | Univ Syracuse Res Corp | Phased array antenna |
US4227194A (en) * | 1971-01-04 | 1980-10-07 | Hughes Aircraft Company | Synthetic array processor |
US4217587A (en) * | 1978-08-14 | 1980-08-12 | Westinghouse Electric Corp. | Antenna beam steering controller |
NL7901865A (nl) * | 1979-03-08 | 1980-09-10 | Philips Nv | Systeem voor multiniveau datatransmissie met behulp van een hoekgemoduleerde draaggolf van constante amplitude. |
US4521779A (en) * | 1980-04-24 | 1985-06-04 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Pulse compression system |
JPS6212814A (ja) * | 1985-07-10 | 1987-01-21 | Canon Inc | ロ−タリ−エンコ−ダ− |
JP2554511B2 (ja) * | 1987-11-30 | 1996-11-13 | 日本ヒューレット・パッカード株式会社 | ベクトル電流計 |
US5149255A (en) * | 1990-02-20 | 1992-09-22 | Arthur D. Little, Inc. | Gearing system having interdigital concave-convex teeth formed as invalutes or multi-faceted polygons |
JPH0677737A (ja) * | 1992-07-08 | 1994-03-18 | Toshiba Corp | 位相検波器及びこれに用いる位相検波方式 |
JP2734955B2 (ja) * | 1993-12-24 | 1998-04-02 | 日本電気株式会社 | 無線データ通信装置 |
JPH07234382A (ja) * | 1994-02-24 | 1995-09-05 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | 超解像走査光学装置 |
KR100195458B1 (ko) * | 1994-12-05 | 1999-06-15 | 오보시 고지 | 신호다중화장치 및 방법 |
JP3444001B2 (ja) * | 1995-02-10 | 2003-09-08 | ソニー株式会社 | 符号検出回路 |
US6034987A (en) * | 1996-12-17 | 2000-03-07 | Ericsson Inc. | System for improving the quality of a received radio signal |
US6359923B1 (en) * | 1997-12-18 | 2002-03-19 | At&T Wireless Services, Inc. | Highly bandwidth efficient communications |
US6175550B1 (en) * | 1997-04-01 | 2001-01-16 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing system with dynamically scalable operating parameters and method thereof |
US6026117A (en) * | 1997-10-23 | 2000-02-15 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Method and apparatus for generating complex four-phase sequences for a CDMA communication system |
US20030138058A1 (en) * | 1998-02-06 | 2003-07-24 | Dakshi Agrawal | Diversity coded OFDM for high data-rate communication |
US6463096B1 (en) * | 1998-06-12 | 2002-10-08 | Cisco Systems, Inc | MAC protocol employing multiple data rates |
US7110444B1 (en) * | 1999-08-04 | 2006-09-19 | Parkervision, Inc. | Wireless local area network (WLAN) using universal frequency translation technology including multi-phase embodiments and circuit implementations |
JP3552622B2 (ja) * | 1999-12-24 | 2004-08-11 | 日本電気株式会社 | Pldを用いた無限移相器およびその調整方法 |
US7106821B2 (en) * | 2000-03-15 | 2006-09-12 | Sony Corporation | Data modulation method, data modulation device and communication device |
US6967993B1 (en) * | 2000-05-26 | 2005-11-22 | Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. | Ultrawide bandwidth system and method for fast synchronization using sub-code spins |
JP4326673B2 (ja) * | 2000-06-06 | 2009-09-09 | 富士通株式会社 | 非線形歪補償装置を有する通信装置の起動方法 |
DE10039666B4 (de) * | 2000-08-14 | 2011-08-11 | Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG, 81671 | Verfahren und Vorrichtung zur Abschätzung der Frequenz und/oder der Phase eines digitalen Signals |
US6928120B1 (en) * | 2000-09-25 | 2005-08-09 | Cingular Wireless Ii, Llc | Methods and apparatus for use in reducing residual phase error in OFDM communication signals |
US6996418B2 (en) * | 2000-12-29 | 2006-02-07 | Nortel Networks Limited | Apparatus and method for OFDM data communications |
JP3714910B2 (ja) * | 2001-02-20 | 2005-11-09 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | ターボ受信方法及びその受信機 |
US6859503B2 (en) * | 2001-04-07 | 2005-02-22 | Motorola, Inc. | Method and system in a transceiver for controlling a multiple-input, multiple-output communications channel |
KR100510434B1 (ko) * | 2001-04-09 | 2005-08-26 | 니폰덴신뎅와 가부시키가이샤 | Ofdm신호전달 시스템, ofdm신호 송신장치 및ofdm신호 수신장치 |
FR2824206A1 (fr) * | 2001-04-27 | 2002-10-31 | Thomson Csf | Procede de generation de modulation par division de frequence suivi de mulitplication de frequence |
JP2003087218A (ja) * | 2001-06-29 | 2003-03-20 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | マルチキャリア送信装置、マルチキャリア受信装置およびマルチキャリア無線通信方法 |
US7409012B2 (en) * | 2001-07-06 | 2008-08-05 | Motorola, Inc. | Modulator and signaling method |
US20050201473A1 (en) * | 2001-12-06 | 2005-09-15 | Ismail Lakkis | Systems and methods for receiving data in a wireless communication network |
US7224742B2 (en) * | 2001-12-14 | 2007-05-29 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for reducing the peak-to-average power ratio of OFDM/OFDMA signals |
US6693589B2 (en) * | 2002-01-30 | 2004-02-17 | Raytheon Company | Digital beam stabilization techniques for wide-bandwidth electronically scanned antennas |
JP3407254B1 (ja) * | 2002-01-31 | 2003-05-19 | 富士通株式会社 | データ伝送システム及びデータ伝送制御方法 |
US8325590B2 (en) * | 2002-02-27 | 2012-12-04 | Apple Inc. | OFDM communications system |
WO2003085869A1 (fr) * | 2002-04-09 | 2003-10-16 | Panasonic Mobile Communications Co., Ltd. | Procede et dispositif de communication par multiplexage par repartition orthogonale de la frequence (ofdm) |
FI20021013A0 (fi) * | 2002-05-29 | 2002-05-29 | Nokia Corp | Tiedonsiirtomenetelmä ja -järjestelmä |
US8457230B2 (en) * | 2002-08-21 | 2013-06-04 | Broadcom Corporation | Reconfigurable orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) chip supporting single weight diversity |
US7263385B2 (en) * | 2002-08-23 | 2007-08-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | System and method for beamforming with data rate control feedback |
US8320301B2 (en) * | 2002-10-25 | 2012-11-27 | Qualcomm Incorporated | MIMO WLAN system |
US7986742B2 (en) * | 2002-10-25 | 2011-07-26 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Pilots for MIMO communication system |
US7308063B2 (en) * | 2002-12-20 | 2007-12-11 | Nokia Corporation | Apparatus, and associated method, for effectuating post-FFT correction of fine frequency offset |
JP4091854B2 (ja) * | 2003-01-31 | 2008-05-28 | 富士通株式会社 | アレーアンテナの制御方法及びその装置、並びにアレーアンテナの制御プログラム |
US8422380B2 (en) * | 2003-03-26 | 2013-04-16 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Dynamically reconfigurable wired network |
JP2004336564A (ja) * | 2003-05-09 | 2004-11-25 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | マルチキャリア送信装置、基地局装置及び移動体通信端末装置 |
US7761059B2 (en) * | 2003-05-28 | 2010-07-20 | Alcatel-Lucent Usa Inc. | Method of transmitting or receiving with constrained feedback information |
KR100689382B1 (ko) * | 2003-06-20 | 2007-03-02 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 직교분할다중화방식을 기반으로 하는이동통신시스템에서의 송신장치 및 방법 |
US7031678B2 (en) * | 2003-07-15 | 2006-04-18 | Qualcomm Inc. | Wireless speech and data transmission |
JP4436323B2 (ja) * | 2003-07-16 | 2010-03-24 | 日本電信電話株式会社 | 光周波数符号を用いる光通信システム、その光送信装置及び光受信装置、反射型光通信装置 |
JP2005050885A (ja) | 2003-07-29 | 2005-02-24 | Kyocera Corp | 配線基板及びその製造方法 |
KR100640461B1 (ko) * | 2003-07-30 | 2006-10-30 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 직교 주파수 분할 다중 접속 방식을 사용하는 이동 통신시스템에서 서브 채널 할당 장치 및 방법 |
US7356089B2 (en) * | 2003-09-05 | 2008-04-08 | Nortel Networks Limited | Phase offset spatial multiplexing |
JP2005086781A (ja) * | 2003-09-11 | 2005-03-31 | Regents Of The Univ Of Minnesota | 部分的チャネル認識を伴うマルチアンテナ送信のための適応変調 |
KR20060093332A (ko) * | 2003-10-21 | 2006-08-24 | 코닌클리즈케 필립스 일렉트로닉스 엔.브이. | 송신기, 수신기, 트랜시버, 무선 장치 및 원격통신 시스템 |
US7616698B2 (en) * | 2003-11-04 | 2009-11-10 | Atheros Communications, Inc. | Multiple-input multiple output system and method |
KR100584439B1 (ko) * | 2003-11-05 | 2006-05-26 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 다중 안테나를 사용하는 직교주파수분할다중 시스템에서간섭신호 제거 장치 및 방법 |
JP2005184730A (ja) * | 2003-12-24 | 2005-07-07 | Sony Corp | 無線通信システム、無線通信装置及び無線通信方法、並びにコンピュータ・プログラム |
US7308047B2 (en) * | 2003-12-31 | 2007-12-11 | Intel Corporation | Symbol de-mapping methods in multiple-input multiple-output systems |
US7995667B2 (en) * | 2004-02-13 | 2011-08-09 | Broadcom Corporation | Reduced latency concatenated reed solomon-convolutional coding for MIMO wireless LAN |
US7668227B2 (en) * | 2004-03-05 | 2010-02-23 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Method and apparatus for reducing interference in spread spectrum signals using spreading code cross-correlations |
US7633994B2 (en) * | 2004-07-30 | 2009-12-15 | Rearden, LLC. | System and method for distributed input-distributed output wireless communications |
JP4513400B2 (ja) * | 2004-04-27 | 2010-07-28 | ソニー株式会社 | 無線通信システム、無線通信装置及び無線通信方法、並びにコンピュータ・プログラム |
US8233555B2 (en) * | 2004-05-17 | 2012-07-31 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Time varying delay diversity of OFDM |
JP4256301B2 (ja) * | 2004-05-28 | 2009-04-22 | 株式会社東芝 | 無線通信装置 |
US7327983B2 (en) * | 2004-06-25 | 2008-02-05 | Mitsubishi Electric Research Laboratories, Inc. | RF-based antenna selection in MIMO systems |
US7324794B2 (en) * | 2004-09-29 | 2008-01-29 | Tzero Technologies, Inc. | Phase combining diversity |
US7522562B2 (en) * | 2004-10-06 | 2009-04-21 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for channel estimation in a spatial multiplexing MIMO system |
US8098776B2 (en) * | 2004-10-06 | 2012-01-17 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for pre-equalization in a single weight spatial multiplexing MIMO system |
US7366465B2 (en) * | 2004-11-19 | 2008-04-29 | Sirit Technologies Inc. | Homodyne RFID receiver and method |
US7643444B2 (en) * | 2005-03-10 | 2010-01-05 | Broadcom Corporation | Method and system for parsing bits in an interleaver for adaptive modulations in a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless local area network (WLAN) system |
US7787843B2 (en) * | 2005-03-29 | 2010-08-31 | Broadcom Corporation | Multiple band direct conversion radio frequency transceiver integrated circuit |
US20060227891A1 (en) * | 2005-04-07 | 2006-10-12 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method of channel estimation for MIMO-OFDM using phase rotated low overhead preamble |
KR20060124090A (ko) * | 2005-05-30 | 2006-12-05 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 3대역 단일 인테나 공유장치 |
WO2007022630A1 (en) * | 2005-08-23 | 2007-03-01 | Nortel Networks Limited | Methods and systems for ofdm multiple zone partitioning |
CN102546512B (zh) | 2005-08-24 | 2017-04-26 | 无线局域网一有限责任公司 | 正交频分复用发送装置和正交频分复用接收装置 |
EP1929735B1 (en) * | 2005-09-27 | 2019-01-16 | Nokia Technologies Oy | Pilot structure for multicarrier transmissions |
JP4528236B2 (ja) * | 2005-09-29 | 2010-08-18 | 株式会社日立製作所 | 無線基地局装置および通信方法 |
JP4079964B2 (ja) | 2005-09-30 | 2008-04-23 | Necエレクトロニクス株式会社 | 無線受信装置及びアンテナ・ベリフィケーション方法 |
JP4939888B2 (ja) * | 2005-10-05 | 2012-05-30 | パナソニック株式会社 | 無線通信装置 |
CN1953361B (zh) * | 2005-10-18 | 2010-05-05 | 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 | 发送多载频信号的方法及系统 |
US7817641B1 (en) * | 2005-10-20 | 2010-10-19 | Amir Keyvan Khandani | Methods for spatial multiplexing of wireless two-way channels |
WO2007052576A1 (ja) * | 2005-10-31 | 2007-05-10 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | 端末装置、基地局装置および通信システム |
US7917176B2 (en) | 2006-02-14 | 2011-03-29 | Nec Laboratories America, Inc. | Structured codebook and successive beamforming for multiple-antenna systems |
JP4748311B2 (ja) * | 2005-10-31 | 2011-08-17 | 日本電気株式会社 | 微弱光の光パワー測定方法および装置、それを用いた光通信システム |
KR101165629B1 (ko) * | 2005-11-03 | 2012-07-17 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | Ofdm 신호 생성/복원 방법 및 그 장치 |
JP4680036B2 (ja) * | 2005-11-09 | 2011-05-11 | 独立行政法人情報通信研究機構 | 受信装置および受信方法 |
US8072943B2 (en) * | 2005-12-09 | 2011-12-06 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Wireless communication system and methodology for communicating via multiple information streams |
ES2382933T3 (es) | 2005-12-20 | 2012-06-14 | Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha | Método de control de transmisión, estación base, unidad móvil y sistema de comunicación con diversidad de retardo |
GB2433681B (en) * | 2005-12-21 | 2009-05-06 | Iti Scotland Ltd | Communication system and method |
US20070153934A1 (en) | 2005-12-29 | 2007-07-05 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Constant uneven power loading in beamforming systems for high throughput wireless communications |
US8014415B2 (en) * | 2005-12-30 | 2011-09-06 | Meshnetworks, Inc. | Apparatus, system and method for communicating information in a wireless communication network |
JP4958565B2 (ja) * | 2006-01-06 | 2012-06-20 | パナソニック株式会社 | 無線通信装置 |
JP4758781B2 (ja) * | 2006-01-31 | 2011-08-31 | 富士通株式会社 | Dcオフセット補正装置及びその方法 |
US7710319B2 (en) * | 2006-02-14 | 2010-05-04 | Sibeam, Inc. | Adaptive beam-steering methods to maximize wireless link budget and reduce delay-spread using multiple transmit and receive antennas |
KR100817497B1 (ko) * | 2006-03-10 | 2008-03-27 | 한국전자통신연구원 | 다중 안테나를 위한 심볼 생성 장치 및 방법 |
CN101039136B (zh) * | 2006-03-15 | 2011-09-14 | 华为技术有限公司 | 基于空频编码的多天线发射分集方法及其系统 |
CN101043298B (zh) * | 2006-03-20 | 2011-07-27 | 华为技术有限公司 | 一种多天线通信中发射信号的方法及系统 |
JP2007259445A (ja) * | 2006-03-20 | 2007-10-04 | Fujitsu Ltd | Ofdm通信システムにおける送信装置及び方法 |
US7672388B2 (en) * | 2006-03-23 | 2010-03-02 | Motorola, Inc. | Method of providing signal diversity in an OFDM system |
US7787547B2 (en) * | 2006-03-24 | 2010-08-31 | Broadcom Corporation | Hybrid radio frequency transmitter |
CN101501927B (zh) * | 2006-04-27 | 2013-09-04 | 泰科电子服务有限责任公司 | 基于异向材料结构的天线、设备和系统 |
KR100894992B1 (ko) * | 2006-05-09 | 2009-04-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 다중 안테나 시스템에서 검출 복잡도 감소 장치 및 방법 |
KR20070113967A (ko) * | 2006-05-26 | 2007-11-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 위상천이 기반의 프리코딩 방법 및 이를 지원하는 송수신기 |
EP2044711A4 (en) * | 2006-07-06 | 2013-01-23 | Lg Electronics Inc | METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CORRECTING ERRORS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE AUXILIARY CARRIERS USING SEVERAL ANTENNAS |
US8737361B2 (en) * | 2006-07-07 | 2014-05-27 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Method and apparatus for transmitting signal in communication system |
JP2008048092A (ja) * | 2006-08-14 | 2008-02-28 | Toshiba Corp | Ofdmを用いる無線送信方法、送信機及び受信機 |
JP4740065B2 (ja) * | 2006-08-22 | 2011-08-03 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | 基地局、移動局及びパイロットチャネル生成方法 |
KR20080022033A (ko) * | 2006-09-05 | 2008-03-10 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 프리코딩 정보 피드백 방법 및 프리코딩 방법 |
KR20080026010A (ko) * | 2006-09-19 | 2008-03-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 위상천이 기반의 프리코딩을 이용한 데이터 전송 방법 및이를 구현하는 송수신 장치 |
KR20080026019A (ko) | 2006-09-19 | 2008-03-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 위상천이 기반의 프리코딩 방법 및 이를 지원하는 송수신기 |
US7746766B2 (en) * | 2006-09-21 | 2010-06-29 | Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. | Systems and methods for obtaining an optimum transmission format of reference signals to maximize capacity and minimize peak to average power ratio |
KR101356508B1 (ko) * | 2006-11-06 | 2014-01-29 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 무선 통신 시스템에서의 데이터 전송 방법 |
KR100939738B1 (ko) * | 2006-12-21 | 2010-01-29 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 다중안테나 무선통신 시스템에서 순환 지연 다이버시티장치 및 방법 |
JP5182884B2 (ja) * | 2006-12-28 | 2013-04-17 | パナソニック株式会社 | 無線通信装置及び再送制御方法 |
US8422581B2 (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2013-04-16 | Panasonic Corporation | Multi-antenna transmission device, multi-antenna reception device, multi-antenna transmission method, multi-antenna reception method, terminal device, and base station device |
JP5213469B2 (ja) * | 2007-01-30 | 2013-06-19 | パナソニック株式会社 | 変調装置及び復調装置 |
FI20075083A0 (fi) * | 2007-02-06 | 2007-02-06 | Nokia Corp | Ilmaisumenetelmä ja -laite monivuo-MIMOa varten |
US8780771B2 (en) * | 2007-02-06 | 2014-07-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Cyclic delay diversity and precoding for wireless communication |
US7995671B2 (en) * | 2007-02-09 | 2011-08-09 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) transmission with rank-dependent precoding |
ATE539499T1 (de) * | 2007-02-14 | 2012-01-15 | Lg Electronics Inc | Datensende- und empfangsverfahren mit auf phasenverschiebung basierender vorcodierung und dieses unterstützender sender/empfänger |
WO2008103317A2 (en) * | 2007-02-16 | 2008-08-28 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Precoded pilot transmission for multi-user and single user mimo communications |
WO2008115508A1 (en) * | 2007-03-19 | 2008-09-25 | Interdigital Technology Corporation | Combined precoding vector switch and frequency switch transmit diversity for secondary synchronization channel in evolved utra |
WO2008118474A2 (en) * | 2007-03-26 | 2008-10-02 | Sibeam, Inc. | Extensions to adaptive beam-steering method |
KR20080101023A (ko) * | 2007-05-15 | 2008-11-21 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 광대역 무선통신 시스템에서 타일 구조 기반의 최대전력 대평균전력 감소 장치 및 방법 |
US8107544B2 (en) * | 2007-05-16 | 2012-01-31 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Method and apparatus for feedback in closed loop transmitting |
WO2008139630A1 (ja) * | 2007-05-16 | 2008-11-20 | Fujitsu Limited | 無線通信装置および無線通信方法 |
US8160177B2 (en) * | 2007-06-25 | 2012-04-17 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Transmit methods with delay diversity and space-frequency diversity |
US8238836B2 (en) * | 2007-07-09 | 2012-08-07 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Methods for sending small packets in a peer-to-peer (P2P) network |
KR101421251B1 (ko) * | 2007-08-14 | 2014-07-18 | 한국과학기술원 | 중계기를 기반으로 하는 다중안테나 무선통신 시스템에서협력 중계를 위한 장치 및 방법 |
KR20090030200A (ko) * | 2007-09-19 | 2009-03-24 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 위상천이 기반의 프리코딩을 이용한 데이터 송수신 방법 및이를 지원하는 송수신기 |
JP2009077023A (ja) * | 2007-09-19 | 2009-04-09 | Sharp Corp | チューナおよびそれを備えたダイバーシティ受信システム |
US9137806B2 (en) * | 2007-09-21 | 2015-09-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Interference management employing fractional time reuse |
JP2009088649A (ja) | 2007-09-27 | 2009-04-23 | Toshiba Corp | 無線通信装置、無線通信装置の制御方法および無線通信装置の制御プログラム |
KR101413309B1 (ko) * | 2007-10-08 | 2014-06-27 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 채널 선택성을 감소시키는 전송기 및 데이터 전송 방법 |
US8130847B2 (en) * | 2007-11-09 | 2012-03-06 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Closed-loop transmission feedback in wireless communication systems |
CN101437007A (zh) * | 2007-11-12 | 2009-05-20 | 华为技术有限公司 | Mimo系统的数据发送/接收方法、装置及设备 |
KR101048437B1 (ko) * | 2007-11-30 | 2011-07-11 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 무선 통신 시스템에서 시변 순환 지연 다이버시티 방법 및 장치 |
US8626079B2 (en) * | 2007-12-12 | 2014-01-07 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Link adaptation method and apparatus in wireless communication system |
JP2009152688A (ja) * | 2007-12-18 | 2009-07-09 | Toshiba Corp | 端末装置、基地局、無線通信方法および通信プログラム |
JP5244381B2 (ja) * | 2007-12-26 | 2013-07-24 | 株式会社東芝 | 無線通信装置、無線通信方法および通信プログラム |
PL2232726T3 (pl) * | 2008-01-14 | 2017-08-31 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Cykliczne przełączanie kodera wstępnego z otwartą pętlą w komunikacjach MIMO |
CN101978616B (zh) * | 2008-01-17 | 2013-06-12 | 上海贝尔股份有限公司 | 多天线发射机中对信号进行循环延迟映射的方法和装置 |
US20090185630A1 (en) * | 2008-01-23 | 2009-07-23 | Mediatek Inc. | Method and apparatus for estimating the channel impulse response of multi-carrier communicating systems |
US8009685B2 (en) * | 2008-02-01 | 2011-08-30 | Nokia Corporation | Signalling the presence of extension frames |
KR100937429B1 (ko) * | 2008-02-04 | 2010-01-18 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 신호 송수신 방법 및 신호 송수신 장치 |
JP5047834B2 (ja) * | 2008-02-15 | 2012-10-10 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | 無線通信装置及び無線通信方法 |
JP2009193905A (ja) * | 2008-02-18 | 2009-08-27 | Panasonic Corp | パネルスイッチ |
WO2009104927A2 (en) * | 2008-02-21 | 2009-08-27 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for transmitting and receiving a frame including control information in a broadcasting system |
WO2009106090A1 (en) * | 2008-02-25 | 2009-09-03 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | A method of and a device for precoding transmit data signals in a wireless mimo communication system |
KR101455393B1 (ko) * | 2008-03-03 | 2014-10-27 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 무선 통신 시스템에서 제어 정보를 송수신하는 방법 및 장치 |
US20090231196A1 (en) * | 2008-03-11 | 2009-09-17 | Huaning Niu | Mmwave wpan communication system with fast adaptive beam tracking |
US8014686B2 (en) * | 2008-03-20 | 2011-09-06 | Infinera Corporation | Polarization demultiplexing optical receiver using polarization oversampling and electronic polarization tracking |
EP2290890A1 (en) * | 2008-06-17 | 2011-03-02 | Panasonic Corporation | Radio transmission device and radio transmission method |
EP2304914B1 (en) * | 2008-06-30 | 2011-12-07 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (PUBL) | IQ-imbalance compensation in presence of carrier offset |
KR20100017039A (ko) * | 2008-08-05 | 2010-02-16 | 엘지전자 주식회사 | 다중 안테나 시스템에서 데이터 전송 방법 |
KR101268687B1 (ko) * | 2008-08-18 | 2013-05-29 | 한국전자통신연구원 | 다중-셀 협력 통신을 위한 기지국들 및 단말을 포함하는 통신 시스템 |
US8331310B2 (en) * | 2008-08-22 | 2012-12-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Systems and methods employing multiple input multiple output (MIMO) techniques |
JP5149111B2 (ja) * | 2008-09-09 | 2013-02-20 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | 無線中継装置及び無線中継方法 |
JP2010074417A (ja) * | 2008-09-17 | 2010-04-02 | Fujitsu Ltd | 無線送信機、受信機および無線送信方法 |
KR101497928B1 (ko) * | 2008-09-25 | 2015-03-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 다중입력 다중출력 시스템에서 신호 송수신 장치 및 그 방법 |
WO2010043750A1 (en) * | 2008-10-13 | 2010-04-22 | Elektrobit Wireless Communications Oy | Antenna beam |
US8699609B2 (en) * | 2008-11-27 | 2014-04-15 | Optis Cellular Technology, Llc | Methods and arrangements for peak to average power ratio reduction |
GB0823593D0 (en) * | 2008-12-30 | 2009-01-28 | Astrium Ltd | Calibration apparatus and method |
US8116819B2 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2012-02-14 | Intel Corporation | Arrangements for beam refinement in a wireless network |
KR101268699B1 (ko) | 2009-01-05 | 2013-05-29 | 후지쯔 가부시끼가이샤 | 통신 장치, 이동국 및 통신 제어 방법 |
CN101771648B (zh) * | 2009-01-06 | 2018-03-23 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 一种多天线信号处理系统及方法 |
JP4587004B2 (ja) * | 2009-01-07 | 2010-11-24 | 岩崎通信機株式会社 | マルチアンテナを用いた無線通信方法、無線通信システムおよび無線通信装置 |
US8588193B1 (en) * | 2009-02-03 | 2013-11-19 | Sibeam, Inc. | Enhanced wireless data rates using multiple beams |
JP5420275B2 (ja) * | 2009-03-03 | 2014-02-19 | 株式会社Nttドコモ | 符号多重伝送方法、送信装置及び受信装置 |
US8537785B2 (en) * | 2009-03-05 | 2013-09-17 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd | Method and apparatus for cell/sector coverage of a public channel through multiple antennas |
US8358718B2 (en) * | 2009-04-02 | 2013-01-22 | Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. | Apparatus and method for determining optimum integer perturbation vector of low complexity in multiple antenna system |
KR101527110B1 (ko) * | 2009-04-13 | 2015-06-16 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 분산 다중 입출력 무선통신 시스템에서 전력 제어 장치 및 방법 |
US8208434B2 (en) * | 2009-04-28 | 2012-06-26 | Motorola Mobility, Inc. | Method of signaling particular types of resource elements in a wireless communication system |
CN101540751B (zh) * | 2009-04-30 | 2013-01-02 | 北京邮电大学 | 用于多流数据的解调方法和系统 |
US8730111B2 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2014-05-20 | Panasonic Corporation | Antenna evaluation apparatus for evaluating multiple wave of radio waves transmitted from scatterer antennas with function of calibration for the same apparatus |
CN102461036A (zh) * | 2009-06-12 | 2012-05-16 | 三菱电机株式会社 | 通信装置 |
US8520753B2 (en) * | 2009-06-19 | 2013-08-27 | Acer Incorporated | Systems and methods for code sequence extension over transmission in wireless communication environments |
US8433008B2 (en) * | 2009-08-07 | 2013-04-30 | The Aerospace Corporation | Receiver for detecting signals in the presence of high power interference |
JP5446671B2 (ja) * | 2009-09-29 | 2014-03-19 | ソニー株式会社 | 無線伝送システム及び無線通信方法 |
US8923905B2 (en) * | 2009-09-30 | 2014-12-30 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Scrambling sequence initialization for coordinated multi-point transmissions |
JP5039110B2 (ja) * | 2009-10-05 | 2012-10-03 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | 基地局装置、移動局装置及び送信電力制御方法 |
US8902873B2 (en) * | 2009-10-08 | 2014-12-02 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Efficient signaling for closed-loop transmit diversity |
US8873650B2 (en) * | 2009-10-12 | 2014-10-28 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Configurable spatial channel information feedback in wireless communication system |
US8599777B2 (en) * | 2009-11-17 | 2013-12-03 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Channel quality indicator design for multiple-user multiple-input and multiple-output in high-speed packet access systems |
JP5280991B2 (ja) * | 2009-11-30 | 2013-09-04 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | 移動局装置、基地局装置、mimoシステム及びデータ伝送方法 |
JP5540733B2 (ja) * | 2010-01-29 | 2014-07-02 | 富士通セミコンダクター株式会社 | 信号処理装置,信号処理方法とそれを有する受信装置 |
US9191966B2 (en) * | 2010-03-30 | 2015-11-17 | Intel Mobile Communications GmbH | Communication device and method for communicating in a communication mode using a frequency range according to a frame structure |
US9444577B1 (en) * | 2010-04-05 | 2016-09-13 | Marvell International Ltd. | Calibration correction for implicit beamformer using an explicit beamforming technique in a wireless MIMO communication system |
US8520572B2 (en) * | 2010-05-05 | 2013-08-27 | Motorola Mobility Llc | Multiplexing control and data on multilayer uplink transmissions |
ES2651485T3 (es) | 2010-06-17 | 2018-01-26 | Sun Patent Trust | Método y transmisor de precodificación |
US8472399B2 (en) * | 2010-07-06 | 2013-06-25 | Apple Inc. | Ranging channel structures and methods |
US8948305B2 (en) * | 2010-11-16 | 2015-02-03 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission apparatus, reception method and reception apparatus |
US9161366B2 (en) * | 2010-11-18 | 2015-10-13 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Methods and devices for configuring antenna mode for uplink communication |
US20120127034A1 (en) * | 2010-11-19 | 2012-05-24 | Raysat Antenna Systems, L.L.C. | Phased Array Antenna with Reduced Component Count |
JP5886207B2 (ja) | 2010-12-10 | 2016-03-16 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
JP5578619B2 (ja) * | 2010-12-10 | 2014-08-27 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および受信装置 |
US9484993B2 (en) * | 2010-12-14 | 2016-11-01 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Broadcast signal transmitter/receiver and broadcast signal transmitting/receiving method |
US20120224651A1 (en) * | 2011-03-03 | 2012-09-06 | Yutaka Murakami | Signal generation method and signal generation apparatus |
JP5784740B2 (ja) * | 2011-09-08 | 2015-09-24 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
US8576951B2 (en) * | 2011-10-24 | 2013-11-05 | Sigear Europe Sarl | Mixed-signal radio frequency receiver implementing multi-mode spur avoidance |
KR101880990B1 (ko) * | 2011-11-16 | 2018-08-24 | 삼성전자주식회사 | 다중 안테나 통신 시스템에서 신호 송수신 방법 및 장치 |
-
2012
- 2012-01-20 WO PCT/JP2012/000352 patent/WO2012111256A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2012-01-20 RU RU2013104166/07A patent/RU2593381C2/ru active
- 2012-01-20 MX MX2013000953A patent/MX2013000953A/es active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 CN CN201711007446.7A patent/CN107566023B/zh active Active
- 2012-01-20 EP EP12747257.9A patent/EP2677676A4/en active Pending
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020227025902A patent/KR102534519B1/ko active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 BR BR112013002605-7A patent/BR112013002605B1/pt active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 JP JP2012557809A patent/JP5984062B2/ja active Active
- 2012-01-20 CN CN2012800020663A patent/CN103109482A/zh active Pending
- 2012-01-20 SG SG2013002217A patent/SG187030A1/en unknown
- 2012-01-20 MY MYPI2013000190A patent/MY168825A/en unknown
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020207019572A patent/KR20200085931A/ko not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2012-01-20 PE PE2013000177A patent/PE20131092A1/es active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020227010732A patent/KR102427003B1/ko active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 MX MX2015003256A patent/MX336169B/es unknown
- 2012-01-20 CN CN201710160473.1A patent/CN107070522B/zh active Active
- 2012-01-20 AU AU2012218953A patent/AU2012218953B2/en active Active
- 2012-01-20 CA CA3168049A patent/CA3168049A1/en active Pending
- 2012-01-20 MX MX2016012433A patent/MX368299B/es unknown
- 2012-01-20 MX MX2016000042A patent/MX342312B/es unknown
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020197027755A patent/KR102133354B1/ko active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020217008224A patent/KR102382798B1/ko active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 CA CA3020241A patent/CA3020241C/en active Active
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020137001013A patent/KR102026652B1/ko active IP Right Grant
- 2012-01-20 KR KR1020237016525A patent/KR20230074299A/ko not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2012-01-20 CN CN201711010644.9A patent/CN107659351B/zh active Active
- 2012-01-20 US US13/811,064 patent/US8885596B2/en active Active
- 2012-01-20 CN CN201711007411.3A patent/CN107612597B/zh active Active
- 2012-01-20 CA CA2802654A patent/CA2802654C/en active Active
- 2012-02-17 AR ARP120100544A patent/AR090008A1/es active IP Right Grant
- 2012-02-17 TW TW101105291A patent/TWI578732B/zh active
- 2012-12-27 IL IL223918A patent/IL223918A/en active IP Right Grant
-
2013
- 2013-01-23 MX MX2019011372A patent/MX2019011372A/es unknown
- 2013-02-22 CL CL2013000508A patent/CL2013000508A1/es unknown
-
2014
- 2014-09-30 US US14/501,780 patent/US9667333B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-07-21 JP JP2016143614A patent/JP6331160B2/ja active Active
-
2017
- 2017-01-30 AU AU2017200598A patent/AU2017200598B2/en active Active
- 2017-04-25 US US15/496,406 patent/US10009207B2/en active Active
- 2017-08-07 PH PH12017501410A patent/PH12017501410A1/en unknown
-
2018
- 2018-04-12 JP JP2018077053A patent/JP6489454B2/ja active Active
- 2018-05-23 US US15/987,016 patent/US10225123B2/en active Active
-
2019
- 2019-01-03 US US16/239,145 patent/US10476720B2/en active Active
- 2019-02-14 JP JP2019024070A patent/JP6883789B2/ja active Active
- 2019-03-19 AU AU2019201897A patent/AU2019201897A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2019-09-25 US US16/582,644 patent/US11063805B2/en active Active
-
2021
- 2021-02-10 AU AU2021200843A patent/AU2021200843B2/en active Active
- 2021-04-20 JP JP2021070960A patent/JP7117506B2/ja active Active
- 2021-06-03 US US17/338,092 patent/US11240084B2/en active Active
- 2021-12-15 US US17/551,984 patent/US20220109599A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2022
- 2022-10-14 AU AU2022252818A patent/AU2022252818A1/en active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-01-27 US US18/102,338 patent/US11943032B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2005050885A1 (ja) | 2003-11-21 | 2005-06-02 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | マルチアンテナ受信装置、マルチアンテナ受信方法、マルチアンテナ送信装置及びマルチアンテナ通信システム |
WO2005099211A1 (en) * | 2004-03-31 | 2005-10-20 | Intel Corporation | Ofdm system with per subcarrier phase rotation |
JP2005354665A (ja) * | 2004-05-10 | 2005-12-22 | Sony Corp | 無線通信システム、無線通信装置及び無線通信方法、並びにコンピュータ・プログラム |
WO2010016183A1 (ja) * | 2008-08-05 | 2010-02-11 | パナソニック株式会社 | 無線通信装置及び無線通信方法 |
Non-Patent Citations (18)
Title |
---|
"A tutorial on 'Parallel concatenated (Turbo) coding', 'Turbo (iterative) decoding' and related topics", IEICE, TECHNICAL REPORT IT98-51 |
"Achieving near-capacity on a multiple-antenna channel", IEEE TRANSACTION ON COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 51, no. 3, March 2003 (2003-03-01), pages 389 - 399 |
"Advanced signal processing for PLCs: Wavelet-OFDM", PROC. OF IEEE INTERNATIONAL SYMPOSIUM ON ISPLC 2008, pages 187 - 192 |
"BER performance evaluation in 2x2 MIMO spatial multiplexing systems under Rician fading channels", IEICE TRANS. FUNDAMENTALS, vol. E91-A, no. 10, October 2008 (2008-10-01), pages 2798 - 2807 |
"Likelihood function for QR-MLD suitable for soft-decision turbo decoding and its performance", IEICE TRANS. COMMUN., vol. E88-B, no. 1, January 2004 (2004-01-01), pages 47 - 57 |
"Performance analysis and design optimization of LDPC-coded MIMO OFDM systems", IEEE TRANS. SIGNAL PROCESSING, vol. 52, no. 2, February 2004 (2004-02-01), pages 348 - 361 |
"Second generation framing structure, channel coding and modulation systems for broadcasting, interactive services, news gathering and other broadband satellite applications", ETSI EN 302 307, vol. 1.1.2, June 2006 (2006-06-01) |
"Turbo space-time codes with time varying linear transformations", IEEE TRANS. WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS, vol. 6, no. 2, February 2007 (2007-02-01), pages 486 - 493 |
AL-NAFFOURI, T.Y. ET AL.: "Opportunistic beamforming with precoding for spatially correlated channels", INFORMATION THEORY, 2009. CWIT 2009. 11TH CANADIAN WORKSHOP ON, 15 May 2009 (2009-05-15), pages 63 - 66, XP031471464 * |
D. J. C. MACKAY: "Good error-correcting codes based on very sparse matrices", IEEE TRANS. INFORM. THEORY, vol. 45, no. 2, March 1999 (1999-03-01), pages 399 - 431 |
D. J. LOVE; R. W. HEATH JR.: "Limited feedback unitary precoding for spatial multiplexing systems", IEEE TRANS. INF. THEORY, vol. 51, no. 8, August 2005 (2005-08-01), pages 2967 - 1976 |
DVB DOCUMENT A122, FRAMING STRUCTURE, CHANNEL CODING AND MODULATION FOR A SECOND GENERATION DIGITAL TERRESTRIAL TELEVISION BROADCASTING SYSTEM (DVB-T2, June 2008 (2008-06-01) |
L. VANGELISTA; N. BENVENUTO; S. TOMASIN: "Key technologies for next-generation terrestrial digital television standard DVB-T2", IEEE COMMUN. MAGAZINE, vol. 47, no. 10, October 2009 (2009-10-01), pages 146 - 153 |
R. G. GALLAGER: "Low-density parity-check codes", IRE TRANS. INFORM. THEORY, vol. IT-8, 1962, pages 21 - 28 |
S. M. ALAMOUTI: "A simple transmit diversity technique for wireless communications", IEEE J. SELECT. AREAS COMMUN., vol. 16, no. 8, October 1998 (1998-10-01), pages 1451 - 1458 |
T. OHGANE; T. NISHIMURA; Y. OGAWA: "Application of space division multiplexing and those performance in a MIMO channel", IEICE TRANS. COMMUN., vol. 88-B, no. 5, May 2005 (2005-05-01), pages 1843 - 1851 |
V. TAROKH; H. JAFRKHANI; A. R. CALDERBANK: "Space-time block coding for wireless communications: Performance results", IEEE J. SELECT. AREAS COMMUN., vol. 17, no. 3, March 1999 (1999-03-01), pages 451 - 460 |
Y.-L. UENG; C.-C. CHENG: "A fast-convergence decoding method and memory-efficient VLSI decoder architecture for irregular LDPC codes in the IEEE 802.16e standards", IEEE VTC-2007 FALL, pages 1255 - 1259 |
Cited By (33)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2017229080A (ja) * | 2011-04-19 | 2017-12-28 | サン パテント トラスト | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
JP2019198083A (ja) * | 2011-04-19 | 2019-11-14 | サン パテント トラスト | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 |
CN102916923B (zh) * | 2012-10-11 | 2015-07-22 | 华中科技大学 | 一种降低多载波系统峰均功率比的信息传输方法 |
CN102916923A (zh) * | 2012-10-11 | 2013-02-06 | 华中科技大学 | 一种降低多载波系统峰均功率比的信息传输方法 |
JP2022141788A (ja) * | 2013-01-11 | 2022-09-29 | サン パテント トラスト | 受信方法 |
US10498575B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2019-12-03 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
JP2019193278A (ja) * | 2013-10-31 | 2019-10-31 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブアメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 送信方法及び送信システム |
US9998312B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2018-06-12 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
CN105637788B (zh) * | 2013-10-31 | 2018-06-12 | 松下电器(美国)知识产权公司 | 发送方法、发送装置、接收方法及接收装置 |
US11902067B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2024-02-13 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US10129062B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2018-11-13 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US10355898B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2019-07-16 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US9667326B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2017-05-30 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
JP7411045B2 (ja) | 2013-10-31 | 2024-01-10 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法及び送信システム |
WO2015064081A1 (ja) * | 2013-10-31 | 2015-05-07 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法 |
JPWO2015064081A1 (ja) * | 2013-10-31 | 2017-03-09 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 送信方法 |
US9520934B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2016-12-13 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US10608855B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2020-03-31 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US10791011B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2020-09-29 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US10911278B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2021-02-02 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
JP2021036731A (ja) * | 2013-10-31 | 2021-03-04 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカPanasonic Intellectual Property Corporation of America | 送信方法及び送信システム |
US11575553B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2023-02-07 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
US11177991B2 (en) | 2013-10-31 | 2021-11-16 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission method, transmission device, reception method and reception device |
JP7159266B2 (ja) | 2013-10-31 | 2022-10-24 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信方法及び送信システム |
CN110326226A (zh) * | 2016-12-12 | 2019-10-11 | 松下电器(美国)知识产权公司 | 发送装置以及发送方法 |
JP2022113868A (ja) * | 2016-12-12 | 2022-08-04 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および送信方法 |
JP7092682B2 (ja) | 2016-12-12 | 2022-06-28 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および送信方法 |
CN110326226B (zh) * | 2016-12-12 | 2022-04-01 | 松下电器(美国)知识产权公司 | 发送装置以及发送方法 |
US11044131B2 (en) | 2016-12-12 | 2021-06-22 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission device and transmission method |
JP7309975B2 (ja) | 2016-12-12 | 2023-07-18 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および送信方法 |
US11716182B2 (en) | 2016-12-12 | 2023-08-01 | Panansonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Transmission device and transmission method |
JPWO2018110442A1 (ja) * | 2016-12-12 | 2019-10-24 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および送信方法 |
WO2018110442A1 (ja) * | 2016-12-12 | 2018-06-21 | パナソニック インテレクチュアル プロパティ コーポレーション オブ アメリカ | 送信装置および送信方法 |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6598093B2 (ja) | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 | |
JP7117506B2 (ja) | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 | |
JP6350926B2 (ja) | 信号生成方法及び信号生成装置 | |
JP6593612B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP6447911B2 (ja) | 送信方法、受信方法、送信装置及び受信装置 | |
JP6115844B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP5866357B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP6176543B2 (ja) | 送信装置、送信方法、受信装置および受信方法 | |
JP2013247654A (ja) | 送信装置および受信装置 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 201280002066.3 Country of ref document: CN |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 12747257 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2802654 Country of ref document: CA |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 223918 Country of ref document: IL |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2012218953 Country of ref document: AU Date of ref document: 20120120 Kind code of ref document: A |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20137001013 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2012557809 Country of ref document: JP Ref document number: 13811064 Country of ref document: US |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2012747257 Country of ref document: EP |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: MX/A/2013/000953 Country of ref document: MX |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 000177-2013 Country of ref document: PE Ref document number: 12013500212 Country of ref document: PH |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2013104166 Country of ref document: RU Kind code of ref document: A |
|
REG | Reference to national code |
Ref country code: BR Ref legal event code: B01A Ref document number: 112013002605 Country of ref document: BR |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 12017501410 Country of ref document: PH |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 112013002605 Country of ref document: BR Kind code of ref document: A2 Effective date: 20130201 |